Digital Image and Video Processing

B.E.(E&TC)-2020-2021

Multiple Choice Questions

Unit No.1

1. DIP Stands:
a) Digital image processing
b) Digital information processing
c) Digital induction process
d) None of these

2. What is image?
a) Picture
b) Matrix of pixel
c) Collection of pixel
d) All of these

3. What is digital image?

a) When x, y, and the amplitude values of f are all finite, discrete quantities, we call the image
a digital image.
b) When x, y, and the amplitude values of f are all infinite, discrete quantities, we call the imge a
digital image.
c) a & b
d) None of these

4. The field of digital image processing refers to processing digital images by means:
a) Digital computer
b) Super computer
c) mini-computer
d) None of these

5. What is pixel?
a) Pixel is the elements of a digital image
b) Pixel is the elements of a analog image
c) a & b
d) none of these

6. First application of digital image was in the:

a) News paper industry
b) communication system
c) a & b
d) None of these

7. The process of extracting information from the image is called as

a) Image enhancement
b) Image restoration
c) Image Analysis
d) Image compression

8. Among the following image processing techniques which is fast, precise and flexible
a) optical
b) digital
c) electronic
d) photographic

9. An image is considered to be a function of a(x,y) where ‘a’ represents

a) height of image
b) width of image
c) amplitude of image pixel intensity
d) resolution of image

10. Which is the image processing technique used to improve the quality of image for human
viewing?
a) compression
b) enhancement
c) restoration
d) analysis

11. Which type of enhancement operations are used to modify pixel values according to the
value of the pixel’s neighbors?
a) point operations
b) local operations
c) global operations
d) mask operations
12. In which type of progressive coding technique, gray color is encoded first and then
other colors are encoded?
a) quality progressive
b) resolution progressive
c) component progressive
d) region progressive

13. Which image processing technique is used to eliminate electronic noise by mathematical
process?
a) Frame averaging
b) Image understanding
c) Image compression
d) none

14. The amount of noise decreases by ————— of number of frames averaged

a) division
b) square root
c) linear
d) none

15. Dilation-Morphological image operation technique is used to

a) shrink brighter areas of the image
b) diminishes intensity variation over the image
c) expands brighter areas of the image
d) scales pixel intensity uniformly

16. Image compression is

a) making image look better
b) sharpening the intensity-transition regions
c) minimizing degradation over image
d) reducing the redundancy of the image data

17. Which is a fundamental task in image processing used to match two or more pictures?
a) registration
b) segmentation
c) computer vision
d) image differencing
18. Which technique is used for the images of the same scene are acquired from different
View points
a) multiview analysis
b) multitemporal analysis
c) multisensory analysis
d) image differencing
19. Which sensor is used for obtaining the video source in 3d face recognition system
a) optical
b) electronic
c) 3d sensor
d) 2d sensor

20. What algorithm is used in fingerprint technology

a) Intensity based algorithm
b) pattern based algorithm
c) feature based algorithm
d) Recognition algorithm

21. Which technique turns the unique lines, patterns, and spots apparent in a person‘s skin into a
mathematical space
a) registration
b) segmentation
c) skin texture analysis
d) image differencing

22. Which technique is used to determine changes between two images ?

a) Image differencing
b) segmentation
c) skin texture analysis
d) image differencing

23. Select one of the most appropriate application of Computer vision?

a) medical computer imaging
b) remote sensing
c) geographical map
d) medical diagnosis

24. What does SDR stands for?

a) standard dynamic range
b) Software defined radio
c) Session directory
d) System design view

25. Which software has a built in face recoginition system ?

a) Google‘s picasa digital image orgranizer
b) Apple iphoto‘s organizer
c) PMB
d) Sony‘s photo organizer

26. Which device is used to capture the fingerprint pattern?

a) Capture device
b) Fingerprint sensor
c) 2d sensor
d) digital sensor

27. An image is converted to two-dimensional matrix of pixel values by

a) pixel grabber
b) bough transform
c) masking
d) none

28. ___ is the most reliable and accurate biometric identification technique.
a) Computer vision
b) Iris recognition
c) Medical imaging
d) Remote sensing

29. A biometrics may be

a) fingerprint images
b) satellite images
c) computer vision
d) none

30. The initial step in any image processing technique is

a) segmentation
b) masking
c) image acquisition
d) normalization
31. The identification technique using voice, keystroke, gait etc. are included in
a) image enhancement
b) behavioral biometrics
c) face recognition
d) physical biometrics
32. Which of the following steps are included in iris segmentation?
a) image acquisition
b) iris normalization
c) iris localization
d) code generation

33. Localization of iris, pupil, eyelids come under

a) normalization
b) masking
c) extraction
d) segmentation

34. Verification using genetic algorithm and back propagation is done in

a) iris recognition
b) face detection
c) fingerprint identification
d) none

35. The dominant application of imaging in the microwave band is:

a) Radar
b) satellite
c) communication
d) None

36. What‘s recognition?

a) It‘s the process that assigns a label to an object based on its descriptors.
b) it‘s process of search a image
c) a & b
d) None

37. Morphological processing deals:

a. with tools for extracting image components that are useful in the representation and
description of shape.
b. with tools for changes in image components that are useful in the representation and
description of shape.
c) a & b
d) None

38. What is digitizer?

a. it‘s a device for converting the output of the physical sensing device into digital form.
b. it‘s a device for converting the output of the physical sensing device into analog form.
c) a & b
d) None

39. What is brightness adaption?

a. For a given set of conditions, the current sensitivity level of the visual system.
b. For a given set of conditions, the current sensitivity level of the in-visual system.
c) a & b
d) None

40. What is spatial resolution?

a. it‘s the largest discernible detail in an image.
b. it‘s the smallest discernible detail in an image.
c) a & b
d) None

41. The spatial domain refers:

a. to the image plane itself, and approaches in this category are based on indirect manipulation of
pixels in an image.
b. to the image plane itself, and approaches in this category are based on direct manipulation of
pixels in an image.
c) a & b
d) None

42. Frequency domain refers:

a. its processing techniques are based on modifying the Fourier transform of an image.
b. its processing techniques are based on modifying the laplace transform of an image.
c) a & b
d) None

43. Image negatives a gray level transformation is defined as:

a. s=L-1-r
b. s=L-r
c. s=r-1-L
d. none
44. the principal disadvantage of piecewise function is:
a. that their specification requires considerably more user input.
b. that their specification requires considerably more user output.
c) a & b
d) None

45. Smoothing spatial filters are used for:

a. blurring
b. noise reduction
c) a & b
d) None

46. A Grid of square which contains a single color is called

a. Image
b. Pixel value
c. Pixel
d. Color
47. A color Image have
a. 2 value per pixel
b. 3 value per pixel
c. 4 value per pixel
d. 1 value per pixel
48. A monochrome image have
a. 8 value per pixel
b. 4 value per pixel
c. 1 value per pixel
d. 3 value per pixel
49. A Fourier transform of a product is equal to
a. Correlation of Fourier transform
b. Convolution of Fourier transform
c. Both of the above
d. None of the above
50. The piecewise linear transformation function is
a. Linear
b. Complex
c. Nonlinear
d. Constant

-Dr.C.G.Patil
Course Coordinator
 Unit-2
1. DFT stands as:
a. Discrete Fourier transform
b. digital function transform
c. digital frequency transform
d. none

2. Basic steps for filtering in the frequency domain:

a. Fourier transform
b. filter function
c. Inverse Fourier transform
d. all of these

3. A generalization of unsharp masking is:

a. high boost filtering
b. low boost filtering
c. a & b
d. none

4. Restoration is:
a. attempts to reconstruct or recover an image that has been degraded by using a priori
knowledge of the degradation phenomenon.
b. attempts to reconstruct or recover an image that has been graded by using a priori knowledge
of the gradation phenomenon.
c. a & b
d. None of above

5. Restoration technique:
a. its oriented toward modeling the degradation and applying the inverse process in order to
recover the original image.
b. its oriented toward modeling the gradation and applying the inverse process in order to recover
the original image.
c. its oriented toward modeling the degradation and applying the process in order to recover the
original image.
d. none of above

6. An image transmitted using wireless network:

a. corrupted as a result of lighting or other atmospheric disturbance.
b. non-corrupted as a result of lighting or other atmospheric disturbance.
c. corrupted as a result of pixel disturbance.
d. none of above

7. Fourier spectrum of noise is constant, the noise usually:

a. white noise
b. red noise
c. green noise
d. none of above

8. Periodic noise in an image arises due to:

a. electrical or electromechanical interference during image compression
b. electrical or electromechanical interference during image restoration
c. electrical or electromechanical interference during image acquisition
d. none of above

9. Bipolar impulse noise is also called

a. salt and pepper noise
b. white noise
c. Gaussian noise
d. none of above

10. spatial filtering is the method of choice in situation when only:

a. additive noise is present.
b. additive noise is absent.
c. additive noise is doublet.
d. none of above

11. A ............. achieves smoothing comparable to the arithmetic mean filter, but it tends to lose
less image detail in the process.
a. Arithmetic mean filter
b. geometric mean filter
c. spatial filter
d. none of above

12. A geometric mean filter achieves smoothing comparable to the arithmetic mean filter, but it
tends to ..................... image detail in the process.
a. lossy
b. corrupted
c. lose less
d. none of above

13. The harmonic mean filter works well for .............. but fails for pepper noise.
a. salt and pepper noise
b. salt noise
c. pepper noise
d. none of above

14. The harmonic mean filter works well for salt noise, but fails for ...................
a. salt and pepper noise
b. salt noise
c. pepper noise
d. none of above

15. The harmonic mean filter works well for.............

a. salt and pepper noise
b. Gaussian noise
c. pepper noise
d. none of above

16. Contra harmonic mean filter is well suited for reducing or virtually eliminating the effects of
................................
a. salt and pepper noise
b. Gaussian noise
c. pepper noise
d. none of above

17. For ......................value of Q, the Contra harmonic mean filter eliminates pepper noise.
a. positive
b. negative
c. equal
d. none of above

18. for negative value of Q, the Contra harmonic mean filter eliminates salt noise.
a. positive
b. negative
c. equal
d. none of above

19. The Contra harmonic mean filter reduces to the arithmetic mean filter if ...... , and to the
harmonic mean filter if Q=-1.
a. Q=0
b. Q=1
c. Q=-1
d. none of above

20. The arithmetic and geometric mean filters are well suited for random noise like Gaussian or
uniform noise.
a. random noise
b. uniform noise
c. Gaussian noise
d. all of above

21. The ................... are well suited for random noise like Gaussian or uniform noise.
a. arithmetic and geometric mean filters
a. arithmetic mean filters
a geometric mean filters
d. all of these

22. The Contra harmonic mean filter is well suited for impulse noise, but it has the disadvantage
that it must be known whether the noise is dark or light in order to select the proper sign for Q.
a. random noise
b. uniform noise
c. impulse noise
d. all of above

23. The best known order statistics filter is the median filter, which replaces the value of a pixel
by the median of the gray levels in the neighborhood of that pixel.
a. fˆ(x, y) median{g(s, t)}
(s,t) Sxy

b. fˆ(x, y) max {g(s, t)}

(s,t) Sxy

c. fˆ(x, y) min {g(s, t)}

d. none of above

24. Using 100th percentile results in the so-called max filter,

a. fˆ(x, y) median{g(s, t)}

(s,t) Sxy

b. fˆ(x, y) max {g(s, t)}

(s,t) Sxy

c. fˆ(x, y) min {g(s, t)}

d. none of above
25. Using 0th percentile results in the so-called min filter,

a. fˆ(x, y) median{g(s, t)}

(s,t) Sxy

b. fˆ(x, y) max {g(s, t)}

(s,t) Sxy

c. fˆ(x, y) min {g(s, t)}

d. none of above

26. Advantage of ................. is finding the brightest points in an image.

a. max filter

b. min filter

c. median filter

d. none of above

27. Advantage of ................ is finding the darkest points in an image.

a. max filter

b. min filter

c. median filter

d. none of above

28. Which type of noise reduced by Max filter:

a. salt and pepper noise

b. salt noise
c. pepper noise
d. none of above

29. Which type of noise reduced by min filter:

a. salt and pepper noise

b. salt noise
c. pepper noise
d. none of above

30. Midpoint filter works best for..............

a. salt and pepper noise
b. salt noise
c. random noise
d. none of above

31.

a. basics steps for filtering in the frequency domain

b. basics steps for filtering in the spatial domain

c. basics steps for filtering in the time domain

d. none of above

32.

a. 2-D DFT
b. 1-D DFT

c. 2-D FFT

d. none of above

33. Below figures shows:

Fig. (a) Fig. (b)

a. Discrete function of M points, it‘s Fourier spectrum

b. Discrete function of 2M points, it‘s Fourier spectrum

c. Discrete function of 3M points, it‘s Fourier spectrum

d. none of above

34. Below figures shows:

Fig. (a) Fig. (b)

a. Discrete function with twice the number of nonzero, it‘s Fourier spectrum
b. Discrete function with the number of nonzero, it‘s Fourier spectrum

c. Discrete function with fourth the number of nonzero, it‘s Fourier spectrum

d. none of above

35. SEM image of a damaged integrated circuit

Fig. (a) Fig. (b)

a. SEM image of a damaged integrated circuit, result of band-pass filtering

b. SEM image of a damaged integrated circuit, result of high-pass filtering

c. SEM image of a damaged integrated circuit, result of low-pass filtering

d. none of above

36. SEM image of a damaged integrated circuit

Fig. (a) Fig. (b)

a. SEM image of a damaged integrated circuit, result of band-pass filtering

b. SEM image of a damaged integrated circuit, result of high-pass filtering

c. SEM image of a damaged integrated circuit, result of low-pass filtering

d. none of above

37.

a. low pass filtering in spatial domain

b. high pass filtering in spatial domain

c. band pass filtering in spatial domain

d. none of above

38.

a. high pass filtering by DFT windows

b. low pass filtering by DFT windows

c. band pass filtering by DFT windows

d. none of above

39 ............... can be thought of as one low-pass filtered image minus another low pass filtered
image.

a. The low pass filtered image

b. The high pass filtered image

c. The band pass filtered image

d. none of above

40. below figure shows

a. homo-morphic filtering approach for image enhancement

b. homo-morphic filtering approach for image compression

c. homo-morphic filtering approach for image restoration

d. none of above

41. below figure shows

a. computation of 2D Fourier transform as a series of 1D Fourier transform

b. computation of 2D fast Fourier transform as a series of 1D Fourier transform

c. computation of 2D DIT-FFT as a series of 1D Fourier transform

d. none of above

42. below figure shows:

a. homo-morphic filtering approach for image enhancement

b. homo-morphic filtering approach for image restoration

c. homo-morphic filtering approach for image compression

d. none of above

43. below figure shows:

a. model of image degradation/restoration process

b. model of image enhancement process

c. model of image compression process

d. none of above

44. Given: observation y(m,n) and blurring function h(m,n); Design: g(m,n), such that the

distortion between x(m,n) and is minimized

a. Non-blind deblurring/deconvolution

b. Blind deblurring/deconvolution

c. Non-blind blurring/convolution

d. none of above

45. Given: observation y(m,n); Design: g(m,n), such that the distortion between x(m,n) and

is minimized

a. Non-blind deblurring/deconvolution

b. Blind deblurring/deconvolution
c. Non-blind blurring/convolution

d. none of above

Answers-Key Unit-2:

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40

41 42 43 44 45
 Unit-3

1. what is color?

a. it‘s an attribute of objects (feature)

b. it‘s an attribute of objects (shape)

c. it‘s an attribute of objects (smoothness)

d. all of above

2. color depends on:

a. spectral characteristics of the light sources illuminating the objects

b. spectral characteristics of objects

c. spectral characteristics of the sensors of the imaging device

d. all of above

3. Tri-chromatic color mixing theory is

a. any color can be obtained by mixing of three secondary colors with a right proportion.

b. any color can be obtained by mixing of three primary colors with a right proportion.

c. a & b

d. none of above

4. Primary colors for illuminating sources:

a. Red, Green, Blue

b. cyan, magenta, Yellow

c. a & b

d. none of above

5. Additive rule

a. cyan+ magenta + Yellow = white

b. Red + Green + Blue = white

c. a & b

d. none of above

6. Color monitor works by exciting

a. red, green, blue phosphors using separate electronics guns

b. cyan, green, blue phosphors using separate electronics guns

c. red, magenta, blue phosphors using separate electronics guns

d. none of above

7. Primary colors for reflecting sources:

a. Red, Green, Blue

b. cyan, magenta, Yellow

c. a & b

d. none of above

8. Subtractive rule

a. Red + Green + Blue = Black

b. cyan+ magenta + Yellow = black

c. Red + Green + Blue = white

d. none of above

9. Color printer works by using

a. cyan, magenta, Yellow and black dynes

a. red, magenta, Yellow and black dynes

a. cyan, blue, Yellow and black dynes

d. none of above
10. Primary colors for reflecting sources

a. secondary colors

b. red, green, blue

c. a & b

d. none of above

11. Primary colors of pigments

a. cyan, magenta, Yellow

b. red, green, blue

c. a & b

d. none of above

12. If a surface coated with ........ is illuminated with white light, no red light is reflected form the
surface.

a. cyan

b. yellow

c. magenta

d. none of above

13 ......... subtracts red light from white light which contains amounts of red, green and blue light.

a. cyan

b. yellow

c. magenta

d. none of above

14. CMYK stands as

a. CMY + K where K stands for brown

a. CMY + K where K stands for blue

a. CMY + K where K stands for black

d. none of above

15. Four colors printing as

a. CMYK

b. RGBK

c. RGYK

d. none of above

16.

a. RGB to CMY conversion

b. CMY to RGB conversion

c. RGB to RGB conversion

d. none of above

17. HSI color Model is

a. Height, Saturation, Intensity

b. Hue, symmetric, Intensity

c. Hue, Saturation, Intensity

d. none of above

18. Hue represents

a. Dominant color as perceived by an observer. It‘s an attribute with the dominant wavelength

b. non-Dominant color as perceived by an observer. It‘s an attribute with the dominant

wavelength

c. a & b

d. none of above

19. Saturation refers in HS color model as

a. To the relative purity or the amount of white light mixed with a hue. The pure spectrum colors
are semi-fully saturated.

b. To the relative purity or the amount of white light mixed with a hue. The pure spectrum colors
are partially saturated.

c. To the relative purity or the amount of white light mixed with a hue. The pure spectrum colors
are fully saturated.

d. none of above

20. Pink and Lavender are.......

a. less saturated

b. more saturated

c. better saturated

d. none of above

21. Intensity reflects in HIS color model as

a. The brightness

b. The contrast

c. a & b

d. none of above

22. Total amount of energy that flow from the light source, measured in watts (W)

a. Radiance
b. Luminance

c. a & b

d. none of above

23. Amount of energy an observer perceives from a light source

a. Radiance

b. Luminance

c. a & b

d. none of above

24. Luminance measured in........

a. lumens

b. km

c. mm

d. none of above

25. Far infrared light:

a. high radiance, but 0 luminance

b. low radiance, but 0 luminance

c. high radiance, but 1 luminance

d. none of above

26. Subjective descriptor that is hard to measure, similar to the achromatic notion of intensity

a. Radiance

b. Brightness

c. a & b

d. none of above
27. Principal sensing categories in eyes

a. Red light 65%, green light 33%, and blue light 2%

b. Yellow light 65%, green light 33%, and blue light 2%

c. Red light 65%, green light 33%, and cyan light 2%

d. none of above

28. Secondary colors:

a. G+Y=Cyan, R+G=Yellow, R+B=Magenta

b. G+B=Cyan, R+G=Yellow, R+B=Magenta

c. G+B=Cyan, R+G=Yellow, R+B=Magenta

d. none of above

29. below figure shows:

a. additive primaries

b. subtractive primaries

c. a & b

d. none of above
30. below figure shows

a. additive primaries

b. subtractive primaries

c. a & b

d. none of above

31. below figure shows

a. Color TV

b. Picture

c. image

d. none of above
32. Suitable for hardware or applications

a. RGB model

b. CYM model

c. CYMK model

d. all of above

33. HSI model

a. match the human description

b. match the animal description

c. match the cat description

d. none of above

34. The number of bits used to represent each pixel in RGB space.

a. Pixel depth

b. no. of pixel

c. pixel size

d. none of above

35. Used to generate hardcopy output

a. CMY color model

b. RGB color model

c. HIS color model

d. none of above

36. Morphological Image Processing

a. used to compact image components that are useful in the representation and description of
region shape.
b. used to extract image components that are useful in the representation and description of
region shape.

c. used to extract image components that are useful in the compression of region shape.

d. none of above

37. The element of the set is the coordinates (x,y) of pixel belong to the object Z2

a. Binary image (0 = white, 1 = black)

b. gray-scaled image

c. a & b

d. none of above

38. The element of the set is the coordinates (x,y) of pixel belong to the object and the gray
levels Z3

a. Binary image (0 = white, 1 = black)

b. gray-scaled image

c. a & b

d. none of above

39. Erosion

a. Erosion of a set A by structuring element B: all z in A such that B is in A when origin of B=z

b. A B {z|(B)z A}

c. Shrink the object

d. all of above

40. Dilution

a. Dilation of a set A by structuring element B: all z in A such that B hits A when origin of B=z

b. A B {z|(B̂) z A Φ}

c. Grow the object

d. all of above

41. Erosion

a. Removal of structures of certain shape and size, given by SE

b. A B {z|(B)z A}

c. Shrink the object

d. all of above

42. Dilation

a. Filling of holes of certain shape and size, given by SE

b. A B {z|(B̂) z A Φ}

c. Grow the object

d. all of above

43. Wanted: Remove structures / fill holes and without affecting remaining parts

a. Solution: Combine erosion and dilation

b. Solution: dilation

c. Solution: erosion

d. none of above

44. Opening:

a. Erosion followed by dilation, denoted ∘

b. A B (A B) B

c. Eliminates protrusions

d. all of above

45. Closing:

a. Dilation followed by erosion, denoted •

b. A B (A B) B

c. fuse narrow breaks and long thin gulfs

d. all of above

Answers-Key Unit-3:

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40

41 42 43 44 45
 Unit-4

1. Registration Goals: I2 (x,y)=g(I1 (f(x,y))

a. f() – 2D spatial transformation

b. g() – 1D intensity transformation

c. a & b

d. none of above

2. Spatial Transformations

a. Rigid

b. Affine

c. Projective

d. all of above

3. Rigid Transformation

a. Rotation(R)

b. Translation (t)

c. Similarity (scale)

d. all of above

4. Affine Transformation

a. Rotation

b. Translation

c. Scale

d. all of above

5. Flat plane tilted with respect to the camera requires

a. Projective Transformation

b. affine Transformation

c. rigid transformation
d. none of above

6. Methods of Registration

a. Correlation

b. Fourier

c. Point Mapping

d. all of above

7 ........... must be normalized to avoid contributions from local image intensities.

a. Correlation

b. Convolution

c. circular convolution

d. none of above

8. Given a two images T & I, 2D normalized ............... function measures the similarity for each
translation in an image patch

T(x, y)I(x u, y v)
C(u, v)
I 2 (x u, y v)

a. Correlation

b. Convolution

c. circular convolution

d. none of above

9. Correlation Theorem

a. Fourier transform of the correlation of two images is the product of the Fourier transform of
one image and the Fourier transform of the other.

b. Fourier transform of the correlation of two images is the product of the Fourier transform of
one image and the inverse of the Fourier transform of the other.

c. Fourier transform of the correlation of two images is the product of the Fourier transform of
one image and the complex conjugate of the Fourier transform of the other.

d. none of above
10. Fourier Transform Based Methods

a. Phase-Correlation

b. Cross power spectrum

c. Power cepstrum

d. all of above

11. All Fourier based methods are very efficient, only only work in cases of rigid transformation.

a. Projective Transformation

b. affine Transformation

c. rigid transformation

d. none of above

12. Point Mapping Registration

a. Control Points

b. Point Mapping with Feedback

c. Global Polynomial

d. all of above

13. Point mapping with Feedback

a. Clustering

b. determine the optimal spatial transformation between images by an evaluation of all possible
pairs of feature matches.

c. a & b

d. none of above

14. Characteristics of Registration Methods

a. Feature Space

b. Similarity Metrics

c. Search Strategy
d. all of above

15. Same Modality Camera Sensors  enough correlated structure at................

a. all resolution levels

b. high resolution levels

c. a & b

d. none of above

16. Different Modality Camera Sensors  primary correlation only in..................

a. all resolution levels

b. high resolution levels

c. a & b

d. none of above

17. Goal: Suppress non-common information & capture the common scene details

a. Solution: low pass energy images

b. Solution: High pass energy images

c. Solution: band pass energy images

d. none of above

18. Apply the Laplacian high pass filter to the original images

a. Square the results  NO contrast reversal

b. Square the results  contrast reversal

c. Square the results  high contrast reversal

d. none of above

19. Alignment Algorithm

a. Do not assume global correlation, use only local correlation information

b. Use Normalized Correlation as a similarity measure

c. Thus, no assumptions about the original data

d. all of above

20 ............. is to subdivide an image into its component regions or objects.

a. Segmentation

b. fragment

c. addition

d. none of above

21. should stop when the objects of interest in an application have been isolated.

a. Segmentation

b. fragment

c. addition

d. none of above

22. Segmentation algorithms generally are based on one of 2 basis properties of intensity values

a. discontinuity : to partition an image based on sharp changes in intensity (such as edges)

b. Similarity: to partition an image into regions that are similar according to a set of predefined
criteria.

c. a & b

d. none of above

23. Detect the three basic types of gray-level discontinuities

a. points

b. lines

c. edges

d. all of above

24. Point Detection

a. a point has been detected at the location on which the mark is centered if |R| T

b. T is a nonnegative threshold
c. R is the sum of products of the coefficients with the gray levels contained in the region
encompassed by the mark.

d. all of above

25. This is a:

a. Point Detection mask

b. Line detection mask (Horizontal)

c. Line detection mask (vertical)

d. none of above

26. This is a:

a. Point Detection mask

b. Line detection mask (Horizontal)

c. Line detection mask (vertical)

d. none of above

27. This is a:
a. Point Detection mask

b. Line detection mask (+450)

c. Line detection mask (vertical)

d. none of above

28. This is a:

a. Point Detection mask

b. Line detection mask (+450)

c. Line detection mask (vertical)

d. none of above

29. This is a:

a. Point Detection mask

b. Line detection mask (-450)

c. Line detection mask (vertical)

d. none of above

30 ............. will result with max response when a line passed through the middle row of the mask with a
constant background.

a. Horizon mask

b. Horizontal mask

c. vertical mask

d. none of above

31. if we are interested in detecting all lines in an image in the direction defined by a given mask, we
simply run the mask through the image and threshold the absolute value of the result.

a. Line Detection

b. edge detection

c. point detection

d. none of above

32. Blurred edges tend to be ....... and sharp edges tend to be......:

a. thick, thin

b. thick, thick

c. thin, thin

d. none of above

33. An imaginary straight line joining the extreme positive and negative values of the second derivative
would cross zero near the midpoint of the edge.

a. two-crossing property

b. one-crossing property

c. Zero-crossing property

d. none of above
34 ............... should be serious consideration prior to the use of derivatives in applications where noise is
likely to be present.

a. Image smoothing

b. image compression

c. image enhancement

d. none of above

35. This is a:

a. Prewitt edge detection gradient mask

b. Sobel edge detection gradient mask

c. Roberts edge detection gradient mask

d. none of above

36. This is a:

a. Prewitt edge detection gradient mask

b. Sobel edge detection gradient mask

c. Roberts edge detection gradient mask

d. none of above

37. This is a:
a. Prewitt edge detection gradient mask

b. Sobel edge detection gradient mask

c. Roberts edge detection gradient mask

d. none of above

38. Laplacian combined with smoothing to find edges via.............

a. two-crossing

b. one-crossing

c. zero-crossing

d. none of above

39. The threshold used for each pixel depends on the location of the pixel in terms of the subimages,
this type of thresholding is...........

a. adaptive

b. static

c. modern

d. none of above

40 ................. contributes significantly to algorithms for feature detection, segmentation, and motion
analysis.

a. point detection

b. line detection

c. Edge detection
d. none of above

41. An........ a place where there is a rapid change in the brightness (or other property) of an image.

a. edge

b. point

c. line

d. none of above

42. region-based segmentation (seeded region growing)

a. advantage: With edge connectivity

a. advantage: With loose connectivity

a. advantage: With good connectivity

d. none of above

43. region-based segmentation (seeded region growing)

a. Disadvantage: Initial seed-points: different sets of initial seed-point cause different segmented result

b. Disadvantage: Time-consuming problem

c. a & b

d. none of above

44. region-based segmentation (Unseeded region growing)

a. Advantage: easy to use

b. Advantage: can readily incorporate high level knowledge of the image composition through region
threshold

c. a & b

d. none of above

45. region-based segmentation (Unseeded region growing)

a. Disadvantage: slow speed

b. Disadvantage: high speed

c. Disadvantage: slow capture

d. none of above
Answers-Key Unit-4:

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40

41 42 43 44 45
 Unit-5

1. Objective of Image Representation and Description?

a. To represent and describe information embedded in an image in other forms that are less
suitable than the image itself.

b. a. To represent and describe information embedded in an image in other forms that are more
suitable than the image itself.

c. a & b

d. none of above

2. Benefits of Image Representation and Description:

a. Easier to understand

b. Require less memory, faster to be processed

c. More ―ready to be used‖

d. all of above

3. What kind of information we can use for Image Representation and Description

a. Boundary, shape

b. Region

c. Texture

d. all of above

4. Why we focus on a boundary?

a. The boundary is a good representation of an object shape and also requires a few memory.

b. The boundary is a poor representation of an object shape and also requires a few memory.

c. The boundary is a good representation of an object shape and also requires a high memory.

d. none of above

5. represent an object boundary by a connected sequence of straight line segments of specified

length and direction.
a. hex codes

b. Chain codes

c. binary codes

d. none of above

6. Problem of a chain code: a chain code sequence depends on a starting point.

a. Solution: treat a chain code as a rectangular sequence and redefine the starting point so that the
resulting sequence of numbers forms an integer of minimum magnitude.

b. Solution: treat a chain code as a circular sequence and redefine the starting point so that the resulting
sequence of numbers forms an integer of minimum magnitude.

c. Solution: treat a chain code as a circular sequence and redefine the ending point so that the resulting
sequence of numbers forms an integer of maximum magnitude.

d. none of above

7. Counting the number of direction change (in counterclockwise) between 2 adjacent

elements of the code.

a. The second difference of a chain code

b. The third difference of a chain code

c. The first difference of a chain code

d. none of above

8. A chain code: 10103322 –

a. The first difference = 3133030

a. The first difference = 3130030

a. The first difference = 3100030

d. none of above

9. The first difference is.............

a. circular invariant

b. rotational variant

c. rotational invariant
d. none of above

10. Partitioning an object boundary by using vertices of a convex hull.

a. Boundary Segments Concept

a. Boundary distribute Concept

a. edge Segments Concept

d. none of above

11. Thinning Algorithm Concept:

a. Do not remove end points

b. Do not break connectivity

c. Do not cause excessive erosion.

d. all of above

12. Thinning Algorithm Apply only to contour pixels:

a. pixels “1” having at least one of its 8 neighbor pixels valued “0”

b. pixels “2” having at least one of its 8 neighbor pixels valued “0”

c. pixels “1” having at least one of its 8 neighbor pixels valued “1”

d. none of above

Shape number of the boundary:

a. the first difference of smallest magnitude

b. the second difference of smallest magnitude

c. the first difference of largest magnitude

d. none of above

14. The order n of the shape number:

a. the number of nibbles in the sequence

a. the number of bits in the sequence

a. the number of digits in the sequence

d. none of above

15. Chain code: 0 3 2 1 for below structure:

a. difference: 3 3 3 3

b. shape no.: 3 3 3 3

c. a & b

d. none of above

16. Chain code: 0 0 3 2 2 1 for below structure:

a. difference: 3 0 3 3 0 3

b. shape no.: 0 3 3 0 3 3

c. a & b

d. none of above

17. view a coordinate (x,y) as a complex number (x = real part and y = imaginary part) then
apply the Fourier transform to a sequence of boundary points.

a. Fourier descriptor

b. Laplace descriptor

c. Regional descriptor
d. none of above

18 ................... Purpose: to describe regions or “areas”

a. Fourier descriptor

b. Laplace descriptor

c. Regional Descriptors

d. none of above

19. a circle is the most compact shape with

a. C = 1/pi

b. C = 1/4pi

c. C = 1/8pi

d. none of above

20 ............... Use to describe holes and connected components of the region

a. Topological Descriptors

b. Laplace descriptor

c. Regional Descriptors

d. none of above

21. E C H C = the number of connected components; H = the number of holes

a. Euler number

b. Euler formula

c. Euler value

d. none of above

22. V Q F C H E V = the number of vertices; Q = the number of edges; F = the number

of faces

a. Euler number

b. Euler formula

c. Euler value
d. none of above

23. below figure shows:

a. Euler number (E): E=0

b. Euler number (E): E=1

c. Euler number (E): E=-1

d. none of above

24. below figure shows:

a. Euler number (E): E=0

b. Euler number (E): E=1

c. Euler number (E): E=-1

d. none of above
25. below figure shows:

a. Euler number (E): E=0

b. Euler number (E): E=1

c. Euler number (E): E=-2

d. none of above26. Texture Descriptors Purpose: to describe “texture” of the region.

27. The 2nd moment = variance measure

a. smoothness

b. skewness

c. flatness

d. none of above

28. The 3rd moment  measure

a. smoothness

b. skewness

c. flatness

d. none of above

29. The 4th moment  measure

a. smoothness
b. skewness

c. flatness

d. none of above

30. Fourier Approach for ............... Concept: convert 2D spectrum into 1D graphs

a. Texture Descriptor

b. regional Descriptor

c. topological Descriptor

d. none of above

31. Principal Components for ............. Purpose: to reduce dimensionality of a vector image while
maintaining information as much as possible.

a. Description

b. registration

c. observation

d. none of above

32. region-based segmentation fast scanning Advantage:

a. The speed is very fast

b. The result of segmentation will be intact with good connectivity

c. a & b

d. none of above

33. region-based segmentation fast scanning Disadvantage:

a. The matching of physical object is not good: It can be improved by morphology and geometric
mathematic

b. The result of segmentation will be intact with good connectivity

c. a & b

d. none of above

34. a ............... is a family of patterns that share some common properties.

a. Pattern classes

b. Pattern recognition

c. Pattern checker

d. none of above

35 .................. to assign patterns to their respective classes.

a. Pattern classes

b. Pattern recognition

c. Pattern checker

d. none of above

36. Three common pattern arrangements used in practices are

a. Vectors

b. Strings

c. Trees

d. all of above

37 is more powerful than string ones.

a. Tree descriptions

b. regional descriptions

c. space descriptions

d. none of above

38 to recognition are based on the use decision functions.

a. semi-theoretic approaches

b. Final-theoretic approaches

c. Decision-theoretic approaches

d. none of above

39. The distance between two shapes a and b defined as: (Degree of similarity k)
a. D(a, b)

b. D(a, b)
2k

c. D(a, b)

d. none of above

40. A simple measure of similarity between a and b is the ratio

a. R
max( a , b )
b. Represent the number of matches between the two strings, where a match occurs in the kth
position if ak = bk.

c. The number of symbols that do not match is

d. all of above

Answers-Key Unit-4:

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40
 MODEL QUESTION PAPER

Elective-II

Digital Image Processing (188142/238142)

Branch: Electronics and Telecommunication / E&C engineering.

Q1. A continuous image is digitised at _______ points.

A random

B vertex

C contour

D sampling

Ans.: D

Q2. What is the tool used in tasks such as zooming, shrinking, rotating, etc.?

A Sampling

B Interpolation

C Filters

D None of the Mentioned

Ans.: B

Q3. Quantitatively, spatial resolution cannot be represented in which of the

following ways

A line pairs

B pixels

C dots

D none of the Mentioned

Ans.: D
Q4. The most familiar single sensor used for Image Acquisition is

A Microdensitometer
B Photodiode
C CMOS

D None of the Mentioned

Ans.: B

Q5 The difference is intensity between the highest and the lowest intensity
levels in an image is ___________

A Noise

B Saturation

C Contrast

D Brightness

Ans.: C

Q6. The spatial coordinates of a digital image (x,y) are proportional to:

A Position

B Brightness

C Contrast

D Noise

Ans.: B

Q7. Among the following image processing techniques which is fast, precise
and flexible.

A Optical

B Digital

C Electronic
D Photographic

Ans.: B

Q8. An image is considered to be a function of a(x,y), where a represents:

A Height of image

B Width of image

C Amplitude of image

D Resolution of image

Ans.: C

Q9. What is pixel?

A Pixel is the elements of a digital image

B Pixel is the elements of an analog image

C Pixel is the cluster of a digital image

D Pixel is the cluster of an analog image

Ans.: A

Q10. The range of values spanned by the gray scale is called:

A Dynamic range

B Band range

C Peak range

D Resolution range

Ans.: A

Q11. Which is a colour attribute that describes a pure colour?

A Saturation

B Hue
C Brightness

D Intensity

Ans.: B

Q12. Which means the assigning meaning to a recognized object.

A Interpretation

B Recognition

C Acquisition

D Segmentation

Ans.: A

Q13. What is the expanded form of JPEG?

A Joint Photographic Expansion Group

B Joint Photographic Experts Group

C Joint Photographs Expansion Group

D Joint Photographic Expanded Group

Ans.: B

Q14. The principal factor to determine the spatial resolution of an image is

_______

A Quantization

B Sampling

C Contrast

D Dynamic range

Ans.: B

Q15. How aliasing does corrupt the sampled image?

A By introducing additional frequency components to the sampled function

B By removing some frequency components from the sampled function

C All of the mentioned

D None of the mentioned

Ans.: A

Q16. How can one reduce the aliasing effect on an image?

A By reducing the high-frequency components of image by blurring the image

B By increasing the high-frequency components of image by blurring the

image

C By reducing the high-frequency components of image by clarifying the image

D By increasing the high-frequency components of image by clarifying the

image

Ans.: A

Q17. For pixels p(x, y), q(s, t), the city-block distance between p and q is
defined as:

A D(p, q) = [(x – s)2 + (y – t)2]1/2

B D(p, q) = |x – s| + |y – t|

C D(p, q) = max (|x – s| + |y – t|)

D None of the mentioned

Ans.: B

Q18. The domain that refers to image plane itself and the domain that refers
to Fourier transform of an image is/are :

A Spatial domain in both

B Frequency domain in both

C Spatial domain and Frequency domain respectively

D Frequency domain and Spatial domain respectively

Ans.:

Q19. Using gray-level transformation, the basic function Logarithmic deals with
which of the following transformation?

A Log and inverse-log transformations

B Negative and identity transformations

C nth and nth root transformations

D All of the mentioned

Ans.: A

Q20. If r be the gray-level of image before processing and s after processing

then which expression defines the negative transformation, for the gray-level
in the range [0, L-1]?

As=L–1–r

B s = crᵞ, c and ᵞ are positive constants

C s = c log (1 + r), c is a constant and r ≥ 0

D none of the mentioned

Ans.: A

Q21. Which of the following transformations expands the value of dark pixels
while the higher-level values are being compressed?

A Log transformations
B Inverse-log transformations
C Negative transformations
D None of the mentioned

Ans.: A

Q22. What is gamma correction?

A A process to remove power-law transformation response phenomena

B A process to remove log transformation response phenomena
C A process to correct log transformation response phenomena
D A process to correct power-law transformation response phenomena

Ans.: D

Q23. What is the sum of all components of a normalized histogram?

A 1
B -1
C 0
D None of the mentioned

Ans.: A

Q24. Smoothing filter is used for which of the following work(s)?

A Blurring
B Noise reduction
C All of the mentioned
D None of the mentioned

Ans.: C

Q25. Which of the following filter(s) results in a value as average of pixels in

the
neighborhood of filter mask.

A Smoothing linear spatial filter

B Averaging filter
C Lowpass filter
D All of the mentioned

Ans.: D

Q26. A spatial averaging filter having all the coefficients equal is termed
_________

A A box filter
B A weighted average filter
C A standard average filter
D A median filter

Ans.: A

Q27. An image contains noise having appearance as black and white dots
superimposed on the image. Which of the following noise(s) has the same
appearance?

A Salt-and-pepper noise
B Gaussian noise
C All of the mentioned
D None of the mentioned

Ans.: C

Q28. Which filter(s) used to find the brightest point in the image?

A Median filter
B Max filter
C Mean filter
D All of the mentioned

Ans.: B

Q29. In linear spatial filtering, what is the pixel of the image under mask
corresponding to the mask coefficient w (1, -1), assuming a 3*3 mask?

A f (x, -y)
B f (x + 1, y)
C f (x, y – 1)
D f (x + 1, y – 1)
Ans.: D

Q30. The function of filters in Image sharpening in frequency domain is to

perform reverse operation of which of the following Low pass filter?

A Gaussian Lowpass filter

B Butterworth Lowpass filter
C Ideal Lowpass filter
D None of the Mentioned

Ans.: C

Q31. Which of the following statement(s) is true for the given fact that
“Applying High pass filters has an effect on the background of the output
image”?
A The average background intensity increases to near white of black and white
B The average background intensity reduces to near black
C The average background intensity changes to a value average
D All of the mentioned
Ans.: B

Q32. Of the following, _________ has the maximum frequency.

A UV Rays
B Gamma Rays
C Microwaves
D Radio Waves

Ans.: B

Q33. How is radiance measured?

A lumens
B watts
C armstrong
D hertz

Ans.: B

Q34. Which of the following is used for chest and dental scans?

A Hard X-Rays

B Soft X-Rays

C Radio waves

D Infrared Rays

Ans.: B

Q35. Wavelength and frequency are related as : (c = speed of light)

A c = wavelength / frequency

B frequency = wavelength / c

C wavelength = c * frequency

D c = wavelength * frequency

Ans.: C

Q36. Which of the following is/are more commercially successful image

enhancement method in mask mode radiography, an area under medical
imaging?
A Addition
B Subtraction
C Multiplication
D Division

Ans.: B

Q37. A First derivative in image processing is implemented using which of the

following given operator(s)?
A Magnitude of Gradient vector
B The Laplacian
C All of the mentioned
D None of the mentioned

Ans.: A

Q38. Compressed image can be recovered back by

A image enhancement
B image decompression
C image contrast
D image equalization

Ans.: B

Q39. Coding redundancy works on

A pixels

B matrix

C intensity

D coordinates

Ans.: C

Q40. Every run length pair introduce new

A pixels

B matrix

C frames

D intensity

Ans.: D
Q41. Logic operations between two or more images are performed on pixel-
by-pixel basis, except for one that is performed on a single image. Which one

A AND
B OR
C NOT
D None of the mentioned
Ans.: C

Q42. How many bit RGB color image is represented by full-color image?

A 32-bit RGB color image

B 24-bit RGB color image
C 16-bit RGB color image
D 8-bit RGB color image

Ans.: B

Q43. Which file types use Lossless compression?

A JPEG
B GIF
C BMP
D PNG

Ans.: B,D

Q44. Makes the file smaller by deleting parts of the file permanently (forever)

A Lossy Compression
B Lossless Compression

Ans.: A

Q45. What would you use compression for?

A Making an image file smaller

B Modifying an image

Ans.: A

Q46. Which of these is an advantage for Lossy compression?

A The file size becomes significantly (much) smaller

B The file size does not become much smaller than 50%
C none of the above

Ans.: A

Q47. For line detection we use mask that is

A Gaussian
B laplacian
C ideal
D butterworth

Ans.: B

Q48. A typical Fourier Spectrum with spectrum value ranging from 0 to 106,
which of the following transformation is better to apply.

A nonzero
B zero
C positive
D negative

Ans.: B

Q49. For edge detection we observes

A intensity transition
B shape transition
C color transition
D sign transition
Ans.: D

Q50. Thresholding is the example of

A discontinuity
B similarity
C continuity
D recognition

Ans.: A

Q51. Imaging in geological exploration, industry and medicine uses

A audio
B sound
C sunlight
D ultraviolet

Ans.: B

Q52. Which waves can penetrate through clouds

A ultrasonic
B radar
C visible and infrared
D Infrared
Ans.: B

Q53. Imaging system produces

A high resolution image

B voltage signal
C digitized image
D analog signal

Ans.: C
Q54. The digitization process i.e. the digital image has M rows and N columns,
requires decisions about values for M, N, and for the number, L, of gray levels
allowed for each pixel. The value M and N have to be:

A M and N have to be positive integer

B M and N have to be negative integer
C M have to be negative and N have to be positive integer

D M have to be positive and N have to be negative integer

Ans.: A

Q55. After digitization process a digital image with M rows and N columns
have to be positive and for the number, L, max gray levels i.e. an integer
power of 2 for each pixel. Then, the number b, of bits required to store a
digitized image is:

A b=M*N*k
B b=M*N*L
C b=M*L*k
D b=L*N*k

Ans.: A

Q56. In _______ image we notice that the components of histogram are

concentrated on the low side on intensity scale.

A bright
B dark
C colourful
D All of the Mentioned

Ans.: B

Q57. Histogram Equalization is mainly used for ________________

A Image enhancement
B Blurring
C Contrast adjustment
D None of the Mentioned

Ans.: A

Q58. Which type of Histogram Processing is suited for minute detailed

enhancements?

A Intensive
B Local
C Global
D Random

Ans.: A

Q59. Which type of Histogram Processing is suited for minute detailed

enhancements?

A Intensive

B Local

C Global

D Random

Ans.: B

Q60. The characteristics of the low pass filter h(x, y) is/are_________

A Has a dominant component at origin

B Has concentric, circular components about the centre component

C All of the mentioned

D None of the mentioned

Ans.: C
 Model Question Paper
Subject :Digital Image Processing

Branch: E&TC

Class: BE

Semester:VIII

1)Intensity levels in 8-bit image are

A)128

B)255

C)256

D)512

Ans:C

2) In image accentuating a specific range is called

A) Slicing

B) Color Slicing

C) Enhancing

D) Cutting

Ans:B

3) A type of Image is called as VHRR image. What is the definition of VHRR image?

A) Very High Range Resolution image

B) Very High Resolution Range image

C) Very High Resolution Radiometer image

D) Very High Range Radiometer Image

Ans:C

4) Low pass filtering can be applied in following areas

A) The field of machine perception, with application of character recognition

B) In field of printing and publishing industry

C)In field of processing satellite and aerial images

D)All of the mentioned

Ans:D

5)Black Color is represented by

A) 0

B)255

C)256

D)1

Ans:A

6) The Image sharpening in frequency domain can be achieved by which of the following method(s)?

A) Attenuating the high frequency components

B) Attenuating the low-frequency components

C) All of the mentioned

D) None of the mentioned

Ans:B

7) The function of filters in Image sharpening in frequency domain is to perform reverse operation of
which of the following Lowpass filter?

A) Gaussian Lowpass filter

B) Butterworth Lowpass filter

C) Ideal Lowpass filter

D) None

Ans:C

8) The edges and other abrupt changes in gray-level of an image are associated with_________

A) High frequency components

B) Low frequency components

C) Edges with high frequency and other abrupt changes in gray-level with low frequency components

D) Edges with low frequency and other abrupt changes in gray-level with high frequency components

Ans:A

9)Gradient computation equation is

A) |Gx|+|Gy|

B) |Gx|-|Gy|

C) |Gx|/|Gy|

D) |Gx|x|Gy|

Ans:A
10) Which of the following statement(s) is true for the given fact that “Applying Highpass filters has an
effect on the background of the output image”?

A) The average background intensity increases to near white

B) The average background intensity reduces to near black

C) The average background intensity changes to a value average of black and white

D) All of the mentioned

Ans:B

11)Gaussian noise is referred to as

A) Red Noise

B) White Noise

C) Black Noise

D) Normal Noise

Ans:D

12)Convolution in spatial domain is multiplication in

A) Frequency

B) Time

C) Spatial

D) Plane

Ans:A

13) In medicine radio waves are used in

A) MRI

B) surgery

C) CT scan

D) Injections

Ans:A
14 Which one is not the process of image processing

A) high level

B) low level

C) last level

D) Mid level

Ans:C

15) Filters that replaces pixel value with medians of intensity levels is

A) Arithematic mean Filter

B) Geometric mean Filter

C) Median Filter

D) Sequence Mean Filter

Ans:C

16)The spatial coordinates of a digital image (x,y) are proportional to

A) Position

B) Brightness

C) Contrast

D) Saturation

Ans:B

17)Among the following image processing techniques which is fast, precise and flexible

A) Optical

B) Digital

C) Electronic

D) Photographic

Ans:B

18)An image is considered to be a function of a(x,y), where a represents

A) Height of image

B) Width of image

C) Amplitude of image

D) Resolution of image

Ans:C
19)The range of values spanned by the gray scale is called

A) Dynamic range

B) Band range

C) Peak range

D) Resolution range

Ans:A

20) Which is a colour attribute that describes a pure colour?

A) Saturation

B) Hue

C) Brightness

D) Intensity

Ans:B

21) Which one is not the area of digital image processing

A) law enforcement

B) lithography

C) medicine

D) voice calling

Ans:D

22)Which means the assigning meaning to a recognized object

A) Interpretation

B) Recognition

C) Acquisition

D) Segmentation

Ans:A

23)A typical size comparable in quality to monochromatic TV image is of size

A) 256 X 256

B) 512 X 512

C) 1920 X 1080

D) 1080 X 1080

Ans:B
24)The number of gray values are integer powers of

A) 4

B)2

C)8

D)1

Ans:B

25)What is the first and foremost step in Image Processing?

A) Image restoration

B) Image enhancement

C) Image acquisition

D) Segmentation

Ans:C

26)In which step of processing, the images are subdivided successively into smaller regions?

A) Image enhancement

B) Image acquisition

C) Segmentation

D) wavelet

Ans:D

27)What is the next step in image processing after compression?

A) Wavelets

B) Representation and description

C) Segmentation

D) Morphological processing

Ans:D

28) What is the step that is performed before color image processing in image processing?

A) Wavelets and multi resolution processing

B) Image enhancement

C) Image acquisition

D) Image restoration

Ans:D
29)How many number of steps are involved in image processing?

A) 10

B) 11

C) 9

D) 12

Ans:A

30)What is the expanded form of JPEG?

A) Joint Photographic Expansion Group

B) Joint Photographic Experts Group

C) Joint Photographic Expanded Group

D) Joint Photographs Expansion Group

Ans:B

31)Which of the following step deals with tools for extracting image components those are useful in
the representation and description of shape?

A) Representation & description

B) Segmentation

C) Compression

D) Morphological processing

Ans:D

32)In which step of the processing, assigning a label (e.g., “vehicle”) to an object based on its
descriptors is done?

A) Object recognition

B) Morphological processing

C) Representation & description

D) Segmentation

Ans:A

33)What role does the segmentation play in image processing?

A) Deals with extracting attributes that result in some quantitative information of interest

B) Deals with techniques for reducing the storage required saving an image, or the bandwidth
required transmitting it

C) Deals with property in which images are subdivided successively into smaller regions
D) Deals with partitioning an image into its constituent parts or objects

Ans:D

34)What is the correct sequence of steps in image processing?

A) Image acquisition->Image enhancement->Image restoration->Color image processing-

>Compression->Wavelets and multi resolution processing->Morphological processing-
>Segmentation->Representation & description->Object recognition

B) Image acquisition->Image enhancement->Image restoration->Color image processing->Wavelets

and multi resolution processing->Compression->Morphological processing->Segmentation-
>Representation & description->Object recognition

C) Image acquisition->Image enhancement->Color image processing->Image restoration->Wavelets

and multi resolution processing->Compression->Morphological processing->Segmentation-
>Representation & description->Object recognition

D) Image acquisition->Image enhancement->Image restoration->Color image processing->Wavelets

and multi resolution processing->Compression->Morphological processing->Representation &
description->Segmentation->Object recognition

Ans:B

35) A structured light illumination technique was used for lens deformation

A) lens deformation

B) inverse filtering

C) lens enhancement

D)lens error

Ans:A

36) Tomography is the algorithm that uses images

A) edges

B) slices

C) boundaries

D) illumination

Ans:B
37) Major use of gamma rays imaging includes

A) Radars

B) astronomical observations

C) industry

D) lithography

Ans:B

38) Angiography uses what technique

A) Image addition

B) Image Multiplication

C) Image division

D) None

Ans:B

39)What is the sum of the coefficient of the mask defined using HPF?

A) 1

B) -1

C) 0

D) None of the mentioned

Ans:C

40)Which is not an example of image processing

A ) thumb prints

B) paper currency

C)mp3

D)lisence plate detection

Ans:C

41) An image is a two dimensional function where x and y are

A) spatial coordinates

B) frequency coordinates

C)time coordinates

D) real coordinates

Ans:A
42) Lithography uses

A) ultraviolet

B) x-rays

C)gamma

D) visible rays

Ans:A

43) Image subtraction is used for

A)color enhancement

B) Frequency enhancement

C)Spatial enhancement

D)Detection

Ans:D

44) Sensor strip mounted in a ring configuration is used in

A) microscopy

B) medical

C) industry

D) radar

Ans:B

45)1024 x 1024 image has resolution of

A) 1048576

B) 1148576

C) 1248576

D) 1348576

Ans:A
46)The lens is made up of concentric layers of

A) strong cells

B) inner cells

C) fibrous cells

D) outer cells

Ans:C

47)Radio wave band encompasses

A) audio

B) AM

C) FM

D) Both b and c

Ans:D

48)L = 23 would have

A) 2 levels

B) 4levels

C) 8 levels

D) 16 levels

Ans:C

49)Digital images are displayed as a discrete set if

A) values

B) numbers

C) frequencies

D) intensities

Ans:D

50)In MxN, M is no of

A) intensity levels

B) colors

C) rows

D) columns

Ans:C
51) Each element of the matrix is called

A) dots

B) coordinate

C) pixels

D) value

Ans:C

52)Imaging system produces

A) high resolution image

B) low resolution image

C) digitized image

D) analog signal

Ans:C

53)Digitizing the coordinate values is called

A) radiance

B) variance

C) sampling

D) quantization

Ans:C

54) The smallest element of an image is called

A) pel

B) dot

C) resolution

D) digits

Ans:A

55)Types of imaging sensors are

A) two

B) three

C) four

D) five

Ans:B

56)E = hv in this expression, h is called

A) speed of light

B) light constant

C) plank's constant

D) acceleration constant

Ans:C

57)DPI stands for

A) dots per image

B) dots per inches

C) dots per intensity

D) diameter per inches

Ans:B

58)No of bits to store image is denoted by the formula

A) b = NxK

B) b = MxN

C) b = MxNxK

D) b = MxK

Ans: C

59) MRI in imaging stands for

A) magnetic resonance imaging

B) magnetic resistance imaging

C) magnetic resonance intensity

D) major resonance imaging

Ans:A

60)Digitizing the amplitude values is called

A) radiance

B) illuminance

C) sampling

D) quantization

Ans:D
 Model Question Paper
Subject: Digital Image Processing Branch:E&TC

Class:BE Semester:VIII

1. What is the third step in digital image processing?

(A) Image Restoration

(B) Segmentation

(C) Image Enhancement

(D) Colour Image Processing

Ans: a

2. Digitizing the coordinate values of a continuous image is called

(A) Compression

(B) Quantization

(C) Sampling

(D) Segmentation

Ans: c

3. _____ is the total amount of energy that flows from light source.

(A) Radiance

(B) Darkness

(C) Brightness

(D) Luminance

Ans: a

4.Lossy compression is useful in

(A) Military imaging

(B) Space imaging

(C) Medical imaging

(D) Television broad casting

Ans: d

5. A continuous image is digitised at _______ points.

a) random
b) vertex
c) contour
d) sampling

Ans: d

6.The transition between continuous values of the image function and its digital equivalent is
called ______________
a) Quantisation
b) Sampling
c) Rasterisation
d) None of the Mentioned

Ans:a

7. Images quantised with insufficient brightness levels will lead to the occurrence of
____________
a) Pixillation
b) Blurring
c) False Contours

d)none of the above

Ans:c
8.The smallest discernible change in intensity level is called ____________
a) Intensity Resolution
b) Contour
c) Saturation
d) Contrast

Ans:a

9. What is the tool used in tasks such as zooming, shrinking, rotating, etc.?
a) Sampling
b) Interpolation
c) Filters

d)none of the above

Ans:b

10. The type of Interpolation where for each new location the intensity of the immediate pixel
is assigned is ___________
a) bicubic interpolation
b) cubic interpolation
c) bilinear interpolation
d) nearest neighbour interpolation

Ans:d

11. The type of Interpolation where the intensity of the FOUR neighbouring pixels is used to
obtain intensity a new location is called __________

a) Cubic interpolation
b) nearest neighbour interpolation
c) bilinear interpolation
d) bicubic interpolation

Ans: b

12. Dynamic range of imaging system is a ratio where the upper limit is determined by
a)Saturation
b) Noise
c) Brightness
d) Contrast
Ans:a

13. For Dynamic range ratio the lower limit is determined by

a) Saturation
b) Brightness
c) Noise

d) Contrast

Ans:c

14. Quantitatively, spatial resolution cannot be represented in which of the following ways
a) line pairs
b) pixels
c) dots
d) none of the Mentioned

Ans:d

15.A geometry consisting of in-line arrangement of sensors for image acquisition

a) A photodiode
b) Sensor strips
c) Sensor arrays
d) CMOS

Ans:b

16. The process of using known data to estimate values at unknown locations is called
a) Acquisition
b) Interpolation
c) Pixelation
d) None of the Mentioned

Ans:b

17. What is the first and foremost step in Image Processing?

a) Image restoration
b) Image enhancement
c) Image acquisition
d) Segmentation

Ans:c

18. In which step of processing, the images are subdivided successively into smaller regions?
a) Image enhancement
b) Image acquisition
c) Segmentation
d) Wavelets

Ans:c

19. How many number of steps are involved in image processing?

a) 10
b) 9
c) 11
d) 12

Ans:a

20. What is the expanded form of JPEG?

a) Joint Photographic Expansion Group
b) Joint Photographic Experts Group
c) Joint Photographs Expansion Group
d) Joint Photographic Expanded Group

Ans:b
21.The principal factor to determine the spatial resolution of an image is _______
a) Quantization
b) Sampling
c) Contrast
d) Dynamic range

Ans:b

22. What causes the effect, imperceptible set of very fine ridge like structures in areas of
smooth gray levels?
a) Caused by the use of an insufficient number of gray levels in smooth areas of a digital
image
b) Caused by the use of huge number of gray levels in smooth areas of a digital image
c) All of the mentioned
d) None of the mentioned

Ans:a

23. What is the name of the effect caused by the use of an insufficient number of gray levels
in smooth areas of a digital image?
a) Dynamic range
b) Ridging
c) Graininess
d) False contouring

Ans:d

24. Using rough rule of thumb, and assuming powers of 2 for convenience, what image size
are about the smallest images that can be expected to be reasonably free of objectionable
sampling checkerboards and false contouring?
a) 512*512pixels and 16 gray levels
b) 256*256pixels and 64 gray levels
c) 64*64pixels and 16 gray levels
d) 32*32pixels and 32 gray levels

Ans:b
25. What does a shift up and right in the curves of isopreference curve simply means? Verify
in terms of N (number of pixels) and k (L=2k, L is the gray level) values.
a) Smaller values for N and k, implies a better picture quality
b) Larger values for N and k, implies low picture quality
c) Larger values for N and k, implies better picture quality
d) Smaller values for N and k, implies low picture quality

Ans:c

26. How does the curves behave to the detail in the image in isopreference curve?
a) Curves tend to become more vertical as the detail in the image decreases
b) Curves tend to become less vertical as the detail in the image increases
c) Curves tend to become less vertical as the detail in the image decreases
d) Curves tend to become more vertical as the detail in the image increases

Ans:d

27. For an image with a large amount of detail, if the value of N (number of pixels) is fixed
then what is the gray level dependency in the perceived quality of this type of image?
a) Totally independent of the number of gray levels used
b) Nearly independent of the number of gray levels used
c) Highly dependent of the number of gray levels used
d) None of the mentioned

Ans:b

28. What is a band-limited function?

a) A function of limited duration whose highest frequency is finite
b) A function of limited duration whose highest frequency is infinite
c) All of the mentioned
d) None of the mentioned

Ans:a
29. For a band-limited function, which Theorem says that “if the function is sampled at a rate
equal to or greater than twice its highest frequency, the original function can be recovered
from its samples”?
a) Band-limitation theorem
b) Aliasing frequency theorem
c) Shannon sampling theorem
d) None of the mentioned
Ans:c

30. What is the name of the phenomenon that corrupts the sampled image, and how does it
happen?
a) Shannon sampling, if the band-limited functions are undersampled
b) Shannon sampling, if the band-limited functions are oversampled
c) Aliasing, if the band-limited functions are undersampled
d) Aliasing, if the band-limited functions are oversampled

Ans:c

31. How aliasing does corrupts the sampled image?

a) By introducing additional frequency components to the sampled function
b) By removing some frequency components from the sampled function
c) All of the mentioned
d) None of the mentioned

Ans:a

32. How can one reduce the aliasing effect on an image?

a) By reducing the high-frequency components of image by blurring the image
b) By increasing the high-frequency components of image by blurring the image
c) By reducing the high-frequency components of image by clarifying the image
d) By increasing the high-frequency components of image by clarifying the image
Ans:a

33If h(rk) = nk, rk the kthgray level and nk total pixels with gray level rk, is a histogram in gray
level range [0, L – 1]. Then how can we normalize a histogram?
a) If each value of histogram is added by total number of pixels in image, say n, p(rk)=nk+n
b) If each value of histogram is subtracted by total number of pixels in image, say n, p(rk)=nk-
n
c) If each value of histogram is multiplied by total number of pixels in image, say n,
p(rk)=nk * n
d) If each value of histogram is divided by total number of pixels in image, say n, p(rk)=nk / n

Ans:d

34. What is the sum of all components of a normalized histogram?

a) 1
b) -1
c) 0
d) None of the mentioned

Ans:a

35. A low contrast image will have what kind of histogram when, the histogram, h(rk) = nk,
rk the kthgray level and nk total pixels with gray level rk, is plotted nk versus rk?
a) The histogram that are concentrated on the dark side of gray scale
b) The histogram whose component are biased toward high side of gray scale
c) The histogram that is narrow and centered toward the middle of gray scale
d) The histogram that covers wide range of gray scale and the distribution of pixel is
approximately uniform

Ans:c

36. A bright image will have what kind of histogram, when the histogram, h(rk) = nk, rk the
kthgray level and nk total pixels with gray level rk, is plotted nk versus rk?
a) The histogram that are concentrated on the dark side of gray scale
b) The histogram whose component are biased toward high side of gray scale
c) The histogram that is narrow and centered toward the middle of gray scale
d) The histogram that covers wide range of gray scale and the distribution of pixel is
approximately uniform

Ans:b

37. A high contrast image and a dark image will have what kind of histogram respectively,
when the histogram, h(rk) = nk, rk the kthgray level and nk total pixels with gray level rk, is
plotted nk versus rk?
The histogram that are concentrated on the dark side of gray scale.
The histogram whose component are biased toward high side of gray scale.
The histogram that is narrow and centered toward the middle of gray scale.
The histogram that covers wide range of gray scale and the distribution of pixel is
approximately uniform.
a) I) And II) respectively
b) III) And II) respectively
c) II) And IV) respectively
d) IV) And I) respectively

Ans:d

38. The transformation s = T(r) producing a gray level s for each pixel value r of input image.
Then, if the T(r) is single valued in interval 0 ≤ r ≤ 1, what does it signifies?
a) It guarantees the existence of inverse transformation
b) It is needed to restrict producing of some inverted gray levels in output
c) It guarantees that the output gray level and the input gray level will be in same range
d) All of the mentioned

Ans:a

39. The transformation s = T(r) producing a gray level s for each pixel value r of input image.
Then, if the T(r) is monotonically increasing in interval 0 ≤ r ≤ 1, what does it signifies?
a) It guarantees the existence of inverse transformation
b) It is needed to restrict producing of some inverted gray levels in output
c) It guarantees that the output gray level and the input gray level will be in same range
d) All of the mentioned
Ans:b

40. The transformation s = T(r) producing a gray level s for each pixel value r of input image.
Then, if the T(r) is satisfying 0 ≤ T(r) ≤ 1 in interval 0 ≤ r ≤ 1, what does it signifies?
a) It guarantees the existence of inverse transformation
b) It is needed to restrict producing of some inverted gray levels in output
c) It guarantees that the output gray level and the input gray level will be in same range
d) All of the mentioned

Ans:c

41. What is the full form for PDF, a fundamental descriptor of random variables i.e. gray
values in an image?
a) Pixel distribution function
b) Portable document format
c) Pel deriving function
d) Probability density function
Ans:d

42. What is the full form of CDF?

a) Cumulative density function
b) Contour derived function
c) Cumulative distribution function
d) None of the mentioned

Ans:c

43. For the transformation T(r) = [∫0r pr(w) dw], r is gray value of input image, pr(r) is PDF of
random variable r and w is a dummy variable. If, the PDF are always positive and that the
function under integral gives the area under the function, the transformation is said to be
__________
a) Single valued
b) Monotonically increasing
c) All of the mentioned
d) None of the mentioned

Ans:c

44. The transformation T (rk) = ∑k(j=0) nj /n, k = 0, 1, 2, …, L-1, where L is max gray value
possible and r-k is the kthgray level, is called _______
a) Histogram linearization
b) Histogram equalization
c) All of the mentioned
d) None of the mentioned

Ans:c

45. If the histogram of same images, with different contrast, are different, then what is the
relation between the histogram equalized images?
a) They look visually very different from one another
b) They look visually very similar to one another
c) They look visually different from one another just like the input images
d) None of the mentioned

Ans:b

46.In 4-neighbours of a pixel p, how far are each of the neighbours located from p?
a) one pixel apart
b) four pixels apart
c) alternating pixels
d) none of the Mentioned

Ans:a

47. If S is a subset of pixels, pixels p and q are said to be ____________ if there exists a path
between them consisting of pixels entirely in S.
a) continuous
b) ambiguous
c) connected
d) none of the Mentioned

Ans:c

48. If R is a subset of pixels, we call R a _________ of the image if R is a connected set.

a) Disjoint
b) Region
c) Closed
d) Adjacent

Ans:b

49. Two regions are said to be ___________ if their union forms a connected set.
a) Adjacent
b) Disjoint
c) Closed
d) None of the Mentioned
Ans:a

50. If an image contains K disjoint regions, what does the union of all the regions represent?
a) Background
b) Foreground
c) Outer Border
d) Inner Border

Ans:b

51. For a region R, the set of points that are adjacent to the complement of R is called as
________
a) Boundary
b) Border
c) Contour
d) All of the Mentioned
Ans:d

52. The distance between pixels p and q, the pixels have a distance less than or equal to some
value of radius r centred at (x,y) is called :
a) Euclidean distance
b) City-Block distance
c) Chessboard distance
d) None of the Mentioned

Ans:a

53. The distance between pixels p and q, the pixels have a distance less than or equal to some
value of radius r, form a diamond centred at (x,y) is called :
a) Euclidean distance
b) Chessboard distance
c) City-Block distance
d) None of the Mentioned

Ans:c

54. The distance between pixels p and q, the pixels have a distance less than or equal to some
value of radius r, form a square centred at (x,y) is called :
a) Euclidean distance
b) Chessboard distance
c) City-Block distance
d) None of the Mentioned

Ans:b

55. Which of the following is NOT is not a type of Adjacency?

a) 4-Adjacency
b) 8-Adjacency
c) m-Adjacency
d) None of the Mentioned
Ans:d

56. What is accepting or rejecting certain frequency components called as?

a) Filtering
b) Eliminating
c) Slicing
d) None of the Mentioned

Ans:a

57. A filter that passes low frequencies is _____________

a) Band pass filter
b) High pass filter
c) Low pass filter
d) None of the Mentioned

Ans:c

58. What is the process of moving a filter mask over the image and computing the sum of
products at each location called as?
a) Convolution
b) Correlation
c) Linear spatial filtering
d) Non linear spatial filtering

Ans:b

59. The standard deviation controls ___________ of the bell (2-D Gaussian function of bell
shape).
a) Size
b) Curve
c) Tightness
d) None of the Mentioned
Ans:c

60. What is required to generate an M X N linear spatial filter?

a) MN mask coefficients
b) M+N coordinates
c) MN spatial coefficients
d) None of the Mentioned

Ans:a
Image Sampling and Quantization
1. A continuous image is digitised at points.
a) random
b) vertex
c) contour
d) sampling
View Answer

Answer: d
Explanation: The sampling points are ordered in the plane and their relation is called a Grid.

2. The transition between continuous values of the image function and its digital equivalent is
called
a) Quantisation
b) Sampling
c) Rasterisation
d) None of the Mentioned
View Answer

Answer: a
Explanation: The transition between continuous values of the image function and its digital
equivalent is called Quantisation.

3. Images quantised with insufficient brightness levels will lead to the occurrence of

a) Pixillation
b) Blurring
c) False Contours
d) None of the Mentioned
View Answer

Answer: c
Explanation: This effect arises when the number brightness levels is lower that which the human
eye can distinguish.

4. The smallest discernible change in intensity level is called _

a) Intensity Resolution
b) Contour
c) Saturation
d) Contrast
View Answer

Answer: a
Explanation: Number of bits used to quantise intensity of an image is called intensity resolution.
5. What is the tool used in tasks such as zooming, shrinking, rotating, etc.?
a) Sampling
b) Interpolation
c) Filters
d) None of the Mentioned
View Answer

Answer: b
Explanation: Interpolation is the basic tool used for zooming, shrinking, rotating, etc.

6. The type of Interpolation where for each new location the intensity of the immediate pixel is
assigned is
a) bicubic interpolation
b) cubic interpolation
c) bilinear interpolation
d) nearest neighbour interpolation
View Answer

Answer: d
Explanation: Its called as Nearest Neighbour Interpolation since for each new location the
intensity of the next neighbouring pixel is assigned.

7. The type of Interpolation where the intensity of the FOUR neighbouring pixels is used to
obtain intensity a new location is called
a) cubic interpolation
b) nearest neighbour interpolation
c) bilinear interpolation
d) bicubic interpolation
View Answer

Answer: b
Explanation: Bilinear interpolation is where the FOUR neighbouring pixels is used to estimate
intensity for a new location.

8. Dynamic range of imaging system is a ratio where the upper limit is determined by
a) Saturation
b) Noise
c) Brightness
d) Contrast
View Answer

Answer: a
Explanation: Saturation is taken as the Numerator.

9. For Dynamic range ratio the lower limit is determined by

a) Saturation
b) Brightness
c) Noise
d) Contrast
View Answer

Answer: c
Explanation: Noise is taken as the Denominator.

10. Quantitatively, spatial resolution cannot be represented in which of the following ways
a) line pairs
b) pixels
c) dots
d) none of the Mentioned
View Answer

Answer: d
Explanation: All the options can be used to represent spatial resolution.

11. The most familiar single sensor used for Image Acquisition is
a) Microdensitometer
b) Photodiode
c) CMOS
d) None of the Mentioned
View Answer

Answer: b
Explanation: Photodiode is the most commonly used single sensor made up of silicon materials.

12. A geometry consisting of in-line arrangement of sensors for image acquisition

a) A photodiode
b) Sensor strips
c) Sensor arrays
d) CMOS
View Answer

Answer: b
Explanation: Sensor strips are very common next to single sensor and use in-line arrangement.

13. CAT in imaging stands for

a) Computer Aided Telegraphy
b) Computer Aided Tomography
c) Computerised Axial Telegraphy
d) Computerised Axial Tomography
View Answer
Answer: d
Explanation: Industrial Computerised Axial Tomography is based on image acquisition using
sensor strips.

14. The section of the real plane spanned by the coordinates of an image is called the

a) Spacial Domain
b) Coordinate Axes
c) Plane of Symmetry
d) None of the Mentioned
View Answer

Answer: a
Explanation: The section of the real plane spanned by the coordinates of an image is called the
Spacial Domain, with the x and y coordinates referred to as Spacial coordinates.

15. The difference is intensity between the highest and the lowest intensity levels in an image is

a) Noise
b) Saturation
c) Contrast
d) Brightness
View Answer

Answer: c
Explanation: Contrast is the measure of the difference is intensity between the highest and the
lowest intensity levels in an image.

16. is the effect caused by the use of an insufficient number of intensity levels in
smooth areas of a digital image.
a) Gaussian smooth
b) Contouring
c) False Contouring
d) Interpolation
View Answer

Answer: c
Explanation: It is called so because the ridges resemble the contours of a map.

17. The process of using known data to estimate values at unknown locations is called
a) Acquisition
b) Interpolation
c) Pixelation
d) None of the Mentioned
View Answer
Answer: b
Explanation: Interpolation is the process used to estimate unknown locations. It is applied in all
image resampling methods.

18. Which of the following is NOT an application of Image Multiplication?

a) Shading Correction
b) Masking
c) Pixelation
d) Region of Interest operations
View Answer

Answer: c
Explanation: Because Pixelation deals with enlargement of pixels.

19. The procedure done on a digital image to alter the values of its individual pixels is
a) Neighbourhood Operations
b) Image Registration
c) Geometric Spacial Transformation
d) Single Pixel Operation
View Answer

Answer: d
Explanation: It is expressed as a transformation function T, of the form s=T(z) , where z is the
intensity.

20. In Geometric Spacial Transformation, points whose locations are known precisely in input
and reference images.
a) Tie points
b) Réseau points
c) Known points
d) Key-points
View Answer

Answer: a
Explanation: Tie points, also called Control points are points whose locations are known
precisely in input and reference images.

21. Of the following, has the maximum frequency.

a) UV Rays
b) Gamma Rays
c) Microwaves
d) Radio Waves
View Answer
Answer: b
Explanation: Gamma Rays come first in the electromagnetic spectrum sorted in the decreasing
order of frequency.

22. In the Visible spectrum the colour has the maximum wavelength.
a) Violet
b) Blue
c) Red
d) Yellow
View Answer

Answer: c
Explanation: Red is towards the right in the electromagnetic spectrum sorted in the increasing
order of wavelength.

23. Wavelength and frequency are related as : (c = speed of light)

a) c = wavelength / frequency
b) frequency = wavelength / c
c) wavelength = c * frequency
d) c = wavelength * frequency
View Answer

Answer: d
Explanation: It is usually written as wavelength = c / frequency.

24. Electromagnetic waves can be visualised as a

a) sine wave
b) cosine wave
c) tangential wave
d) None of the mentioned
View Answer

Answer: a
Explanation: Electromagnetic waves are visualised as sinusoidal wave.

25. How is radiance measured?

a) lumens
b) watts
c) armstrong
d) hertz
View Answer

Answer: b
Explanation: Radiance is the total amount of energy that flows from the light source and is
measured in Watts.
26. Which of the following is used for chest and dental scans?
a) Hard X-Rays
b) Soft X-Rays
c) Radio waves
d) Infrared Rays
View Answer

Answer: b
Explanation: Soft X-Rays (low energy) are used for dental and chest scans.

27. Which of the following is impractical to measure?

a) Frequency
b) Radiance
c) Luminance
d) Brightness
View Answer

Answer: d
Explanation: Brightness is subjective descriptor of light perception that is impossible to measure.

28. Massless particle containing a certain amount of energy is called

a) Photon
b) Shell
c) Electron
d) None of the mentioned
View Answer

Answer: a
Explanation: Each bundle of massless energy is called a Photon.

29. What do you mean by achromatic light?

a) Chromatic light
b) Monochromatic light
c) Infrared light
d) Invisible light
View Answer

Answer: b
Explanation: Achromatic light is also called monochromatic light.(Light void of color)

30. Which of the following embodies the achromatic notion of intensity?

a) Luminance
b) Brightness
c) Frequency
d) Radiance
View Answer
Answer: b
Explanation: Brightness embodies the achromatic notion of intensity and is a key factor in
describing color sensation.

31. How is array operation carried out involving one or more images?
a) array by array
b) pixel by pixel
c) column by column
d) row by row
View Answer

Answer: b
Explanation: Any array operation is carried out on a pixel by pixel basis.

32. The property indicating that the output of a linear operation due to the sum of two inputs is
same as performing the operation on the inputs individually and then summing the results is
called
a) additivity
b) heterogeneity
c) homogeneity
d) None of the Mentioned
View Answer

Answer: a
Explanation: This property is called additivity .

33. The property indicating that the output of a linear operation to a constant times as input is the
same as the output of operation due to original input multiplied by that constant is called

a) additivity
b) heterogeneity
c) homogeneity
d) None of the Mentioned
View Answer

Answer: c
Explanation: This property is called homogeneity .

34. Enhancement of differences between images is based on the principle of

a) Additivity
b) Homogeneity
c) Subtraction
d) None of the Mentioned
View Answer
Answer: c
Explanation: A frequent application of image subtraction is in the enhancement of differences
between images .

35. A commercial use of Image Subtraction is

a) Mask mode radiography
b) MRI scan
c) CT scan
d) None of the Mentioned
View Answer

Answer: a
Explanation: Mask mode radiography is an important medical imaging area based on Image
Subtraction.

36. Region of Interest (ROI) operations is commonly called as

a) Shading correction
b) Masking
c) Dilation
d) None of the Mentioned
View Answer

Answer: b
Explanation: A common use of image multiplication is Masking, also called ROI operation.

37. If every element of a set A is also an element of a set B, then A is said to be a of

set B.
a) Disjoint set
b) Union
c) Subset
d) Complement set
View Answer

Answer: c
Explanation: A is called the subset of B.

38. Consider two regions A and B composed of foreground pixels. The of these two
sets is the set of elements belonging to set A or set B or both.
a) OR
b) AND
c) NOT
d) XOR
View Answer

Answer: a
Explanation: This is called an OR operation.
39. Imaging systems having physical artefacts embedded in the imaging sensors produce a set of
points called
a) Tie Points
b) Control Points
c) Reseau Marks
d) None of the Mentioned
View Answer

Answer: c
Explanation: These points are called “known” points or “Reseau marks”.

40. Image processing approaches operating directly on pixels of input image work directly in

a) Transform domain
b) Spatial domain
c) Inverse transformation
d) None of the Mentioned
View Answer

Answer: b
Explanation: Operations directly on pixels of input image work directly in Spatial Domain.

41. Noise reduction is obtained by blurring the image using smoothing filter.
a) True
b) False
View Answer

Answer: a
Explanation: Noise reduction is obtained by blurring the image using smoothing filter. Blurring
is used in pre-processing steps, such as removal of small details from an image prior to object
extraction and, bridging of small gaps in lines or curves.

42. What is the output of a smoothing, linear spatial filter?

a) Median of pixels
b) Maximum of pixels
c) Minimum of pixels
d) Average of pixels
View Answer

Answer: d
Explanation: The output or response of a smoothing, linear spatial filter is simply the average of
the pixels contained in the neighbourhood of the filter mask.

43. Smoothing linear filter is also known as median filter.

a) True
b) False
View Answer

Answer: b
Explanation: Since the smoothing spatial filter performs the average of the pixels, it is also called
as averaging filter.

44. Which of the following in an image can be removed by using smoothing filter?
a) Smooth transitions of gray levels
b) Smooth transitions of brightness levels
c) Sharp transitions of gray levels
d) Sharp transitions of brightness levels
View Answer

Answer: c
Explanation: Smoothing filter replaces the value of every pixel in an image by the average value
of the gray levels. So, this helps in removing the sharp transitions in the gray levels between the
pixels. This is done because, random noise typically consists of sharp transitions in gray levels.

45. Which of the following is the disadvantage of using smoothing filter?

a) Blur edges
b) Blur inner pixels
c) Remove sharp transitions
d) Sharp edges
View Answer

Answer: a
Explanation: Edges, which almost always are desirable features of an image, also are
characterized by sharp transitions in gray level. So, averaging filters have an undesirable side
effect that they blur these edges.

46. Smoothing spatial filters doesn‟ t smooth the false contours.

a) True
b) False
View Answer

Answer: b
Explanation: One of the application of smoothing spatial filters is that, they help in smoothing
the false contours that result from using an insufficient number of gray levels.
47. The mask shown in the figure below belongs to which type of filter?

a) Sharpening spatial filter

b) Median filter
c) Sharpening frequency filter
d) Smoothing spatial filter
View Answer

Answer: d
Explanation: This is a smoothing spatial filter. This mask yields a so called weighted average,
which means that different pixels are multiplied with different coefficient values. This helps in
giving much importance to the some pixels at the expense of others.

48. The mask shown in the figure below belongs to which type of filter?

a) Sharpening spatial filter

b) Median filter
c) Smoothing spatial filter
d) Sharpening frequency filter
View Answer

Answer: c
Explanation: The mask shown in the figure represents a 3×3 smoothing filter. Use of this filter
yields the standard average of the pixels under the mask.

49. Box filter is a type of smoothing filter.

a) True
b) False
View Answer

Answer: a
Explanation: A spatial averaging filter or spatial smoothening filter in which all the coefficients
are equal is also called as box filter.
50. If the size of the averaging filter used to smooth the original image to first image is 9, then
what would be the size of the averaging filter used in smoothing the same original picture to
second in second image?

a) 3
b) 5
c) 9
d) 15
View Answer

Answer: d
Explanation: We know that, as the size of the filter used in smoothening the original image that
is averaging filter increases then the blurring of the image. Since the second image is more
blurred than the first image, the window size should be more than 9.

51. Which of the following comes under the application of image blurring?
a) Object detection
b) Gross representation
c) Object motion
d) Image segmentation
View Answer

Answer: b
Explanation: An important application of spatial averaging is to blur an image for the purpose of
getting a gross representation of interested objects, such that the intensity of the small objects
blends with the background and large objects become easy to detect.c

52. Which of the following filters response is based on ranking of pixels?

a) Nonlinear smoothing filters
b) Linear smoothing filters
c) Sharpening filters
d) Geometric mean filter
View Answer

Answer: a
Explanation: Order static filters are nonlinear smoothing spatial filters whose response is based
on the ordering or ranking the pixels contained in the image area encompassed by the filter, and
then replacing the value of the central pixel with the value determined by the ranking result.
advertisement
53. Median filter belongs to which category of filters?
a) Linear spatial filter
b) Frequency domain filter
c) Order static filter
d) Sharpening filter
View Answer

Answer: c
Explanation: The median filter belongs to order static filters, which, as the name implies,
replaces the value of the pixel by the median of the gray levels that are present in the
neighbourhood of the pixels.

54. Median filters are effective in the presence of impulse noise.

a) True
b) False
View Answer

Answer: a
Explanation: Median filters are used to remove impulse noises, also called as salt-and-pepper
noise because of its appearance as white and black dots in the image.

55. What is the maximum area of the cluster that can be eliminated by using an n×n median
filter?
a) n2
b) n2/2
c) 2*n2
d) n
View Answer

Answer: b
Explanation: Isolated clusters of pixels that are light or dark with respect to their neighbours, and
whose area is less than n2/2, i.e., half the area of the filter, can be eliminated by using an n×n
median filter.

56. Which of the following expression is used to denote spatial domain process?
a) g(x,y)=T[f(x,y)]
b) f(x+y)=T[g(x+y)]
c) g(xy)=T[f(xy)]
d) g(x-y)=T[f(x-y)]
View Answer

Answer: a
Explanation: Spatial domain processes will be denoted by the expression g(x,y)=T[f(x,y)], where
f(x,y) is the input image, g(x,y) is the processed image, and T is an operator on f, defined over
some neighborhood of (x, y). In addition, T can operate on a set of input images, such as
performing the pixel-by-pixel sum of K images for noise reduction.

57. Which of the following shows three basic types of functions used frequently for image
enhancement?
a) Linear, logarithmic and inverse law
b) Power law, logarithmic and inverse law
c) Linear, logarithmic and power law
d) Linear, exponential and inverse law
View Answer

Answer: b
Explanation: In introduction to gray-level transformations, which shows three basic types of
functions used frequently for image enhancement: linear (negative and identity transformations),
logarithmic (log and inverse-log transformations), and power-law (nth power and nth root
transformations).The identity function is the trivial case in which output intensities are identical
to input intensities. It is included in the graph only for completeness.

58. Which expression is obtained by performing the negative transformation on the negative of
an image with gray levels in the range[0,L-1] ?
a) s=L+1-r
b) s=L+1+r
c) s=L-1-r
d) s=L-1+r
View Answer

Answer: c
Explanation: The negative of an image with gray levels in the range[0,L-1] is obtained by using
the negative transformation, which is given by the expression: s=L-1-r.

59. What is the general form of representation of log transformation?

a) s=clog10(1/r)
b) s=clog10(1+r)
c) s=clog10(1*r)
d) s=clog10(1-r)
View Answer

Answer: b
Explanation: The general form of the log transformation: s=clog10(1+r), where c is a constant,
and it is assumed that r ≥ 0.

60. What is the general form of representation of power transformation?

a) s=crγ
b) c=srγ
c) s=rc
d) s=rcγ
View Answer

Answer: a
Explanation: Power-law transformations have the basic form: s=crγ where c and g are positive
constants. Sometimes s=crγ is written as s=c.(r+ε)γ to account for an offset (that is, a measurable
output when the input is zero).

61. What is the name of process used to correct the power-law response phenomena?
a) Beta correction
b) Alpha correction
c) Gamma correction
d) Pie correction
View Answer

Answer: c
Explanation: A variety of devices used for image capture, printing, and display respond
according to a power law. By convention, the exponent in the power-law equation is referred to
as gamma .The process used to correct these power-law response phenomena is called gamma
correction.

62. Which of the following transformation function requires much information to be specified at
the time of input?
a) Log transformation
b) Power transformation
c) Piece-wise transformation
d) Linear transformation
View Answer

Answer: c
Explanation: The practical implementation of some important transformations can be formulated
only as piecewise functions. The principal disadvantage of piecewise functions is that their
specification requires considerably more user input.

63. In contrast stretching, if r1=s1 and r2=s2 then which of the following is true?
a) The transformation is not a linear function that produces no changes in gray levels
b) The transformation is a linear function that produces no changes in gray levels
c) The transformation is a linear function that produces changes in gray levels
d) The transformation is not a linear function that produces changes in gray levels
View Answer

Answer: b
Explanation: The locations of points (r1,s1) and (r2,s2) control the shape of the transformation
function. If r1=s1 and r2=s2 then the transformation is a linear function that produces no changes
in gray levels.
64. In contrast stretching, if r1=r2, s1=0 and s2=L-1 then which of the following is true?
a) The transformation becomes a thresholding function that creates an octal image
b) The transformation becomes a override function that creates an octal image
c) The transformation becomes a thresholding function that creates a binary image
d) The transformation becomes a thresholding function that do not create an octal image
View Answer

Answer: c
Explanation: If r1=r2, s1=0 and s2=L-1,the transformation becomes a thresholding function that
creates a binary image.

65. In contrast stretching, if r1≤r2 and s1≤s2 then which of the following is true?
a) The transformation function is double valued and exponentially increasing
b) The transformation function is double valued and monotonically increasing
c) The transformation function is single valued and exponentially increasing
d) The transformation function is single valued and monotonically increasing
View Answer

Answer: d
Explanation: The locations of points (r1,s1) and (r2,s2) control the shape of the transformation
function. If r1≤r2 and s1≤s2 then the function is single valued and monotonically increasing.
advertisement

66. In which type of slicing, highlighting a specific range of gray levels in an image often is
desired?
a) Gray-level slicing
b) Bit-plane slicing
c) Contrast stretching
d) Byte-level slicing
View Answer

Answer: a
Explanation: Highlighting a specific range of gray levels in an image often is desired in gray-
level slicing. Applications include enhancing features such as masses of water in satellite
imagery and enhancing flaws in X-ray images.

67. Which of the following depicts the main functionality of the Bit-plane slicing?
a) Highlighting a specific range of gray levels in an image
b) Highlighting the contribution made to total image appearance by specific bits
c) Highlighting the contribution made to total image appearance by specific byte
d) Highlighting the contribution made to total image appearance by specific pixels
View Answer

Answer: b
Explanation: Instead of highlighting gray-level ranges, highlighting the contribution made to
total image appearance by specific bits might be desired. Suppose , each pixel in an image is
represented by 8 bits. Imagine that the image is composed of eight 1-bit planes, ranging from bit-
plane 0 for the least significant bit to bit-plane 7 for the most significant bit. In terms of 8-bit
bytes, plane 0 contains all the lowest order bits in the bytes comprising the pixels in the image
and plane 7 contains all the high-order bits.

68. Which of the following is the primary objective of sharpening of an image?

a) Blurring the image
b) Highlight fine details in the image
c) Increase the brightness of the image
d) Decrease the brightness of the image
View Answer

Answer: b
Explanation: The sharpening of image helps in highlighting the fine details that are present in the
image or to enhance the details that are blurred due to some reason like adding noise.

69. Image sharpening process is used in electronic printing.

a) True
b) False
View Answer

Answer: a
Explanation: The applications of image sharpening is present in various fields like electronic
printing, autonomous guidance in military systems, medical imaging and industrial inspection.

70. In spatial domain, which of the following operation is done on the pixels in sharpening the
image?
a) Integration
b) Average
c) Median
d) Differentiation
View Answer

Answer: d
Explanation: We know that, in blurring the image, we perform the average of pixels which can
be considered as integration. As sharpening is the opposite process of blurring, logically we can
tell that we perform differentiation on the pixels to sharpen the image.

71. Image differentiation enhances the edges, discontinuities and deemphasizes the pixels with
slow varying gray levels.
a) True
b) False
View Answer

Answer: a
Explanation: Fundamentally, the strength of the response of the derivative operative is
proportional to the degree of discontinuity in the image. So, we can state that image
differentiation enhances the edges, discontinuities and deemphasizes the pixels with slow
varying gray levels.

72. In which of the following cases, we wouldn‟ t worry about the behaviour of sharpening filter?
a) Flat segments
b) Step discontinuities
c) Ramp discontinuities
d) Slow varying gray values
View Answer

Answer: d
Explanation: We are interested in the behaviour of derivatives used in sharpening in the constant
gray level areas i.e., flat segments, and at the onset and end of discontinuities, i.e., step and ramp
discontinuities.

73. Which of the following is the valid response when we apply a first derivative?
a) Non-zero at flat segments
b) Zero at the onset of gray level step
c) Zero in flat segments
d) Zero along ramps
View Answer

Answer: c
Explanation: The derivations of digital functions are defined in terms of differences. The
definition we use for first derivative should be zero in flat segments, nonzero at the onset of a
gray level step or ramp and nonzero along the ramps.

74. Which of the following is not a valid response when we apply a second derivative?
a) Zero response at onset of gray level step
b) Nonzero response at onset of gray level step
c) Zero response at flat segments
d) Nonzero response along the ramps
View Answer

Answer: b
Explanation: The derivations of digital functions are defined in terms of differences. The
definition we use for second derivative should be zero in flat segments, zero at the onset of a
gray level step or ramp and nonzero along the ramps.

75. If f(x,y) is an image function of two variables, then the first order derivative of a one
dimensional function, f(x) is:
a) f(x+1)-f(x)
b) f(x)-f(x+1)
c) f(x-1)-f(x+1)
d) f(x)+f(x-1)
View Answer

Answer: a
Explanation: The first order derivative of a single dimensional function f(x) is the difference
between f(x) and f(x+1).
That is, ∂f/∂x=f(x+1)-f(x).

76. Isolated point is also called as noise point.

a) True
b) False
View Answer

Answer: a
Explanation: The point which has very high or very low gray level value compared to its
neighbours, then that point is called as isolated point or noise point. The noise point of is of one
pixel size.

77. What is the thickness of the edges produced by first order derivatives when compared to that
of second order derivatives?
a) Finer
b) Equal
c) Thicker
d) Independent
View Answer

Answer: c
Explanation: We know that, the first order derivative is nonzero along the entire ramp while the
second order is zero along the ramp. So, we can conclude that the first order derivatives produce
thicker edges and the second order derivatives produce much finer edges.

78. First order derivative can enhance the fine detail in the image compared to that of second
order derivative.
a) True
b) False
View Answer

Answer: b
Explanation: The response at and around the noise point is much stronger for the second order
derivative than for the first order derivative. So, we can state that the second order derivative is
better to enhance the fine details in the image including noise when compared to that of first
order derivative.

79. Which of the following derivatives produce a double response at step changes in gray level?
a) First order derivative
b) Third order derivative
c) Second order derivative
d) First and second order derivatives
View Answer

Answer: c
Explanation: Second order derivatives produce a double line response for the step changes in the
gray level. We also note of second-order derivatives that, for similar changes in gray-level values
in an image, their response is stronger to a line than to a step, and to a point than to a line.

80. The objective of sharpening spatial filters is/are to

a) Highlight fine detail in an image
b) Enhance detail that has been blurred because of some error
c) Enhance detail that has been blurred because of some natural effect of some method of image
acquisition
d) All of the mentioned
View Answer

Answer: d
Explanation: Highlighting the fine detail in an image or Enhancing detail that has been blurred
because of some error or some natural effect of some method of image acquisition, is the
principal objective of sharpening spatial filters.

81. Sharpening is analogous to which of the following operations?

a) To spatial integration
b) To spatial differentiation
c) All of the mentioned
d) None of the mentioned
View Answer

Answer: b
Explanation: Smoothing is analogous to integration and so, sharpening to spatial differentiation.

82. Which of the following fact(s) is/are true about sharpening spatial filters using digital
differentiation?
a) Sharpening spatial filter response is proportional to the discontinuity of the image at the point
where the derivative operation is applied
b) Sharpening spatial filters enhances edges and discontinuities like noise
c) Sharpening spatial filters deemphasizes areas that have slowly varying gray-level values
d) All of the mentioned
View Answer

Answer: d
Explanation: Derivative operator‟ s response is proportional to the discontinuity of the image
at the point where the derivative operation is applied.
Image differentiation enhances edges and discontinuities like noise and deemphasizes areas that
have slowly varying gray-level values.
Since a sharpening spatial filters are analogous to differentiation, so, all the above mentioned
facts are true for sharpening spatial filters.

83. Which of the facts(s) is/are true for the first order derivative of a digital function?
a) Must be nonzero in the areas of constant grey values
b) Must be zero at the onset of a gray-level step or ramp discontinuities
c) Must be nonzero along the gray-level ramps
d) None of the mentioned
View Answer

Answer: c
Explanation: The first order derivative of a digital function is defined as:
Must be zero in the areas of constant grey values.
Must be nonzero at the onset of a gray-level step or ramp discontinuities.
Must be nonzero along the gray-level ramps.

84. Which of the facts(s) is/are true for the second order derivative of a digital function?
a) Must be zero in the flat areas
b) Must be nonzero at the onset and end of a gray-level step or ramp discontinuities
c) Must be zero along the ramps of constant slope
d) All of the mentioned
View Answer

Answer: c
Explanation: The second order derivative of a digital function is defined as:
Must be zero in the flat areas i.e. areas of constant grey values.
Must be nonzero at the onset of a gray-level step or ramp discontinuities.
Must be zero along the gray-level ramps of constant slope.

85. The derivative of digital function is defined in terms of difference. Then, which of the
following defines the first order derivative ∂f/∂x= of a one-dimensional function
f(x)?
a) f(x+1)-f(x)
b) f(x+1)+ f(x-1)-2f(x)
c) All of the mentioned depending upon the time when partial derivative will be dealt along two
spatial axes
d) None of the mentioned
View Answer

Answer: a
Explanation: The definition of a first order derivative of a one dimensional image f(x) is:
∂f/∂x= f(x+1)-f(x), where the partial derivative is used to keep notation same even for f(x, y)
when partial derivative will be dealt along two spatial axes.
86. The derivative of digital function is defined in terms of difference. Then, which of the
following defines the second order derivative ∂2 f/∂x2 = of a one-dimensional
function f(x)?
a) f(x+1)-f(x)
b) f(x+1)+ f(x-1)-2f(x)
c) All of the mentioned depending upon the time when partial derivative will be dealt along two
spatial axes
d) None of the mentioned
View Answer

Answer: b
Explanation: The definition of a second order derivative of a one dimensional image f(x) is:
(∂2 f)/∂x2 =f(x+1)+ f(x-1)-2f(x), where the partial derivative is used to keep notation same even
for f(x, y) when partial derivative will be dealt along two spatial axes.

87. What kind of relation can be obtained between first order derivative and second order
derivative of an image having a on the basis of edge productions that shows a transition like a
ramp of constant slope?
a) First order derivative produces thick edge while second order produces a very fine edge
b) Second order derivative produces thick edge while first order produces a very fine edge
c) Both first and second order produces thick edge
d) Both first and second order produces a very fine edge
View Answer

Answer: a
Explanation: the first order derivative remains nonzero along the entire ramp of constant slope,
while the second order derivative remain nonzero only at onset and end of such ramps.
If an edge in an image shows transition like the ramp of constant slope, the first order and second
order derivative values shows the production of thick and finer edge respectively.

88. What kind of relation can be obtained between first order derivative and second order
derivative of an image on the response obtained by encountering an isolated noise point in the
image?
a) First order derivative has a stronger response than a second order
b) Second order derivative has a stronger response than a first order
c) Both enhances the same and so the response is same for both first and second order derivative
d) None of the mentioned
View Answer

Answer: b
Explanation: This is because a second order derivative is more aggressive toward enhancing
sharp changes than a first order.

89. What kind of relation can be obtained between the response of first order derivative and
second order derivative of an image having a transition into gray-level step from zero?
a) First order derivative has a stronger response than a second order
b) Second order derivative has a stronger response than a first order
c) Both first and second order derivative has the same response
d) None of the mentioned
View Answer

Answer: c
Explanation: This is because a first order derivative has stronger response to a gray-level step
than a second order, but, the response becomes same if transition into gray-level step is from
zero.

90. If in an image there exist similar change in gray-level values in the image, which of the
following shows a stronger response using second order derivative operator for sharpening?
a) A line
b) A step
c) A point
d) None of the mentioned
View Answer

Answer: c
Explanation: second order derivative shows a stronger response to a line than a step and to a
point than a line, if there is similar changes in gray-level values in an image.

91. To convert a continuous sensed data into Digital form, which of the following is required?
a) Sampling
b) Quantization
c) Both Sampling and Quantization
d) Neither Sampling nor Quantization
View Answer

Answer: c
Explanation: The output of the most sensor is a continuous waveform and the amplitude and
spatial behavior of such waveform are related to the physical phenomenon being sensed.

92. To convert a continuous image f(x, y) to digital form, we have to sample the function in

a) Coordinates
b) Amplitude`
c) All of the mentioned
d) None of the mentioned
View Answer

Answer: c
Explanation: An image may be continuous in the x- and y-coordinates or in amplitude, or in
both.
93. For a continuous image f(x, y), how could be Sampling defined?
a) Digitizing the coordinate values
b) Digitizing the amplitude values
c) All of the mentioned
d) None of the mentioned
View Answer

Answer: a
Explanation: Sampling is the method of digitizing the coordinate values of the image.

94. For a continuous image f(x, y), Quantization is defined as

a) Digitizing the coordinate values
b) Digitizing the amplitude values
c) All of the mentioned
d) None of the mentioned
View Answer

Answer: b
Explanation: Sampling is the method of digitizing the amplitude values of the image.

95. Validate the statement:

“For a given image in one-dimension given by function f(x, y), to sample the function we take
equally spaced samples, superimposed on the function, along a horizontal line. However, the
sample values still span (vertically) a continuous range of gray-level values. So, to convert the
given function into a digital function, the gray-level values must be divided into various discrete
levels.”
a) True
b) False
View Answer

Answer: a
Explanation: Digital function requires both sampling and quantization of the one-dimensional
image function.

96. How is sampling been done when an image is generated by a single sensing element
combined with mechanical motion?
a) The number of sensors in the strip defines the sampling limitations in one direction and
Mechanical motion in the other direction.
b) The number of sensors in the sensing array establishes the limits of sampling in both
directions.
c) The number of mechanical increments when the sensor is activated to collect data.
d) None of the mentioned.
View Answer

Answer: c
Explanation: When an image is generated by a single sensing element along with mechanical
motion, the output data is quantized by dividing the gray-level scale into many discrete levels.
However, sampling is done by selecting the number of individual mechanical increments
recorded at which we activate the sensor to collect data.

97. How does sampling gets accomplished with a sensing strip being used for image acquisition?
a) The number of sensors in the strip establishes the sampling limitations in one image direction
and Mechanical motion in the other direction
b) The number of sensors in the sensing array establishes the limits of sampling in both
directions
c) The number of mechanical increments when the sensor is activated to collect data
d) None of the mentioned
View Answer

Answer: a
Explanation: When a sensing strip is used the number of sensors in the strip defines the sampling
limitations in one direction and mechanical motion in the other direction.

98. How is sampling accomplished when a sensing array is used for image acquisition?
a) The number of sensors in the strip establishes the sampling limitations in one image direction
and Mechanical motion in the other direction
b) The number of sensors in the sensing array defines the limits of sampling in both directions
c) The number of mechanical increments at which we activate the sensor to collect data
d) None of the mentioned
View Answer

Answer: b
Explanation: When we use sensing array for image acquisition, there is no motion and so, only
the number of sensors in the array defines the limits of sampling in both directions and the output
of the sensor is quantized by dividing the gray-level scale into many discrete levels.

99. The quality of a digital image is well determined by

a) The number of samples
b) The discrete gray levels
c) All of the mentioned
d) None of the mentioned
View Answer

Answer: c
Explanation: The quality of a digital image is determined mostly by the number of samples and
discrete gray levels used in sampling and quantization.

100. Assume that an image f(x, y) is sampled so that the result has M rows and N columns. If the
values of the coordinates at the origin are (x, y) = (0, 0), then the notation (0, 1) is used to signify
:
a) Second sample along first row
b) First sample along second row
c) First sample along first row
d) Second sample along second row
View Answer

Answer: a
Explanation: The values of the coordinates at the origin are (x, y) = (0, 0). Then, the next
coordinate values (second sample) along the first row of the image are represented as (x, y) = (0,
1).

101. The resulting image of sampling and quantization is considered a matrix of real numbers.
By what name(s) the element of this matrix array is called
a) Image element or Picture element
b) Pixel or Pel
c) All of the mentioned
d) None of the mentioned
View Answer

Answer: c
Explanation: Sampling and Quantization of an image f(x, y) forms a matrix of real numbers and
each element of this matrix array is commonly known as Image element or Picture element or
Pixel or Pel.

102. Let Z be the set of real integers and R the set of real numbers. The sampling process may be
viewed as partitioning the x-y plane into a grid, with the central coordinates of each grid being
from the Cartesian product Z2, that is a set of all ordered pairs (zi, zj), with zi and zj being
integers from Z. Then, f(x, y) is said a digital image if:
a) (x, y) are integers from Z2 and f is a function that assigns a gray-level value (from Z) to each
distinct pair of coordinates (x, y)
b) (x, y) are integers from R2 and f is a function that assigns a gray-level value (from R) to each
distinct pair of coordinates (x, y)
c) (x, y) are integers from R2 and f is a function that assigns a gray-level value (from Z) to each
distinct pair of coordinates (x, y)
d) (x, y) are integers from Z2 and f is a function that assigns a gray-level value (from R) to each
distinct pair of coordinates (x, y)
View Answer

Answer: d
Explanation: In the given condition, f(x, y) is a digital image if (x, y) are integers from Z2 and f a
function that assigns a gray-level value (that is, a real number from the set R) to each distinct
coordinate pair (x, y).

103. Let Z be the set of real integers and R the set of real numbers. The sampling process may be
viewed as partitioning the x-y plane into a grid, with the central coordinates of each grid being
from the Cartesian product Z2, that is a set of all ordered pairs (zi, zj), with zi and zj being
integers from Z. Then, f(x, y) is a digital image if (x, y) are integers from Z2 and f is a function
that assigns a gray-level value (that is, a real number from the set R) to each distinct coordinate
pair (x, y). What happens to the digital image if the gray levels also are integers?
a) The Digital image then becomes a 2-D function whose coordinates and amplitude values are
integers
b) The Digital image then becomes a 1-D function whose coordinates and amplitude values are
integers
c) The gray level can never be integer
d) None of the mentioned
View Answer

Answer: a
Explanation: In Quantization Process if the gray levels also are integers the Digital image then
becomes a 2-D function whose coordinates and amplitude values are integers.

104. The digitization process i.e. the digital image has M rows and N columns, requires decisions
about values for M, N, and for the number, L, of gray levels allowed for each pixel. The value M
and N have to be:
a) M and N have to be positive integer
b) M and N have to be negative integer
c) M have to be negative and N have to be positive integer
d) M have to be positive and N have to be negative integer
View Answer

Answer: a
Explanation: The digitization process i.e. the digital image has M rows and N columns, requires
decisions about values for M, N, and for the number, L, of max gray level. There are no
requirements on M and N, other than that M and N have to be positive integer.

105. The digitization process i.e. the digital image has M rows and N columns, requires decisions
about values for M, N, and for the number, L, of max gray levels. There are no requirements on
M and N, other than that M and N have to be positive integer. However, the number of gray
levels typically is
a) An integer power of 2 i.e. L = 2k
b) A Real power of 2 i.e. L = 2k
c) Two times the integer value i.e. L = 2k
d) None of the mentioned
View Answer

Answer: a
Explanation: Due to processing, storage, and considering the sampling hardware, the number of
gray levels typically is an integer power of 2 i.e. L = 2k.

106. The digitization process i.e. the digital image has M rows and N columns, requires decisions
about values for M, N, and for the number, L, of max gray levels is an integer power of 2 i.e. L =
2k, allowed for each pixel. If we assume that the discrete levels are equally spaced and that they
are integers then they are in the interval and Sometimes the range of values spanned
by the gray scale is called the of an image.
a) [0, L – 1] and static range respectively
b) [0, L / 2] and dynamic range respectively
c) [0, L / 2] and static range respectively
d) [0, L – 1] and dynamic range respectively
View Answer

Answer: d
Explanation: In digitization process M rows and N columns have to be positive and for the
number, L, of discrete gray levels typically an integer power of 2 for each pixel. If we assume
that the discrete levels are equally spaced and that they are integers then they lie in the interval
[0, L-1] and Sometimes the range of values spanned by the gray scale is called the dynamic
range of an image.

107. After digitization process a digital image with M rows and N columns have to be positive
and for the number, L, max gray levels i.e. an integer power of 2 for each pixel. Then, the
number b, of bits required to store a digitized image is:
a) b=M*N*k
b) b=M*N*L
c) b=M*L*k
d) b=L*N*k
View Answer

Answer: a
Explanation: In digital image of M rows and N columns and L max gray levels an integer power
of 2 for each pixel. The number, b, of bits required to store a digitized image is: b=M*N*k.

108. An image whose gray-levels span a significant portion of gray scale have
dynamic range while an image with dull, washed out gray look have dynamic range.
a) Low and High respectively
b) High and Low respectively
c) Both have High dynamic range, irrespective of gray levels span significance on gray scale
d) Both have Low dynamic range, irrespective of gray levels span significance on gray scale
View Answer

Answer: b
Explanation: An image whose gray-levels signifies a large portion of gray scale have High
dynamic range, while that with dull, washed out gray look have Low dynamic range.

109. Validate the statement “When in an Image an appreciable number of pixels exhibit high
dynamic range, the image will have high contrast.”
a) True
b) False
View Answer
Answer: a
Explanation: In an Image if an appreciable number of pixels exhibit high dynamic range
property, the image will have high contrast.

110. In digital image of M rows and N columns and L discrete gray levels, calculate the bits
required to store a digitized image for M=N=32 and L=16.
a) 16384
b) 4096
c) 8192
d) 512
View Answer

Answer: b
Explanation: In digital image of M rows and N columns and L max gray levels i.e. an integer
power of 2 for each pixel. The number, b, of bits required to store a digitized image is:
b=M*N*k.
For L=16, k=4.
i.e. b=4096.

Light and the Electromagnetic Spectrum

This set of Digital Image Processing Multiple Choice Questions & Answers (MCQs) focuses on
“Light and the Electromagnetic Spectrum”.

111. Of the following, has the maximum frequency.

a) UV Rays
b) Gamma Rays
c) Microwaves
d) Radio Waves
View Answer

Answer: b
Explanation: Gamma Rays come first in the electromagnetic spectrum sorted in the decreasing
order of frequency.

112. In the Visible spectrum the colour has the maximum wavelength.
a) Violet
b) Blue
c) Red
d) Yellow
View Answer
Answer: c
Explanation: Red is towards the right in the electromagnetic spectrum sorted in the increasing
order of wavelength.

113. Wavelength and frequency are related as : (c = speed of light)

a) c = wavelength / frequency
b) frequency = wavelength / c
c) wavelength = c * frequency
d) c = wavelength * frequency
View Answer

Answer: d
Explanation: It is usually written as wavelength = c / frequency.

114. Electromagnetic waves can be visualised as a

a) sine wave
b) cosine wave
c) tangential wave
d) None of the mentioned
View Answer

Answer: a
Explanation: Electromagnetic waves are visualised as sinusoidal wave.

115. How is radiance measured?

a) lumens
b) watts
c) armstrong
d) hertz
View Answer

Answer: b
Explanation: Radiance is the total amount of energy that flows from the light source and is
measured in Watts.

116. Which of the following is used for chest and dental scans?
a) Hard X-Rays
b) Soft X-Rays
c) Radio waves
d) Infrared Rays
View Answer

Answer: b
Explanation: Soft X-Rays (low energy) are used for dental and chest scans.
117. Which of the following is impractical to measure?
a) Frequency
b) Radiance
c) Luminance
d) Brightness
View Answer

Answer: d
Explanation: Brightness is subjective descriptor of light perception that is impossible to measure.

118. Massless particle containing a certain amount of energy is called

a) Photon
b) Shell
c) Electron
d) None of the mentioned
View Answer

Answer: a
Explanation: Each bundle of massless energy is called a Photon.

119. What do you mean by achromatic light?

a) Chromatic light
b) Monochromatic light
c) Infrared light
d) Invisible light
View Answer

Answer: b
Explanation: Achromatic light is also called monochromatic light.(Light void of color)

120. Which of the following embodies the achromatic notion of intensity?

a) Luminance
b) Brightness
c) Frequency
d) Radiance
View Answer

Answer: b
Explanation: Brightness embodies the achromatic notion of intensity and is a key factor in
describing color sensation.
Mathematical Tools in Digital Image
Processing
This set of Digital Image Processing Multiple Choice Questions & Answers (MCQs) focuses on
” Mathematical Tools in Digital Image Processing”.

121. How is array operation carried out involving one or more images?
a) array by array
b) pixel by pixel
c) column by column
d) row by row
View Answer

Answer: b
Explanation: Any array operation is carried out on a pixel by pixel basis.

122. The property indicating that the output of a linear operation due to the sum of two inputs is
same as performing the operation on the inputs individually and then summing the results is
called
a) additivity
b) heterogeneity
c) homogeneity
d) None of the Mentioned
View Answer

Answer: a
Explanation: This property is called additivity .

123. The property indicating that the output of a linear operation to a constant times as input is
the same as the output of operation due to original input multiplied by that constant is called

a) additivity
b) heterogeneity
c) homogeneity
d) None of the Mentioned
View Answer

Answer: c
Explanation: This property is called homogeneity .

124. Enhancement of differences between images is based on the principle of

a) Additivity
b) Homogeneity
c) Subtraction
d) None of the Mentioned
View Answer

Answer: c
Explanation: A frequent application of image subtraction is in the enhancement of differences
between images .

125. A commercial use of Image Subtraction is

a) Mask mode radiography
b) MRI scan
c) CT scan
d) None of the Mentioned
View Answer

Answer: a
Explanation: Mask mode radiography is an important medical imaging area based on Image
Subtraction.

126. Region of Interest (ROI) operations is commonly called as

a) Shading correction
b) Masking
c) Dilation
d) None of the Mentioned
View Answer

Answer: b
Explanation: A common use of image multiplication is Masking, also called ROI operation.

127. If every element of a set A is also an element of a set B, then A is said to be a of

set B.
a) Disjoint set
b) Union
c) Subset
d) Complement set
View Answer

Answer: c
Explanation: A is called the subset of B.

128. Consider two regions A and B composed of foreground pixels. The of these two
sets is the set of elements belonging to set A or set B or both.
a) OR
b) AND
c) NOT
d) XOR
View Answer

Answer: a
Explanation: This is called an OR operation.

129. Imaging systems having physical artefacts embedded in the imaging sensors produce a set
of points called
a) Tie Points
b) Control Points
c) Reseau Marks
d) None of the Mentioned
View Answer

Answer: c
Explanation: These points are called “known” points or “Reseau marks”.

130. Image processing approaches operating directly on pixels of input image work directly in

a) Transform domain
b) Spatial domain
c) Inverse transformation
d) None of the Mentioned
View Answer

Answer: b
Explanation: Operations directly on pixels of input image work directly in Spatial Domain.

Digital Image Processing Questions And

Answers – Smoothing Spatial Filters
This set of Digital Image Processing Multiple Choice Questions & Answers (MCQs) focuses on
“Smoothing Spatial Filters”.

131. Noise reduction is obtained by blurring the image using smoothing filter.
a) True
b) False
View Answer

Answer: a
Explanation: Noise reduction is obtained by blurring the image using smoothing filter. Blurring
is used in pre-processing steps, such as removal of small details from an image prior to object
extraction and, bridging of small gaps in lines or curves.

132. What is the output of a smoothing, linear spatial filter?

a) Median of pixels
b) Maximum of pixels
c) Minimum of pixels
d) Average of pixels
View Answer

Answer: d
Explanation: The output or response of a smoothing, linear spatial filter is simply the average of
the pixels contained in the neighbourhood of the filter mask.

133. Smoothing linear filter is also known as median filter.

a) True
b) False
View Answer

Answer: b
Explanation: Since the smoothing spatial filter performs the average of the pixels, it is also called
as averaging filter.

134. Which of the following in an image can be removed by using smoothing filter?
a) Smooth transitions of gray levels
b) Smooth transitions of brightness levels
c) Sharp transitions of gray levels
d) Sharp transitions of brightness levels
View Answer

Answer: c
Explanation: Smoothing filter replaces the value of every pixel in an image by the average value
of the gray levels. So, this helps in removing the sharp transitions in the gray levels between the
pixels. This is done because, random noise typically consists of sharp transitions in gray levels.

135. Which of the following is the disadvantage of using smoothing filter?

a) Blur edges
b) Blur inner pixels
c) Remove sharp transitions
d) Sharp edges
View Answer

Answer: a
Explanation: Edges, which almost always are desirable features of an image, also are
characterized by sharp transitions in gray level. So, averaging filters have an undesirable side
effect that they blur these edges.
136. Smoothing spatial filters doesn‟ t smooth the false contours.
a) True
b) False
View Answer

Answer: b
Explanation: One of the application of smoothing spatial filters is that, they help in smoothing
the false contours that result from using an insufficient number of gray levels.

137. The mask shown in the figure below belongs to which type of filter?

a) Sharpening spatial filter

b) Median filter
c) Sharpening frequency filter
d) Smoothing spatial filter
View Answer

Answer: d
Explanation: This is a smoothing spatial filter. This mask yields a so called weighted average,
which means that different pixels are multiplied with different coefficient values. This helps in
giving much importance to the some pixels at the expense of others.

138. The mask shown in the figure below belongs to which type of filter?

a) Sharpening spatial filter

b) Median filter
c) Smoothing spatial filter
d) Sharpening frequency filter
View Answer

Answer: c
Explanation: The mask shown in the figure represents a 3×3 smoothing filter. Use of this filter
yields the standard average of the pixels under the mask.
139. Box filter is a type of smoothing filter.
a) True
b) False
View Answer

Answer: a
Explanation: A spatial averaging filter or spatial smoothening filter in which all the coefficients
are equal is also called as box filter.

140. If the size of the averaging filter used to smooth the original image to first image is 9, then
what would be the size of the averaging filter used in smoothing the same original picture to
second in second image?

a) 3
b) 5
c) 9
d) 15
View Answer

Answer: d
Explanation: We know that, as the size of the filter used in smoothening the original image that
is averaging filter increases then the blurring of the image. Since the second image is more
blurred than the first image, the window size should be more than 9.

141. Which of the following comes under the application of image blurring?
a) Object detection
b) Gross representation
c) Object motion
d) Image segmentation
View Answer

Answer: b
Explanation: An important application of spatial averaging is to blur an image for the purpose of
getting a gross representation of interested objects, such that the intensity of the small objects
blends with the background and large objects become easy to detect.c

142. Which of the following filters response is based on ranking of pixels?

a) Nonlinear smoothing filters
b) Linear smoothing filters
c) Sharpening filters
d) Geometric mean filter
View Answer

Answer: a
Explanation: Order static filters are nonlinear smoothing spatial filters whose response is based
on the ordering or ranking the pixels contained in the image area encompassed by the filter, and
then replacing the value of the central pixel with the value determined by the ranking result.
advertisement

143. Median filter belongs to which category of filters?

a) Linear spatial filter
b) Frequency domain filter
c) Order static filter
d) Sharpening filter
View Answer

Answer: c
Explanation: The median filter belongs to order static filters, which, as the name implies,
replaces the value of the pixel by the median of the gray levels that are present in the
neighbourhood of the pixels.

144. Median filters are effective in the presence of impulse noise.

a) True
b) False
View Answer

Answer: a
Explanation: Median filters are used to remove impulse noises, also called as salt-and-pepper
noise because of its appearance as white and black dots in the image.

145. What is the maximum area of the cluster that can be eliminated by using an n×n median
filter?
a) n2
b) n2/2
c) 2*n2
d) n
View Answer

Answer: b
Explanation: Isolated clusters of pixels that are light or dark with respect to their neighbours, and
whose area is less than n2/2, i.e., half the area of the filter, can be eliminated by using an n×n
median filter.
Digital Image Processing Questions And
Answers – Basic Intensity Transformation
Functions
This set of Digital Image Processing Interview Questions and Answers focuses on “Basic
Intensity Transformation Functions”.

146. Which of the following expression is used to denote spatial domain process?
a) g(x,y)=T[f(x,y)]
b) f(x+y)=T[g(x+y)]
c) g(xy)=T[f(xy)]
d) g(x-y)=T[f(x-y)]
View Answer

Answer: a
Explanation: Spatial domain processes will be denoted by the expression g(x,y)=T[f(x,y)], where
f(x,y) is the input image, g(x,y) is the processed image, and T is an operator on f, defined over
some neighborhood of (x, y). In addition, T can operate on a set of input images, such as
performing the pixel-by-pixel sum of K images for noise reduction.

147. Which of the following shows three basic types of functions used frequently for image
enhancement?
a) Linear, logarithmic and inverse law
b) Power law, logarithmic and inverse law
c) Linear, logarithmic and power law
d) Linear, exponential and inverse law
View Answer

Answer: b
Explanation: In introduction to gray-level transformations, which shows three basic types of
functions used frequently for image enhancement: linear (negative and identity transformations),
logarithmic (log and inverse-log transformations), and power-law (nth power and nth root
transformations).The identity function is the trivial case in which output intensities are identical
to input intensities. It is included in the graph only for completeness.

148. Which expression is obtained by performing the negative transformation on the negative of
an image with gray levels in the range[0,L-1] ?
a) s=L+1-r
b) s=L+1+r
c) s=L-1-r
d) s=L-1+r
View Answer

Answer: c
Explanation: The negative of an image with gray levels in the range[0,L-1] is obtained by using
the negative transformation, which is given by the expression: s=L-1-r.

149. What is the general form of representation of log transformation?

a) s=clog10(1/r)
b) s=clog10(1+r)
c) s=clog10(1*r)
d) s=clog10(1-r)
View Answer

Answer: b
Explanation: The general form of the log transformation: s=clog10(1+r), where c is a constant,
and it is assumed that r ≥ 0.

150. What is the general form of representation of power transformation?

a) s=crγ
b) c=srγ
c) s=rc
d) s=rcγ
View Answer

Answer: a
Explanation: Power-law transformations have the basic form: s=crγ where c and g are positive
constants. Sometimes s=crγ is written as s=c.(r+ε)γ to account for an offset (that is, a measurable
output when the input is zero).

151. What is the name of process used to correct the power-law response phenomena?
a) Beta correction
b) Alpha correction
c) Gamma correction
d) Pie correction
View Answer

Answer: c
Explanation: A variety of devices used for image capture, printing, and display respond
according to a power law. By convention, the exponent in the power-law equation is referred to
as gamma .The process used to correct these power-law response phenomena is called gamma
correction.

152. Which of the following transformation function requires much information to be specified
at the time of input?
a) Log transformation
b) Power transformation
c) Piece-wise transformation
d) Linear transformation
View Answer

Answer: c
Explanation: The practical implementation of some important transformations can be formulated
only as piecewise functions. The principal disadvantage of piecewise functions is that their
specification requires considerably more user input.

153. In contrast stretching, if r1=s1 and r2=s2 then which of the following is true?
a) The transformation is not a linear function that produces no changes in gray levels
b) The transformation is a linear function that produces no changes in gray levels
c) The transformation is a linear function that produces changes in gray levels
d) The transformation is not a linear function that produces changes in gray levels
View Answer

Answer: b
Explanation: The locations of points (r1,s1) and (r2,s2) control the shape of the transformation
function. If r1=s1 and r2=s2 then the transformation is a linear function that produces no changes
in gray levels.

154. In contrast stretching, if r1=r2, s1=0 and s2=L-1 then which of the following is true?
a) The transformation becomes a thresholding function that creates an octal image
b) The transformation becomes a override function that creates an octal image
c) The transformation becomes a thresholding function that creates a binary image
d) The transformation becomes a thresholding function that do not create an octal image
View Answer

Answer: c
Explanation: If r1=r2, s1=0 and s2=L-1,the transformation becomes a thresholding function that
creates a binary image.

155. In contrast stretching, if r1≤r2 and s1≤s2 then which of the following is true?
a) The transformation function is double valued and exponentially increasing
b) The transformation function is double valued and monotonically increasing
c) The transformation function is single valued and exponentially increasing
d) The transformation function is single valued and monotonically increasing
View Answer

Answer: d
Explanation: The locations of points (r1,s1) and (r2,s2) control the shape of the transformation
function. If r1≤r2 and s1≤s2 then the function is single valued and monotonically increasing.
advertisement
156. In which type of slicing, highlighting a specific range of gray levels in an image often is
desired?
a) Gray-level slicing
b) Bit-plane slicing
c) Contrast stretching
d) Byte-level slicing
View Answer

Answer: a
Explanation: Highlighting a specific range of gray levels in an image often is desired in gray-
level slicing. Applications include enhancing features such as masses of water in satellite
imagery and enhancing flaws in X-ray images.

157. Which of the following depicts the main functionality of the Bit-plane slicing?
a) Highlighting a specific range of gray levels in an image
b) Highlighting the contribution made to total image appearance by specific bits
c) Highlighting the contribution made to total image appearance by specific byte
d) Highlighting the contribution made to total image appearance by specific pixels
View Answer

Answer: b
Explanation: Instead of highlighting gray-level ranges, highlighting the contribution made to
total image appearance by specific bits might be desired. Suppose , each pixel in an image is
represented by 8 bits. Imagine that the image is composed of eight 1-bit planes, ranging from bit-
plane 0 for the least significant bit to bit-plane 7 for the most significant bit. In terms of 8-bit
bytes, plane 0 contains all the lowest order bits in the bytes comprising the pixels in the image
and plane 7 contains all the high-order bits.

Digital Image Processing Questions And

Answers – Sharpening Spatial Filters
This set of Digital Image Processing Multiple Choice Questions & Answers (MCQs) focuses on
“Sharpening Spatial Filters”.

158. Which of the following is the primary objective of sharpening of an image?

a) Blurring the image
b) Highlight fine details in the image
c) Increase the brightness of the image
d) Decrease the brightness of the image
View Answer
Answer: b
Explanation: The sharpening of image helps in highlighting the fine details that are present in the
image or to enhance the details that are blurred due to some reason like adding noise.

159. Image sharpening process is used in electronic printing.

a) True
b) False
View Answer

Answer: a
Explanation: The applications of image sharpening is present in various fields like electronic
printing, autonomous guidance in military systems, medical imaging and industrial inspection.

160. In spatial domain, which of the following operation is done on the pixels in sharpening the
image?
a) Integration
b) Average
c) Median
d) Differentiation
View Answer

Answer: d
Explanation: We know that, in blurring the image, we perform the average of pixels which can
be considered as integration. As sharpening is the opposite process of blurring, logically we can
tell that we perform differentiation on the pixels to sharpen the image.

161. Image differentiation enhances the edges, discontinuities and deemphasizes the pixels with
slow varying gray levels.
a) True
b) False
View Answer

Answer: a
Explanation: Fundamentally, the strength of the response of the derivative operative is
proportional to the degree of discontinuity in the image. So, we can state that image
differentiation enhances the edges, discontinuities and deemphasizes the pixels with slow
varying gray levels.

162. In which of the following cases, we wouldn‟ t worry about the behaviour of
sharpening filter?
a) Flat segments
b) Step discontinuities
c) Ramp discontinuities
d) Slow varying gray values
View Answer
Answer: d
Explanation: We are interested in the behaviour of derivatives used in sharpening in the constant
gray level areas i.e., flat segments, and at the onset and end of discontinuities, i.e., step and ramp
discontinuities.

163. Which of the following is the valid response when we apply a first derivative?
a) Non-zero at flat segments
b) Zero at the onset of gray level step
c) Zero in flat segments
d) Zero along ramps
View Answer

Answer: c
Explanation: The derivations of digital functions are defined in terms of differences. The
definition we use for first derivative should be zero in flat segments, nonzero at the onset of a
gray level step or ramp and nonzero along the ramps.

164. Which of the following is not a valid response when we apply a second derivative?
a) Zero response at onset of gray level step
b) Nonzero response at onset of gray level step
c) Zero response at flat segments
d) Nonzero response along the ramps
View Answer

Answer: b
Explanation: The derivations of digital functions are defined in terms of differences. The
definition we use for second derivative should be zero in flat segments, zero at the onset of a
gray level step or ramp and nonzero along the ramps.

165. If f(x,y) is an image function of two variables, then the first order derivative of a one
dimensional function, f(x) is:
a) f(x+1)-f(x)
b) f(x)-f(x+1)
c) f(x-1)-f(x+1)
d) f(x)+f(x-1)
View Answer

Answer: a
Explanation: The first order derivative of a single dimensional function f(x) is the difference
between f(x) and f(x+1).
That is, ∂f/∂x=f(x+1)-f(x).

166. Isolated point is also called as noise point.

a) True
b) False
View Answer
Answer: a
Explanation: The point which has very high or very low gray level value compared to its
neighbours, then that point is called as isolated point or noise point. The noise point of is of one
pixel size.

167. What is the thickness of the edges produced by first order derivatives when compared to
that of second order derivatives?
a) Finer
b) Equal
c) Thicker
d) Independent
View Answer

Answer: c
Explanation: We know that, the first order derivative is nonzero along the entire ramp while the
second order is zero along the ramp. So, we can conclude that the first order derivatives produce
thicker edges and the second order derivatives produce much finer edges.
advertisement

168. First order derivative can enhance the fine detail in the image compared to that of second
order derivative.
a) True
b) False
View Answer

Answer: b
Explanation: The response at and around the noise point is much stronger for the second order
derivative than for the first order derivative. So, we can state that the second order derivative is
better to enhance the fine details in the image including noise when compared to that of first
order derivative.

169. Which of the following derivatives produce a double response at step changes in gray level?
a) First order derivative
b) Third order derivative
c) Second order derivative
d) First and second order derivatives
View Answer

Answer: c
Explanation: Second order derivatives produce a double line response for the step changes in the
gray level. We also note of second-order derivatives that, for similar changes in gray-level values
in an image, their response is stronger to a line than to a step, and to a point than to a line.
Digital Image Processing Questions and
Answers – Sharpening Spatial Filters-2
This set of Digital Image Processing Questions and Answers for Freshers focuses on
“Sharpening Spatial Filters-2”.

168. The objective of sharpening spatial filters is/are to

a) Highlight fine detail in an image
b) Enhance detail that has been blurred because of some error
c) Enhance detail that has been blurred because of some natural effect of some method of image
acquisition
d) All of the mentioned
View Answer

Answer: d
Explanation: Highlighting the fine detail in an image or Enhancing detail that has been blurred
because of some error or some natural effect of some method of image acquisition, is the
principal objective of sharpening spatial filters.

169. Sharpening is analogous to which of the following operations?

a) To spatial integration
b) To spatial differentiation
c) All of the mentioned
d) None of the mentioned
View Answer

Answer: b
Explanation: Smoothing is analogous to integration and so, sharpening to spatial differentiation.

170. Which of the following fact(s) is/are true about sharpening spatial filters using digital
differentiation?
a) Sharpening spatial filter response is proportional to the discontinuity of the image at the point
where the derivative operation is applied
b) Sharpening spatial filters enhances edges and discontinuities like noise
c) Sharpening spatial filters deemphasizes areas that have slowly varying gray-level values
d) All of the mentioned
View Answer

Answer: d
Explanation: Derivative operator‟ s response is proportional to the discontinuity of the image at
the point where the derivative operation is applied.
Image differentiation enhances edges and discontinuities like noise and deemphasizes areas that
have slowly varying gray-level values.
Since a sharpening spatial filters are analogous to differentiation, so, all the above mentioned
facts are true for sharpening spatial filters.

171. Which of the facts(s) is/are true for the first order derivative of a digital function?
a) Must be nonzero in the areas of constant grey values
b) Must be zero at the onset of a gray-level step or ramp discontinuities
c) Must be nonzero along the gray-level ramps
d) None of the mentioned
View Answer

Answer: c
Explanation: The first order derivative of a digital function is defined as:
Must be zero in the areas of constant grey values.
Must be nonzero at the onset of a gray-level step or ramp discontinuities.
Must be nonzero along the gray-level ramps.

172. Which of the facts(s) is/are true for the second order derivative of a digital function?
a) Must be zero in the flat areas
b) Must be nonzero at the onset and end of a gray-level step or ramp discontinuities
c) Must be zero along the ramps of constant slope
d) All of the mentioned
View Answer

Answer: c
Explanation: The second order derivative of a digital function is defined as:
Must be zero in the flat areas i.e. areas of constant grey values.
Must be nonzero at the onset of a gray-level step or ramp discontinuities.
Must be zero along the gray-level ramps of constant slope.

173. The derivative of digital function is defined in terms of difference. Then, which of the
following defines the first order derivative ∂f/∂x= of a one-dimensional function
f(x)?
a) f(x+1)-f(x)
b) f(x+1)+ f(x-1)-2f(x)
c) All of the mentioned depending upon the time when partial derivative will be dealt along two
spatial axes
d) None of the mentioned
View Answer

Answer: a
Explanation: The definition of a first order derivative of a one dimensional image f(x) is:
∂f/∂x= f(x+1)-f(x), where the partial derivative is used to keep notation same even for f(x, y)
when partial derivative will be dealt along two spatial axes.
174. The derivative of digital function is defined in terms of difference. Then, which of the
following defines the second order derivative ∂2 f/∂x2 = of a one-dimensional
function f(x)?
a) f(x+1)-f(x)
b) f(x+1)+ f(x-1)-2f(x)
c) All of the mentioned depending upon the time when partial derivative will be dealt along two
spatial axes
d) None of the mentioned
View Answer

Answer: b
Explanation: The definition of a second order derivative of a one dimensional image f(x) is:
(∂2 f)/∂x2 =f(x+1)+ f(x-1)-2f(x), where the partial derivative is used to keep notation same even
for f(x, y) when partial derivative will be dealt along two spatial axes.

175. What kind of relation can be obtained between first order derivative and second order
derivative of an image having a on the basis of edge productions that shows a transition like a
ramp of constant slope?
a) First order derivative produces thick edge while second order produces a very fine edge
b) Second order derivative produces thick edge while first order produces a very fine edge
c) Both first and second order produces thick edge
d) Both first and second order produces a very fine edge
View Answer

Answer: a
Explanation: the first order derivative remains nonzero along the entire ramp of constant slope,
while the second order derivative remain nonzero only at onset and end of such ramps.
If an edge in an image shows transition like the ramp of constant slope, the first order and second
order derivative values shows the production of thick and finer edge respectively.

176. What kind of relation can be obtained between first order derivative and second order
derivative of an image on the response obtained by encountering an isolated noise point in the
image?
a) First order derivative has a stronger response than a second order
b) Second order derivative has a stronger response than a first order
c) Both enhances the same and so the response is same for both first and second order derivative
d) None of the mentioned
View Answer

Answer: b
Explanation: This is because a second order derivative is more aggressive toward enhancing
sharp changes than a first order.

178. What kind of relation can be obtained between the response of first order derivative and
second order derivative of an image having a transition into gray-level step from zero?
a) First order derivative has a stronger response than a second order
b) Second order derivative has a stronger response than a first order
c) Both first and second order derivative has the same response
d) None of the mentioned
View Answer

Answer: c
Explanation: This is because a first order derivative has stronger response to a gray-level step
than a second order, but, the response becomes same if transition into gray-level step is from
zero.
advertisement

179. If in an image there exist similar change in gray-level values in the image, which of the
following shows a stronger response using second order derivative operator for sharpening?
a) A line
b) A step
c) A point
d) None of the mentioned
View Answer

Answer: c
Explanation: second order derivative shows a stronger response to a line than a step and to a
point than a line, if there is similar changes in gray-level values in an image.

Digital Image Processing Questions and

Answers – Sharpening Spatial Filters – 3
This set of Digital Image Processing Multiple Choice Questions & Answers (MCQs) focuses on
“Sharpening Spatial Filters – 3”.

180. The principle objective of Sharpening, to highlight transitions is

a) Pixel density
b) Composure
c) Intensity
d) Brightness
View Answer

Answer: c
Explanation: The principle objective of Sharpening, to highlight transitions is Intensity.
181. How can Sharpening be achieved?
a) Pixel averaging
b) Slicing
c) Correlation
d) None of the mentioned
View Answer

Answer: d
Explanation: Sharpening is achieved using Spatial Differentiation.

182. What does Image Differentiation enhance?

a) Edges
b) Pixel Density
c) Contours
d) None of the mentioned
View Answer

Answer: a
Explanation: Image Differentiation enhances Edges and other discontinuities.

183. What does Image Differentiation de-emphasize?

a) Pixel Density
b) Contours
c) Areas with slowly varying intensities
d) None of the mentioned
View Answer

Answer: c
Explanation: Image Differentiation de-emphasizes areas with slowly varying intensities.

184. The requirements of the First Derivative of a digital function:

a) Must be zero in areas of constant intensity
b) Must be non-zero at the onset of an intensity step
c) Must be non-zero along ramps
d) All of the Mentioned
View Answer

Answer: d
Explanation: All the three conditions must be satisfied.

185. What is the Second Derivative of Image Sharpening called?

a) Gaussian
b) Laplacian
c) Canny
d) None of the mentioned
View Answer
Answer: b
Explanation: It is also called Laplacian.

186. The ability that rotating the image and applying the filter gives the same result, as applying
the filter to the image first, and then rotating it, is called
a) Isotropic filtering
b) Laplacian
c) Rotation Invariant
d) None of the mentioned
View Answer

Answer: c
Explanation: It is called Rotation Invariant, although the process used is Isotropic filtering.
advertisement

187. For a function f(x,y), the gradient of „f‟ at coordinates (x,y) is defined as a
a) 3-D row vector
b) 3-D column vector
c) 2-D row vector
d) 2-D column vector
View Answer

Answer: d
Explanation: The gradient is a 2-D column vector.

188. Where do you find frequent use of Gradient?

a) Industrial inspection
b) MRI Imaging
c) PET Scan
d) None of the mentioned
View Answer

Answer: a
Explanation: Gradient is used in Industrial inspection, to aid humans, in detection of defects.

189. Which of the following occurs in Unsharp Masking?

a) Blurring original image
b) Adding a mask to original image
c) Subtracting blurred image from original
d) All of the mentioned
View Answer

Answer: d
Explanation: In Unsharp Masking, all of the above occurs in the order: Blurring, Subtracting the
blurred image and then Adding the mask.
Digital Image Processing Questions and
Answers – Combining Spatial Enhancements
Methods
This set of Digital Image Processing Multiple Choice Questions & Answers (MCQs) focuses on
“Combining Spatial Enhancements Methods”.

190. Which of the following make an image difficult to enhance?

a) Narrow range of intensity levels
b) Dynamic range of intensity levels
c) High noise
d) All of the mentioned
View Answer

Answer: d
Explanation: All the mentioned options make it difficult to enhance an image.

191. Which of the following is a second-order derivative operator?

a) Histogram
b) Laplacian
c) Gaussian
d) None of the mentioned
View Answer

Answer: b
Explanation: Laplacian is a second-order derivative operator.

192. Response of the gradient to noise and fine detail is the Laplacian‟ s.
a) equal to
b) lower than
c) greater than
d) has no relation with
View Answer

Answer: b
Explanation: Response of the gradient to noise and fine detail is lower than the Laplacian‟ s and
can further be lowered by smoothing.

193. Dark characteristics in an image are better solved using

a) Laplacian Transform
b) Gaussian Transform
c) Histogram Specification
d) Power-law Transformation
View Answer

Answer: d
Explanation: It can be solved by Histogram Specification but it is better handled by Power-law
Transformation.

194. What is the smallest possible value of a gradient image?

a) e
b) 1
c) 0
d) -e
View Answer

Answer: c
Explanation: The smallest possible value of a gradient image is 0.

195. Which of the following fails to work on dark intensity distributions?

a) Laplacian Transform
b) Gaussian Transform
c) Histogram Equalization
d) Power-law Transformation
View Answer

Answer: c
Explanation: Histogram Equalization fails to work on dark intensity distributions.

196. is used to detect diseases such as bone infection and tumors.

a) MRI Scan
b) PET Scan
c) Nuclear Whole Body Scan
d) X-Ray
View Answer

Answer: c
Explanation: Nuclear Whole Body Scan is used to detect diseases such as bone infection and
tumors

197. How do you bring out more of the skeletal detail from a Nuclear Whole Body Bone Scan?
a) Sharpening
b) Enhancing
c) Transformation
d) None of the mentioned
View Answer
Answer: a
Explanation: Sharpening is used to bring out more of the skeletal detail.

198. An alternate approach to median filtering is

a) Use a mask
b) Gaussian filter
c) Sharpening
d) Laplacian filter
View Answer

Answer:a
Explanation: Using a mask, formed from the smoothed version of the gradient image, can be
used for median filtering.

199. Final step of enhancement lies in of the sharpened image.

a) Increase range of contrast
b) Increase range of brightness
c) Increase dynamic range
d) None of the mentioned
View Answer

Answer: c
Explanation: Increasing the dynamic range of the sharpened image is the final step in
enhancement.

Digital Image Processing Questions and

Answers – Fundamentals of Spatial Filtering
This set of Digital Image Processing Multiple Choice Questions & Answers (MCQs) focuses on
“Fundamentals of Spatial Filtering”.

200. What is accepting or rejecting certain frequency components called as?

a) Filtering
b) Eliminating
c) Slicing
d) None of the Mentioned
View Answer

Answer: a
Explanation: Filtering is the process of accepting or rejecting certain frequency components.
201. A filter that passes low frequencies is
a) Band pass filter
b) High pass filter
c) Low pass filter
d) None of the Mentioned
View Answer

Answer: c
Explanation: Low pass filter passes low frequencies.

202. What is the process of moving a filter mask over the image and computing the sum of
products at each location called as?
a) Convolution
b) Correlation
c) Linear spatial filtering
d) Non linear spatial filtering
View Answer

Answer: b
Explanation: The process is called as Correlation.

203. The standard deviation controls of the bell (2-D Gaussian function of bell
shape).
a) Size
b) Curve
c) Tightness
d) None of the Mentioned
View Answer

Answer: c
Explanation: The standard deviation controls “tightness” of the bell.

204. What is required to generate an M X N linear spatial filter?

a) MN mask coefficients
b) M+N coordinates
c) MN spatial coefficients
d) None of the Mentioned
View Answer

Answer: a
Explanation: To generate an M X N linear spatial filter MN mask coefficients must be specified.

205. What is the difference between Convolution and Correlation?

a) Image is pre-rotated by 180 degree for Correlation
b) Image is pre-rotated by 180 degree for Convolution
c) Image is pre-rotated by 90 degree for Correlation
d) Image is pre-rotated by 90 degree for Convolution
View Answer

Answer: b
Explanation: Convolution is the same as Correlation except that the image must be rotated by
180 degrees initially.

206. Convolution and Correlation are functions of

a) Distance
b) Time
c) Intensity
d) Displacement
View Answer

Answer: d
Explanation: Convolution and Correlation are functions of displacement.

207. The function that contains a single 1 with the rest being 0s is called
a) Identity function
b) Inverse function
c) Discrete unit impulse
d) None of the Mentioned
View Answer

Answer: c
Explanation: It is called Discrete unit impulse.

208. Which of the following involves Correlation?

a) Matching
b) Key-points
c) Blobs
d) None of the Mentioned.
View Answer

Answer: a
Explanation: Correlation is applied in finding matches.

209. An example of a continuous function of two variables is

b) Intensity function
c) Contrast stretching
d) Gaussian function
View Answer

Answer: d
Explanation: Gaussian function has two variables and is an exponential continuous function.
Digital Image Processing Questions And
Answers – Histogram Processing – 2
This set of Digital Image Processing Interview Questions and Answers for freshers focuses on
“Histogram Processing – 2”.

210. The histogram of a digital image with gray levels in the range [0, L-1] is represented by a
discrete function:
a) h(r_k)=n_k
b) h(r_k )=n/n_k
c) p(r_k )=n_k
d) h(r_k )=n_k/n
View Answer

Answer: a
Explanation: The histogram of a digital image with gray levels in the range [0, L-1] is a discrete
function h(rk )=nk, where rk is the kth gray level and nkis the number of pixels in the image
having gray level rk.

211. How is the expression represented for the normalized histogram?

a) p(r_k )=n_k
b) p(r_k )=n_k/n
c) p(r_k)=nn_k
d) p(r_k )=n/n_k
View Answer

Answer: b
Explanation: It is common practice to normalize a histogram by dividing each of its values by the
total number of pixels in the image, denoted by n. Thus, a normalized histogram is given by p(rk
)=nk/n, for k=0,1,2…..L-1. Loosely speaking, p(rk ) gives an estimate of the probability of
occurrence of gray-level rk. Note that the sum of all components of a normalized histogram is
equal to 1.

212. Which of the following conditions does the T(r) must satisfy?
a) T(r) is double-valued and monotonically decreasing in the interval 0≤r≤1; and
0≤T(r)≤1 for 0≤r≤1
b) T(r) is double-valued and monotonically increasing in the interval 0≤r≤1; and
0≤T(r)≤1 for 0≤r≤1
c) T(r) is single-valued and monotonically decreasing in the interval 0≤r≤1; and
0≤T(r)≤1 for 0≤r≤1
d) T(r) is single-valued and monotonically increasing in the interval 0≤r≤1; and
0≤T(r)≤1 for 0≤r≤1
View Answer

Answer: d
Explanation: For any r satisfying the aforementioned conditions, we focus attention on
transformations of the form
s=T(r) For 0≤r≤1
That produces a level s for every pixel value r in the original image.
For reasons that will become obvious shortly, we assume that the transformation function T(r)
satisfies the following conditions:
T(r) is single-valued and monotonically increasing in the interval 0≤r≤1; and
0≤T(r)≤1 for 0≤r≤1.

213. The inverse transformation from s back to r is denoted as:

a) s=T-1(r) for 0≤s≤1
b) r=T-1(s) for 0≤r≤1
c) r=T-1(s) for 0≤s≤1
d) r=T-1(s) for 0≥s≥1
View Answer

Answer: c
Explanation: The inverse transformation from s back to r is denoted by:
r=T-1(s) for 0≤s≤1.

214. The probability density function p_s (s) of the transformed variable s can be obtained by
using which of the following formula?
a) p_s (s)=p_r (r)|dr/ds|
b) p_s (s)=p_r (r)|ds/dr|
c) p_r (r)=p_s (s)|dr/ds|
d) p_s (s)=p_r (r)|dr/dr|
View Answer

Answer: a
Explanation: The probability density function p_s (s) of the transformed variable s can be
obtained using a basic formula: p_s (s)=p_r (r)|dr/ds|
Thus, the probability density function of the transformed variable, s, is determined by the gray-
level PDF of the input image and by the chosen transformation function.

215. A transformation function of particular importance in image processing is represented in

which of the following form?
a) s=T(r)=∫0 (2r)pr (ω)dω
b) s=T(r)=∫0 (r-1)pr (ω)dω
c) s=T(r)=∫0 (r/2)pr (ω)dω
d) s=T(r)=∫0 pr (ω)dω
View Answer
Answer: d
Explanation: A transformation function of particular importance in image processing has the
form: s=T(r)=∫0 r pr(ω)dw, where ω is a dummy variable of integration. The right side of is
recognized as the cumulative distribution function (CDF) of random variable r.

216. Histogram equalization or Histogram linearization is represented by of the following

equation:
a) sk =∑k j =1 nj/n k=0,1,2,……,L-1
b) sk =∑k j =0 nj/n k=0,1,2,……,L-1
c) sk =∑k j =0 n/nj k=0,1,2,……,L-1
d) sk =∑k j =n nj/n k=0,1,2,……,L-1
View Answer

Answer: b
Explanation: A plot of pk_ (rk) versus r_k is called a histogram .The transformation (mapping)
given in sk =∑k j =0)k nj/n k=0,1,2,……,L-1 is called histogram equalization or histogram
linearization.

217. What is the method that is used to generate a processed image that have a specified
histogram?
a) Histogram linearization
b) Histogram equalization
c) Histogram matching
d) Histogram processing
View Answer

Answer: c
Explanation: In particular, it is useful sometimes to be able to specify the shape of the histogram
that we wish the processed image to have. The method used to generate a processed image that
has a specified histogram is called histogram matching or histogram specification.

218. Histograms are the basis for numerous spatial domain processing techniques.
a) True
b) False
View Answer

Answer: a
Explanation: Histograms are the basis for numerous spatial domain processing techniques.
Histogram manipulation can be used effectively for image enhancement.

219. In a dark image, the components of histogram are concentrated on which side of the grey
scale?
a) High
b) Medium
c) Low
d) Evenly distributed
View Answer

Answer: c
Explanation: We know that in the dark image, the components of histogram are concentrated
mostly on the low i.e., dark side of the grey scale. Similarly, the components of histogram of the
bright image are biased towards the high side of the grey scale.

Digital Image Processing Questions and

Answers – Histogram Processing – 1
This set of Digital Image Processing Multiple Choice Questions & Answers (MCQs) focuses on
“Histogram Processing –
1”.

220. What is the basis for numerous spatial domain processing techniques?
a) Transformations
b) Scaling
c) Histogram
d) None of the Mentioned
View Answer

Answer: c
Explanation: Histogram is the basis for numerous spatial domain processing techniques.

221. In image we notice that the components of histogram are concentrated on the low
side on intensity scale.
a) bright
b) dark
c) colourful
d) All of the Mentioned
View Answer

Answer: b
Explanation: Only in dark images, we notice that the components of histogram are concentrated
on the low side on intensity scale.

222. What is Histogram Equalisation also called as?

a) Histogram Matching
b) Image Enhancement
c) Histogram linearisation
d) None of the Mentioned
View Answer

Answer: c
Explanation: Histogram Linearisation is also known as Histogram Equalisation.

223. What is Histogram Matching also called as?

a) Histogram Equalisation
b) Histogram Specification
c) Histogram linearisation
d) None of the Mentioned
View Answer

Answer: b
Explanation: Histogram Specification is also known as Histogram Matching.

224. Histogram Equalisation is mainly used for

a) Image enhancement
b) Blurring
c) Contrast adjustment
d) None of the Mentioned
View Answer

Answer: a
Explanation: It is mainly used for Enhancement of usually dark images.

225. To reduce computation if one utilises non-overlapping regions, it usually produces

effect.
a) Dimming
b) Blurred
c) Blocky
d) None of the Mentioned
View Answer

Answer: c
Explanation: Utilising non-overlapping regions usually produces “Blocky” effect.

226. What does SEM stands for?

a) Scanning Electronic Machine
b) Self Electronic Machine
c) Scanning Electron Microscope
d) Scanning Electric Machine
View Answer

Answer: c
Explanation: SEM stands for Scanning Electron Microscope.
227. The type of Histogram Processing in which pixels are modified based on the intensity
distribution of the image is called .
a) Intensive
b) Local
c) Global
d) Random
View Answer

Answer: c
Explanation: It is called Global Histogram Processing.

228. Which type of Histogram Processing is suited for minute detailed enhancements?
a) Intensive
b) Local
c) Global
d) Random
View Answer

Answer: b
Explanation: Local Histogram Processing is used.

229. In uniform PDF, the expansion of PDF is

a) Portable Document Format
b) Post Derivation Function
c) Previously Derived Function
d) Probability Density Function
View Answer

Answer: d
Explanation: PDF stands for Probability Density Function.

Digital Image Processing Questions and

Answers – Smoothing Spacial Filters
This set of Digital Image Processing Multiple Choice Questions & Answers (MCQs) focuses on
“Smoothing Spacial Filters”.

230. The output of a smoothing, linear spatial filtering is a of the pixels contained
in the neighbourhood of the filter mask.
a) Sum
b) Product
c) Average
d) Dot Product
View Answer

Answer: c
Explanation: Smoothing is simply the average of the pixels contained in the neighbourhood.

231. Averaging filters is also known as filter.

a) Low pass
b) High pass
c) Band pass
d) None of the Mentioned
View Answer

Answer: a
Explanation: Averaging filters is also known as Low pass filters.

232. What is the undesirable side effects of Averaging filters?

a) No side effects
b) Blurred image
c) Blurred edges
d) Loss of sharp transitions
View Answer

Answer: c
Explanation: Blue edges is the undesirable side effect of Averaging filters.

233. A spatial averaging filter in which all coefficients are equal is called _ .
a) Square filter
b) Neighbourhood
c) Box filter
d) Zero filter
View Answer

Answer: c
Explanation: It is called a Box filter.

234. Which term is used to indicate that pixels are multiplied by different coefficients?
a) Weighted average
b) Squared average
c) Spatial average
d) None of the Mentioned
View Answer
Answer: a
Explanation: It is called weighted average since more importance(weight) is given to some
pixels.

235. The non linear spacial filters whose response is based on ordering of the pixels contained is
called .
a) Box filter
b) Square filter
c) Gaussian filter
d) Order-statistic filter
View Answer

Answer: d
Explanation: It is called Order-statistic filter.

236. Impulse noise in Order-statistic filter is also called as

a) Median noise
b) Bilinear noise
c) Salt and pepper noise
d) None of the Mentioned
View Answer

Answer: c
Explanation: It is called salt-and-pepper noise because of its appearance as white and black dots
superimposed on an image.

237. Best example for a Order-statistic filter is

a) Impulse filter
b) Averaging filter
c) Median filter
d) None of the Mentioned
View Answer

Answer: c
Explanation: Median filter is the best known Order-statistic filter.

238. What does “eliminated” refer to in median filter?

a) Force to average intensity of neighbours
b) Force to median intensity of neighbours
c) Eliminate median value of pixels
d) None of the Mentioned
View Answer

Answer: b
Explanation: It refers to forcing to median intensity of neighbours.
239. Which of the following is best suited for salt-and-pepper noise elimination?
a) Average filter
b) Box filter
c) Max filter
d) Median filter
View Answer

Answer: d
Explanation: Median filter is better suited than average filter for salt-and-pepper noise
elimination.

Digital Image Processing Questions and

Answers – Smoothing Linear Spatial Filters
This set of Digital Image Processing Questions and Answers for Aptitude test focuses on
“Smoothing Linear Spatial Filters”.

240. Smoothing filter is used for which of the following work(s)?

a) Blurring
b) Noise reduction
c) All of the mentioned
d) None of the mentioned
View Answer

Answer: c
Explanation: Smoothing filter is used for blurring and noise reduction.

241. The response of the smoothing linear spatial filter is/are

a) Sum of image pixel in the neighborhood filter mask
b) Difference of image in the neighborhood filter mask
c) Product of pixel in the neighborhood filter mask
d) Average of pixels in the neighborhood of filter mask
View Answer

Answer: d
Explanation: The average of pixels in the neighborhood of filter mask is simply the output of the
smoothing linear spatial filter.

242. Which of the following filter(s) results in a value as average of pixels in the neighborhood
of filter mask.
a) Smoothing linear spatial filter
b) Averaging filter
c) Lowpass filter
d) All of the mentioned
View Answer

Answer: d
Explanation: The output as an average of pixels in the neighborhood of filter mask is simply the
output of the smoothing linear spatial filter also known as averaging filter and lowpass filter.

243. What is/are the resultant image of a smoothing filter?

a) Image with high sharp transitions in gray levels
b) Image with reduced sharp transitions in gray levels
c) All of the mentioned
d) None of the mentioned
View Answer

Answer: b
Explanation: Random noise has sharp transitions in gray levels and smoothing filters does noise
reduction.

244. At which of the following scenarios averaging filters is/are used?

a) In the reduction of irrelevant details in an image
b) For smoothing of false contours
c) For noise reductions
d) All of the mentioned
View Answer

Answer: d
Explanation: Averaging filter or smoothing linear spatial filter is used: for noise reduction by
reducing the sharp transitions in gray level, for smoothing false contours that arises because of
use of insufficient number of gray values and for reduction of irrelevant data i.e. the pixels
regions that are small in comparison of filter mask.

245. A spatial averaging filter having all the coefficients equal is termed
a) A box filter
b) A weighted average filter
c) A standard average filter
d) A median filter
View Answer

Answer: a
Explanation: An averaging filter is termed as box filter if all the coefficients of spatial averaging
filter are equal.

246. What does using a mask having central coefficient maximum and then the coefficients
reducing as a function of increasing distance from origin results?
a) It results in increasing blurring in smoothing process
b) It results to reduce blurring in smoothing process
c) Nothing with blurring occurs as mask coefficient relation has no effect on smoothing process
d) None of the mentioned
View Answer

Answer: a
Explanation: Use of a mask having central coefficient maximum and then the coefficients
reducing as a function of increasing distance from origin is a strategy to reduce blurring in
smoothing process.
advertisement

247. What is the relation between blurring effect with change in filter size?
a) Blurring increases with decrease of the size of filter size
b) Blurring decrease with decrease of the size of filter size
c) Blurring decrease with increase of the size of filter size
d) Blurring increases with increase of the size of filter size
View Answer

Answer: d
Explanation: Using a size 3 filter 3*3 and 5*5 size squares and other objects shows a significant
blurring with respect to object of larger size.
The blurring gets more pronounced while using filter size 5, 9 and so on.

Digital Image Processing Questions and

Answers – Smoothing Nonlinear Spatial
Filter
This set of Digital Image Processing Multiple Choice Questions & Answers (MCQs) focuses on
“Smoonthing Nonlinear Spatial Filter”.

248. Which of the following filter(s) has the response in which the central pixel value is replaced
by value defined by ranking the pixel in the image encompassed by filter?
a) Order-Statistic filters
b) Non-linear spatial filters
c) Median filter
d) All of the mentioned
View Answer

Answer: d
Explanation: An Order-Statistic filters also called non-linear spatial filters, response is based on
ranking the pixel in the image encompassed by filter that replaces the central pixel value. A
Median filter is an example of such filters.
249. Is it true or false that “the original pixel value is included while computing the median using
gray-levels in the neighborhood of the original pixel in median filter case”?
a) True
b) False
View Answer

Answer: a
Explanation: A median filter the pixel value is replaced by median of the gray-level in the
neighborhood of that pixel and also the original pixel value is included while computing the
median.

250. Two filters of similar size are used for smoothing image having impulse noise. One is
median filter while the other is a linear spatial filter. Which would the blurring effect of both?
a) Median filter effects in considerably less blurring than the linear spatial filters
b) Median filter effects in considerably more blurring than the linear spatial filters
c) Both have the same blurring effect
d) All of the mentioned
View Answer

Answer: a
Explanation: For impulse noise, median filter is much effective for noise reduction and causes
considerably less blurring than the linear spatial filters.

251. An image contains noise having appearance as black and white dots superimposed on the
image. Which of the following noise(s) has the same appearance?
a) Salt-and-pepper noise
b) Gaussian noise
c) All of the mentioned
d) None of the mentioned
View Answer

Answer: c
Explanation: An impulse noise has an appearance as black and white dots superimposed on the
image. This is also known as Salt-and-pepper noise.

252. While performing the median filtering, suppose a 3*3 neighborhood has value (10, 20, 20,
20, 15, 20, 20, 25, 100), then what is the median value to be given to the pixel under filter?
a) 15
b) 20
c) 100
d) 25
View Answer

Answer: b
Explanation: The values are first sorted and so turns out to (10, 15, 20, 20, 20, 20, 20, 25, and
100). For a 3*3 neighborhood the 5th largest value is the median, and so is 20.
253. Which of the following are forced to the median intensity of the neighbors by n*n median
filter?
a) Isolated cluster of pixels that are light or dark in comparison to their neighbors
b) Isolated cluster of pixels whose area is less than one-half the filter area
c) All of the mentioned
d) None of the mentioned
View Answer

Answer: c
Explanation: The isolated cluster pixel value doesn‟ t come as a median value and since are either
are light or dark as compared to neighbors, so are forced with median intensity of neighbors that
aren‟ t even close to their original value and so are sometimes termed “eliminated”.
If the area of such isolated pixels are < n2/2, that is again the pixel value won‟ t be a median
value and so are eliminated.
Larger cluster pixels value are more pronounced to be a median value, so are considerably less
forced to median intensity.

254. Which filter(s) used to find the brightest point in the image?
a) Median filter
b) Max filter
c) Mean filter
d) All of the mentioned
View Answer

Answer: b
Explanation: A max filter gives the brightest point in an image and so is used.
advertisement

255. The median filter also represents which of the following ranked set of numbers?
a) 100th percentile
b) 0th percentile
c) 50th percentile
d) None of the mentioned
View Answer

Answer: c
Explanation: Since the median filter forces median intensity to the pixel which is almost the
largest value in the middle of the list of values as per the ranking, so represents a 50th percentile
ranked set of numbers.

256. Which of the following filter represents a 0th percentile set of numbers?
a) Max filter
b) Mean filter
c) Median filter
d) None of the mentioned
View Answer
Answer: d
Explanation: A min filter since provides the minimum value in the image, so represents a 0th
percentile set of numbers.

Digital Image Processing Questions and

Answers – Spatial Filtering
This set of Digital Image Processing Multiple Choice Questions & Answers (MCQs) focuses on
“Spatial Filtering”.

257. In neighborhood operations working is being done with the value of image pixel in the
neighborhood and the corresponding value of a subimage that has same dimension as
neighborhood. The subimage is referred as
a) Filter
b) Mask
c) Template
d) All of the mentioned
View Answer

Answer: d
Explanation: Working in neighborhood operations is done with the value of a subimage having
same dimension as neighborhood corresponding to the value in the image pixel. The subimage is
called as filter, mask, template, kernel or window.

258. The response for linear spatial filtering is given by the relationship
a) Sum of filter coefficient‟ s product and corresponding image pixel under filter mask
b) Difference of filter coefficient‟ s product and corresponding image pixel under filter mask
c) Product of filter coefficient‟ s product and corresponding image pixel under filter mask
d) None of the mentioned
View Answer

Answer: a
Explanation: In spatial filtering the mask is moved from point to point and at each point the
response is calculated using a predefined relationship. The relationship in linear spatial filtering
is given by: the Sum of filter coefficient‟ s product and corresponding image pixel in area
under filter mask.

259. In linear spatial filtering, what is the pixel of the image under mask corresponding to the
mask coefficient w (1, -1), assuming a 3*3 mask?
a) f (x, -y)
b) f (x + 1, y)
c) f (x, y – 1)
d) f (x + 1, y – 1)
View Answer

Answer: d
Explanation: The pixel corresponding to mask coefficient (a 3*3 mask) w (0, 0) is f (x, y), and so
for w (1, -1) is f (x + 1, y – 1).

260. Which of the following is/are a nonlinear operation?

a) Computation of variance
b) Computation of median
c) All of the mentioned
d) None of the mentioned
View Answer

Answer: c
Explanation: Computation of variance as well as median comes under nonlinear operation.

261. Which of the following is/are used as basic function in nonlinear filter for noise reduction?
a) Computation of variance
b) Computation of median
c) All of the mentioned
d) None of the mentioned
View Answer

Answer: b
Explanation: Computation of median gray-level value in the neighborhood is the basic function
of nonlinear filter for noise reduction.

262. In neighborhood operation for spatial filtering if a square mask of size n*n is used it is
restricted that the center of mask must be at a distance ≥ (n – 1)/2 pixels from border of image,
what happens to the resultant image?
a) The resultant image will be of same size as original image
b) The resultant image will be a little larger size than original image
c) The resultant image will be a little smaller size than original image
d) None of the mentioned
View Answer

Answer: c
Explanation: If the center of mask must be at a distance ≥ (n – 1)/2 pixels from border of image,
the border pixels won‟ t get processed under mask and so the resultant image would be of smaller
size.

263. Which of the following method is/are used for padding the image?
a) Adding rows and column of 0 or other constant gray level
b) Simply replicating the rows or columns
c) All of the mentioned
d) None of the mentioned
View Answer

Answer: c
Explanation: In neighborhood operation for spatial filtering using square mask, padding of
original image is done to obtain filtered image of same size as of original image done, by adding
rows and column of 0 or other constant gray level or by replicating the rows or columns of the
original image.

264. In neighborhood operation for spatial filtering using square mask of n*n, which of the
following approach is/are used to obtain a perfectly filtered result irrespective of the size?
a) By padding the image
b) By filtering all the pixels only with the mask section that is fully contained in the image
c) By ensuring that center of mask must be at a distance ≥ (n – 1)/2 pixels from border of image
d) None of the mentioned
View Answer

Answer: c
Explanation: By ensuring that center of mask must be at a distance ≥ (n – 1)/2 pixels from border
of image, the resultant image would be of smaller size but all the pixels would be the result of the
filter processing and so is a fully filtered result.
In the other approach like padding affect the values near the edges that gets more prevalent with
mask size increase, while the another approach results in the band of pixels near border that gets
processed with partial filter mask. So, not a fully filtered case.

Digital Image Processing Questions and

Answers – Filtering in Frequency Domain
This set of Digital Image Processing Multiple Choice Questions & Answers (MCQs) focuses on
“Filtering in Frequency Domain”.

265. Which of the following fact(s) is/are true for the relationship between low frequency
component of Fourier transform and the rate of change of gray levels?
a) Moving away from the origin of transform the low frequency corresponds to smooth gray
level variation
b) Moving away from the origin of transform the low frequencies corresponds to abrupt change
in gray level
c) All of the mentioned
d) None of the mentioned
View Answer
Answer: c
Explanation: Moving away from the origin of transform the low frequency corresponds to the
slowly varying components in an image. Moving further away from origin the higher frequencies
corresponds to faster gray level changes.

266. Which of the following fact(s) is/are true for the relationship between high frequency
component of Fourier transform and the rate of change of gray levels?
a) Moving away from the origin of transform the high frequency corresponds to smooth gray
level variation
b) Moving away from the origin of transform the higher frequencies corresponds to abrupt
change in gray level
c) All of the mentioned
d) None of the mentioned
View Answer

Answer: b
Explanation: Moving away from the origin of transform the low frequency corresponds to the
slowly varying components in an image. Moving further away from origin the higher frequencies
corresponds to faster gray level changes.

267. What is the name of the filter that multiplies two functions F(u, v) and H(u, v), where F has
complex components too since is Fourier transformed function of f(x, y), in an order that each
component of H multiplies both real and complex part of corresponding component in F?
a) Unsharp mask filter
b) High-boost filter
c) Zero-phase-shift-filter
d) None of the mentioned
View Answer

Answer: c
Explanation: Zero-phase-shift-filter multiplies two functions F(u, v) and H(u, v), where F has
complex components too since is Fourier transformed function of f(x, y), in an order that each
component of H multiplies both real and complex part of corresponding component in F.

268. To set the average value of an image zero, which of the following term would be set 0 in the
frequency domain and the inverse transformation is done, where F(u, v) is Fourier transformed
function of f(x, y)?
a) F(0, 0)
b) F(0, 1)
c) F(1, 0)
d) None of the mentioned
View Answer

Answer: a
Explanation: For an image f(x, y), the Fourier transform at origin of an image, F(0, 0), is equal to
the average value of the image.
269. What is the name of the filter that is used to turn the average value of a processed image
zero?
a) Unsharp mask filter
b) Notch filter
c) Zero-phase-shift-filter
d) None of the mentioned
View Answer

Answer: b
Explanation: Notch filter sets F (0, 0), to zero, hence setting up the average value of image zero.
The filter is named so, because it is a constant function with a notch at origin and so is able to set
F (0, 0) to zero leaving out other values.

270. Which of the following filter(s) attenuates high frequency while passing low frequencies of
an image?
a) Unsharp mask filter
b) Lowpass filter
c) Zero-phase-shift filter
d) All of the mentioned
View Answer

Answer: b
Explanation: A lowpass filter attenuates high frequency while passing low frequencies.

271. Which of the following filter(s) attenuates low frequency while passing high frequencies of
an image?
a) Unsharp mask filter
b) Highpass filter
c) Zero-phase-shift filter
d) All of the mentioned
View Answer

Answer: b
Explanation: A highpass filter attenuates low frequency while passing high frequencies.

272. Which of the following filter have a less sharp detail than the original image because of
attenuation of high frequencies?
a) Highpass filter
b) Lowpass filter
c) Zero-phase-shift filter
d) None of the mentioned
View Answer

Answer: b
Explanation: A lowpass filter attenuates high so the image has less sharp details.
273. The feature(s) of a highpass filtered image is/are
a) Have less gray-level variation in smooth areas
b) Emphasized transitional gray-level details
c) An overall sharper image
d) All of the mentioned
View Answer

Answer: d
Explanation: A highpass filter attenuates low frequency so have less gray-level variation in
smooth areas, and allows high frequencies so have emphasized transitional gray-level details,
resulting in a sharper image.

274. A spatial domain filter of the corresponding filter in frequency domain can be obtained by
applying which of the following operation(s) on filter in frequency domain?
a) Fourier transform
b) Inverse Fourier transform
c) None of the mentioned
d) All of the mentioned
View Answer

Answer: b
Explanation: Filters in spatial domain and frequency domain has a Fourier transform pair
relation. A spatial domain filter of the corresponding filter in frequency domain can be obtained
by applying inverse Fourier transform on frequency domain filter.
advertisement

275. A frequency domain filter of the corresponding filter in spatial domain can be obtained by
applying which of the following operation(s) on filter in spatial domain?
a) Fourier transform
b) Inverse Fourier transform
c) None of the mentioned
d) All of the mentioned
View Answer

Answer: a
Explanation: Filters in spatial domain and frequency domain has a Fourier transform pair
relation. A frequency domain filter of the corresponding filter in spatial domain can be obtained
by applying inverse Fourier transform on spatial domain filter.

276. Which of the following filtering is done in frequency domain in correspondence to lowpass
filtering in spatial domain?
a) Gaussian filtering
b) Unsharp mask filtering
c) High-boost filtering
d) None of the mentioned
View Answer
Answer: a
Explanation: A plot of Gaussian filter in frequency domain can be recognized similar to lowpass
filter in spatial domain.

277. Using the feature of reciprocal relationship of filter in spatial domain and corresponding
filter in frequency domain, which of the following fact is true?
a) The narrower the frequency domain filter results in increased blurring
b) The wider the frequency domain filter results in increased blurring
c) The narrower the frequency domain filter results in decreased blurring
d) None of the mentioned
View Answer

Answer: a
Explanation: The characteristics feature of reciprocal relationship says that the narrower the
frequency domain filter becomes it attenuates more low frequency component and so increases
blurring.

Digital Image Processing Questions and

Answers – Smoothing Frequency-Domain
Filters
This set of Digital Image Processing Multiple Choice Questions & Answers (MCQs) focuses on
“Smoothing Frequency-Domain Filters”.

278. Smoothing in frequency domain is achieved by attenuating which of the following

component in the transform of a given image?
a) Attenuating a range of high-frequency components
b) Attenuating a range of low-frequency components
c) All of the mentioned
d) None of the mentioned
View Answer

Answer: a
Explanation: Since, edges and sharp transitions contribute significantly to high-frequency
contents in the gray level of an image. So, smoothing is done by attenuating a range of high-
frequency components.

279. Which of the following is/are considered as type(s) of lowpass filters?

a) Ideal
b) Butterworth
c) Gaussian
d) All of the mentioned
View Answer

Answer: d
Explanation: Lowpass filters are considered of three types: Ideal, Butterworth, and Gaussian.

280. Which of the following lowpass filters is/are covers the range of very sharp filter function?
a) Ideal lowpass filters
b) Butterworth lowpass filter
c) Gaussian lowpass filter
d) All of the mentioned
View Answer

Answer: a
Explanation: Ideal lowpass filter covers the range of very sharp filter functioning of lowpass
filters.

281. Which of the following lowpass filters is/are covers the range of very smooth filter
function?
a) Ideal lowpass filters
b) Butterworth lowpass filter
c) Gaussian lowpass filter
d) All of the mentioned
View Answer

Answer: a
Explanation: Gaussian lowpass filter covers the range of very smooth filter functioning of
lowpass filters.

282. Butterworth lowpass filter has a parameter, filter order, determining its functionality as very
sharp or very smooth filter function or an intermediate filter function. If the parameter value is
very high, the filter approaches to which of the following filter(s)?
a) Ideal lowpass filter
b) Gaussian lowpass filter
c) All of the mentioned
d) None of the mentioned
View Answer

Answer: a
Explanation: For high value of filter order Butterworth lowpass filter behaves as Ideal lowpass
filter, while for lower order value it has a smoother form behaving like Gaussian lowpass filter.

283. Butterworth lowpass filter has a parameter, filter order, determining its functionality as very
sharp or very smooth filter function or an intermediate filter function. If the parameter value is of
lower order, the filter approaches to which of the following filter(s)?
a) Ideal lowpass filter
b) Gaussian lowpass filter
c) All of the mentioned
d) None of the mentioned
View Answer

Answer: b
Explanation: For high value of filter order Butterworth lowpass filter behaves as Ideal lowpass
filter, while for lower order value it has a smoother form behaving like Gaussian lowpass filter.

284. In a filter, all the frequencies inside a circle of radius D0 are not attenuated while all
frequencies outside circle are completely attenuated. The D0 is the specified nonnegative
distance from origin of the Fourier transform. Which of the following filter(s) characterizes the
same?
a) Ideal filter
b) Butterworth filter
c) Gaussian filter
d) All of the mentioned
View Answer

Answer: a
Explanation: In ideal filter all the frequencies inside a circle of radius D0 are not attenuated
while all frequencies outside the circle are completely attenuated.

285. In an ideal lowpass filter case, what is the relation between the filter radius and the blurring
effect caused because of the filter?
a) Filter size is directly proportional to blurring caused because of filter
b) Filter size is inversely proportional to blurring caused because of filter
c) There is no relation between filter size and blurring caused because of it
d) None of the mentioned
View Answer

Answer: b
Explanation: Increase in filter size, removes less power from the image and so less severe
blurring occurs.

286. The characteristics of the lowpass filter h(x, y) is/are

a) Has a dominant component at origin
b) Has a concentric, circular components about the center component
c) All of the mentioned
d) None of the mentioned
View Answer

Answer: c
Explanation: the lowpass filter has two different characteristics: one is a dominant component at
origin and other one is a concentric, circular components about the center component.
287. What is the relation for the components of ideal lowpass filter and the image enhancement?
a) The concentric component is primarily responsible for blurring
b) The center component is primarily for the ringing characteristic of ideal filter
c) All of the mentioned
d) None of the mentioned
View Answer

Answer: d
Explanation: The center component of ideal lowpass filter is primarily responsible for blurring
while, concentric component is primarily for the ringing characteristic of ideal filter.

288. Using the feature of reciprocal relationship of filter in spatial domain and corresponding
filter in frequency domain along with convolution, which of the following fact is true?
a) The narrower the frequency domain filter more severe is the ringing
b) The wider the frequency domain filter more severe is the ringing
c) The narrower the frequency domain filter less severe is the ringing
d) None of the mentioned
View Answer

Answer: a
Explanation: The characteristics feature of reciprocal relationship says that the narrower the
frequency domain filter becomes it attenuates more low frequency component and so increases
blurring and more severe becomes the ringing.

289. Which of the following defines the expression for BLPF H(u, v) of order n, where D(u, v) is
the distance from point (u, v), D0 is the distance defining cutoff frequency?

a)

b)
c) All of the mentioned
d) None of the mentioned
View Answer

Answer: a
Explanation: BLPF is the Butterworth lowpass filter and is defined as:

.
advertisement

289. Which of the following defines the expression for ILPF H(u, v) of order n, where D(u, v) is
the distance from point (u, v), D0 is the distance defining cutoff frequency?

a)
b)
c) All of the mentioned
d) None of the mentioned
View Answer

Answer: a
Explanation: ILPF is the Ideal lowpass filter and is defined as:

290. State the statement true or false: “BLPF has sharp discontinuity and ILPF doesn‟ t, and
so ILPF establishes a clear cutoff b/w passed and filtered frequencies”.
a) True
b) False
View Answer

Answer: b
Explanation: ILPF has sharp discontinuity and BLPF doesn‟ t, so BLPF establishes a clear cutoff
b/w passed and filtered frequencies.

291. A Butterworth filter of what order has no ringing?

a) 1
b) 2
c) 3
d) 4
View Answer

Answer: a
Explanation: A Butterworth filter of order 1 has no ringing and ringing exist for order 2 although
is imperceptible. A Butterworth filter of higher order shows significant factor of ringing.

Digital Image Processing Questions and

Answers – Unsharp Masking, High-boost
filtering and Emphasis Filtering
This set of Digital Image Processing Multiple Choice Questions & Answers (MCQs) focuses on
“Unsharp Masking, High-boost filtering and Emphasis Filtering”.
292. In frequency domain terminology, which of the following is defined as “obtaining a
highpass filtered image by subtracting from the given image a lowpass filtered version of itself”?
a) Emphasis filtering
b) Unsharp masking
c) Butterworth filtering
d) None of the mentioned
View Answer

Answer: b
Explanation: In frequency domain terminology unsharp masking is defined as “obtaining a
highpass filtered image by subtracting from the given image a lowpass filtered version of itself”.

293. Which of the following is/ are a generalized form of unsharp masking?
a) Lowpass filtering
b) High-boost filtering
c) Emphasis filtering
d) All of the mentioned
View Answer

Answer: b
Explanation: Unsharp masking is defined as “obtaining a highpass filtered image by subtracting
from the given image a lowpass filtered version of itself” while high-boost filtering generalizes it
by multiplying the input image by a constant, say A≥1.

294. High boost filtered image is expressed as: fhb = A f(x, y) – flp(x, y), where f(x, y) the input
image, A is a constant and flp(x, y) is the lowpass filtered version of f(x, y). Which of the
following fact validates if A=1?
a) High-boost filtering reduces to regular Highpass filtering
b) High-boost filtering reduces to regular Lowpass filtering
c) All of the mentioned
d) None of the mentioned
View Answer

Answer: a
Explanation: High boost filtered image is modified as: fhb = (A-1) f(x, y) +f(x, y) – flp(x, y)
i.e. fhb = (A-1) f(x, y) + fhp(x, y). So, when A=1, High-boost filtering reduces to regular Highpass
filtering.

295. High boost filtered image is expressed as: fhb = A f(x, y) – flp(x, y), where f(x, y) the input
image, A is a constant and flp(x, y) is the lowpass filtered version of f(x, y). Which of the
following fact(s) validates if A increases past 1?
a) The contribution of the image itself becomes more dominant
b) The contribution of the highpass filtered version of image becomes less dominant
c) All of the mentioned
d) None of the mentioned
View Answer
Answer: c
Explanation: High boost filtered image is modified as: fhb = (A-1) f(x, y) +f(x, y) – flp(x, y)
i.e. fhb = (A-1) f(x, y) + fhp(x, y). So, when A>1, the contribution of the image itself becomes
more dominant over the highpass filtered version of image.

296. If, Fhp(u, v)=F(u, v) – Flp(u, v) and Flp(u, v) = Hlp(u, v)F(u, v), where F(u, v) is the image
in frequency domain with Fhp(u, v) its highpass filtered version, Flp(u, v) its lowpass filtered
component and Hlp(u, v) the transfer function of a lowpass filter. Then, unsharp masking can be
implemented directly in frequency domain by using a filter. Which of the following is the
required filter?
a) Hhp(u, v) = Hlp(u, v)
b) Hhp(u, v) = 1 + Hlp(u, v)
c) Hhp(u, v) = – Hlp(u, v)
d) Hhp(u, v) = 1 – Hlp(u, v)
View Answer

Answer: d
Explanation: Unsharp masking can be implemented directly in frequency domain by using a
composite filter: Hhp(u, v) = 1 – Hlp(u, v).

297. Unsharp masking can be implemented directly in frequency domain by using a filter: Hhp(u,
v) = 1 – Hlp(u, v), where Hlp(u, v) the transfer function of a lowpass filter. What kind of filter is
Hhp(u, v)?
a) Composite filter
b) M-derived filter
c) Constant k filter
d) None of the mentioned
View Answer

Answer: a
Explanation: Unsharp masking can be implemented directly in frequency domain by using a
composite filter: Hhp(u, v) = 1 – Hlp(u, v).

298. If unsharp masking can be implemented directly in frequency domain by using a composite
filter: Hhp(u, v) = 1 – Hlp(u, v), where Hlp(u, v) the transfer function of a lowpass filter. Then,
the composite filter for High-boost filtering is
a) Hhb(u, v) = 1 – Hhp(u, v)
b) Hhb(u, v) = 1 + Hhp(u, v)
c) Hhb(u, v) = (A-1) – Hhp(u, v), A is a constant
d) Hhb(u, v) = (A-1) + Hhp(u, v), A is a constant
View Answer

Answer: d
Explanation: For given composite filter of unsharp masking Hhp(u, v) = 1 – Hlp(u, v), the
composite filter for High-boost filtering is Hhb(u, v) = (A-1) + Hhp(u, v).
299. The frequency domain Laplacian is closer to which of the following mask?
a) Mask that excludes the diagonal neighbors
b) Mask that excludes neighbors in 4-adjacancy
c) Mask that excludes neighbors in 8-adjacancy
d) None of the mentioned
View Answer

Answer: a
Explanation: The frequency domain Laplacian is closer to mask that excludes the diagonal
neighbors.

300. To accentuate the contribution to enhancement made by high-frequency components, which

of the following method(s) should be more appropriate to apply?
a) Multiply the highpass filter by a constant
b) Add an offset to the highpass filter to prevent eliminating zero frequency term by filter
c) All of the mentioned combined and applied
d) None of the mentioned
View Answer

Answer: c
Explanation: To accentuate the contribution to enhancement made by high-frequency
components, we have to multiply the highpass filter by a constant and add an offset to the
highpass filter to prevent eliminating zero frequency term by filter.

301. A process that accentuate the contribution to enhancement made by high-frequency

components, by multiplying the highpass filter by a constant and adding an offset to the highpass
filter to prevent eliminating zero frequency term by filter is known as
a) Unsharp masking
b) High-boost filtering
c) High frequency emphasis
d) None of the mentioned
View Answer

Answer: c
Explanation: High frequency emphasis is the method that accentuate the contribution to
enhancement made by high-frequency component. In this we multiply the highpass filter by a
constant and add an offset to the highpass filter to prevent eliminating zero frequency term by
filter.

302. Which of the following a transfer function of High frequency emphasis {Hhfe(u, v)} for
Hhp(u, v) being the highpass filtered version of image?
a) Hhfe(u, v) = 1 – Hhp(u, v)
b) Hhfe(u, v) = a – Hhp(u, v), a≥0
c) Hhfe(u, v) = 1 – b Hhp(u, v), a≥0 and b>a
d) Hhfe(u, v) = a + b Hhp(u, v), a≥0 and b>a
View Answer
Answer: d
Explanation: The transfer function of High frequency emphasis is given as:Hhfe(u, v) = a + b
Hhp(u, v), a≥0 and b>a.

303. The transfer function of High frequency emphasis is given as: Hhfe(u, v) = a + b Hhp(u, v),
for Hhp(u, v) being the highpass filtered version of image,a≥0 and b>a. for certain values of a
and b it reduces to High-boost filtering. Which of the following is the required value?
a) a = (A-1) and b = 0,A is some constant
b) a = 0 and b = (A-1),A is some constant
c) a = 1 and b = 1
d) a = (A-1) and b =1,A is some constant
View Answer

Answer: d
Explanation: The transfer function of High frequency emphasis is given as: Hhfe(u, v) = a + b
Hhp(u, v) and the transfer function for High-boost filtering is Hhb(u, v) = (A-1) + Hhp(u, v), A
being some constant. So, for a = (A-1) and b =1, Hhfe(u, v) = Hhb(u, v).
advertisement

304. The transfer function of High frequency emphasis is given as: Hhfe(u, v) = a + b Hhp(u, v),
for Hhp(u, v) being the highpass filtered version of image,a≥0 and b>a. What happens when b
increases past 1?
a) The high frequency are emphasized
b) The low frequency are emphasized
c) All frequency are emphasized
d) None of the mentioned
View Answer

Answer: a
Explanation: The transfer function of High frequency emphasis is given as: Hhfe(u, v) = a + b
Hhp(u, v), for Hhp(u, v) being the highpass filtered version of image,a≥0 and b>a. When b
increases past 1, the high frequency are emphasized.

305. The transfer function of High frequency emphasis is given as: Hhfe(u, v) = a + b Hhp(u, v),
for Hhp(u, v) being the highpass filtered version of image,a≥0 and b>a. When b increases past
1 the filtering process is specifically termed as
a) Unsharp masking
b) High-boost filtering
c) Emphasized filtering
d) None of the mentioned
View Answer

Answer: c
Explanation: The transfer function of High frequency emphasis is given as: Hhfe(u, v) = a + b
Hhp(u, v), for Hhp(u, v) being the highpass filtered version of image,a≥0 and b>a. When b
increases past 1, the high frequency are emphasized and so the filtering process is better known
as Emphasized filtering.
306. Validate the statement “Because of High frequency emphasis the gray-level tonality due to
low frequency components is not lost”.
a) True
b) False
View Answer

Answer: a
Explanation: Because of High frequency emphasis the gray-level tonality due to low frequency
components is not lost.

Digital Image Processing Questions and

Answers – Homomorphic filtering
This set of Digital Image Processing Questions and Answers for Campus interviews focuses on
“Homomorphic filtering-2”.

307. Which of the following fact is true for a image?

a) An image is the addition of illumination and reflectance component
b) An image is the subtraction of illumination component from reflectance component
c) An image is the subtraction of reflectance component from illumination component
d) An image is the multiplication of illumination and reflectance component
View Answer

Answer: d
Explanation: An image is expressed as the multiplication of illumination and reflectance
component.

308. If an image is expressed as the multiplication of illumination and reflectance component i.e.
f(x, y)= i(x, y) * r(x, y), then Validate the statement “We can directly use the equation f(x, y)=
i(x, y) * r(x, y) to operate separately on the frequency component of illumination and
reflectance” .
a) True
b) False
View Answer

Answer: b
Explanation: For an image is expressed as the multiplication of illumination and reflectance
component i.e. f(x, y)= i(x, y) * r(x, y), the equation can‟ t be used directly to operate separately
on the frequency component of illumination and reflectance because the Fourier transform of the
product of two function is not separable.
309. In Homomorphic filtering which of the following operations is used to convert input image
to discrete Fourier transformed function?
a) Logarithmic operation
b) Exponential operation
c) Negative transformation
d) None of the mentioned
View Answer

Answer: a
Explanation: For an image is expressed as the multiplication of illumination and reflectance
component i.e. f(x, y) = i(x, y) * r(x, y), the equation can‟ t be used directly to operate separately
on the frequency component of illumination and reflectance because the Fourier transform of the
product of two function is not separable. So, the logarithmic operation is
used.I{z(x,y)}=I{ln⁡(f(x,y)) }=I{ln⁡(i(x,y)) }+I{ln⁡(r(x,y))}.

310. A class of system that achieves the separation of illumination and reflectance component of
an image is termed as
a) Base class system
b) Homomorphic system
c) Base separation system
d) All of the mentioned
View Answer

Answer: b
Explanation: Homomorphic system is a class of system that achieves the separation of
illumination and reflectance component of an image.

311. Which of the following image component is characterized by a slow spatial variation?
a) Illumination component
b) Reflectance component
c) All of the mentioned
d) None of the mentioned
View Answer

Answer: a
Explanation: The illumination component of an image is characterized by a slow spatial
variation.

312. Which of the following image component varies abruptly particularly at the junction of
dissimilar objects?
a) Illumination component
b) Reflectance component
c) All of the mentioned
d) None of the mentioned
View Answer
Answer: b
Explanation: The reflectance component of an image varies abruptly particularly at the junction
of dissimilar objects.

313. The reflectance component of an image varies abruptly particularly at the junction of
dissimilar objects. The characteristic lead to associate illumination with
a) The low frequency of Fourier transform of logarithm of the image
b) The high frequency of Fourier transform of logarithm of the image
c) All of the mentioned
d) None of the mentioned
View Answer

Answer: b
Explanation: The reflectance component of an image varies abruptly, so, is associated with the
high frequency of Fourier transform of logarithm of the image.
advertisement

314. The illumination component of an image is characterized by a slow spatial variation. The
characteristic lead to associate illumination with
a) The low frequency of Fourier transform of logarithm of the image
b) The high frequency of Fourier transform of logarithm of the image
c) All of the mentioned
d) None of the mentioned
View Answer

Answer: a
Explanation: The illumination component of an image is characterized by a slow spatial
variation, so, is associated with the low frequency of Fourier transform of logarithm of the
image.

315. If the contribution made by illumination component of image is decreased and the
contribution of reflectance component is amplified, what will be the net result?
a) Dynamic range compression
b) Contrast enhancement
c) All of the mentioned
d) None of the mentioned
View Answer

Answer: c
Explanation: The illumination component of an image is characterized by a slow spatial variation
and the reflectance component of an image varies abruptly particularly at the junction of
dissimilar objects, so, if the contribution made by illumination component of image is decreased
and the contribution of reflectance component is amplified then there is simultaneous dynamic
range compression and contrast stretching.
Digital Image Processing Questions and
Answers – Intensity Transformation
Functions
This set of Digital Image Processing Multiple Choice Questions & Answers (MCQs) focuses on
“Intensity Transformation Functions”.

316. How is negative of an image obtained with intensity levels [0,L-1] with “r” and “s” being
pixel values?
a) s = L – 1 + r
b) s = L – 1 – r
c) s = L + 1 + r
d) s = L + 1 + r
View Answer

Answer: b
Explanation: The negative is obtained using s = L – 1 + r.

317. The general form of log transformations is

a) s = c.log(1 + r)
b) s = c+log(1 + r)
c) s = c.log(1 – r)
d) s = c-log(1 – r)
View Answer

Answer: a
Explanation: s = c.log(1 + r) is the log transformation.

318. Power-law transformations has the basic form of where c and ∆ are
constants.
a) s = c + r∆
b) s = c – r∆
c) s = c * r∆
d) s = c / r.∆
View Answer

Answer: c
Explanation: s = c * r∆ is called the Power-law transformation.

319. For what value of the output must the Power-law transformation account for offset?
a) No offset needed
b) All values
c) One
d) Zero
View Answer

Answer: d
Explanation: When the output is Zero, an offset is necessary.

320. What is Gamma Correction?

a) A Power-law response phenomenon
b) Inverted Intensity curve
c) Light brightness variation
d) None of the Mentioned
View Answer

Answer: a
Explanation: The exponent in Power-law is called gamma and the process used to correct the
response of Power-law transformation is called Gamma Correction.

321. Which process expands the range of intensity levels in an image so that it spans the full
intensity range of the display?
a) Shading correction
b) Contrast sketching
c) Gamma correction
d) None of the Mentioned
View Answer

Answer: b
Explanation: Contrast sketching is the process used to expand intensity levels in an image.

322. Highlighting a specific range of intensities of an image is called

a) Intensity Matching
b) Intensity Highlighting
c) Intensity Slicing
d) None of the Mentioned
View Answer

Answer: c
Explanation: Highlighting a specific range of intensities of an image is called Intensity Slicing.

323. Highlighting the contribution made to total image by specific bits instead of highlighting
intensity-level changes is called
a) Intensity Highlighting
b) Byte-Slicing
c) Bit-plane slicing
d) None of the Mentioned
View Answer

Answer: c
Explanation: It is called Bit-plane slicing.

324. Which of the following involves reversing the intensity levels of an image?
a) Log Transformations
b) Piecewise Linear Transformations
c) Image Negatives
d) None of the Mentioned
View Answer

Answer: c
Explanation: Image negatives use reversing intensity levels.

325. Piecewise Linear Transformation function involves which of the following?

a) Bit-plane slicing
b) Intensity level slicing
c) Contrast stretching
d) All of the Mentioned
View Answer

Answer: d
Explanation: Piecewise Linear Transformation function involves all the mentioned functions.

Digital Image Processing Questions and

Answers – Fuzzy Techniques –
Transformations and Filtering
This set of Digital Image Processing Multiple Choice Questions & Answers (MCQs) focuses on
“Fuzzy Techniques – Transformations and Filtering”.

326. What is the set generated using infinite-value membership functions, called?
a) Crisp set
b) Boolean set
c) Fuzzy set
d) All of the mentioned
View Answer
Answer: c
Explanation: It is called fuzzy set.

327. Which is the set, whose membership only can be true or false, in bi-values Boolean logic?
a) Boolean set
b) Crisp set
c) Null set
d) None of the mentioned
View Answer

Answer: b
Explanation: The so called Crisp set is the one in which membership only can be true or false, in
bi-values Boolean logic.

328. If Z is a set of elements with a generic element z, i.e. Z = {z}, then this set is called

a) Universe set
b) Universe of discourse
c) Derived set
d) None of the mentioned
View Answer

Answer: b
Explanation: It is called the universe of discourse.

329. A fuzzy set „A‟ in Z is characterized by a that associates with element of Z,

a real number in the interval [0, 1].
a) Grade of membership
b) Generic element
c) Membership function
d) None of the mentioned
View Answer

Answer: c
Explanation: A fuzzy set is characterized by a membership function.

330. A fuzzy set is if and only if membership function is identically zero in Z.

a) Empty
b) Subset
c) Complement
d) None of the mentioned
View Answer

Answer: a
Explanation: It is called an Empty set.
331. Which of the following is a type of Membership function?
a) Triangular
b) Trapezoidal
c) Sigma
d) All of the mentioned
View Answer

Answer: d
Explanation: All of them are types of Membership functions.

332. Which of the following is not a type of Membership function?

a) S-shape
b) Bell shape
c) Truncated Gaussian
d) None of the mentioned
View Answer

Answer: d
Explanation: All of the mentioned above are types of Membership functions.

333. Using IF-THEN rule to create the output of fuzzy system is called .
a) Inference
b) Implication
c) Both the mentioned
d) None of the mentioned
View Answer

Answer: c
Explanation: It is called Inference or Implication.

334. What is the independent variable of fuzzy output?

a) Maturity
b) Membership
c) Generic Element
d) None of the mentioned
View Answer

Answer: a
Explanation: Maturity is the independent variable of fuzzy output.

335. Which of the following is not a principle step in fuzzy technique?

a) Fuzzify input
b) Apply implication method
c) Defuzzify final output
d) None of the mentioned
View Answer
Answer: d
Explanation: All of the mentioned above are key steps in fuzzy technique.

Digital Image Processing Questions and

Answers – Piecewise-Linear Transformation
Functions
This set of Digital Image Processing Multiple Choice Questions & Answers (MCQs) focuses on
“Piecewise-Linear Transformation Functions”.

336. Which gray-level transformation increase the dynamic range of gray-level in the image?
a) Power-law transformations
b) Negative transformations
c) Contrast stretching
d) None of the mentioned
View Answer

Answer: c
Explanation: Increasing the dynamic range of gray-levels in the image is the basic idea behind
contrast stretching.

337. When is the contrast stretching transformation a linear function, for r and s as gray-value of
image before and after processing respectively?
a) r1 = s1 and r2 = s2
b) r1 = r2, s1 = 0 and s2 = L – 1, L is the max gray value allowed
c) r1 = 1 and r2 = 0
d) None of the mentioned
View Answer

Answer: a
Explanation: If r1 = s1 and r2 = s2 the contrast stretching transformation is a linear function.

338. When is the contrast stretching transformation a thresholding function, for r and s as gray-
value of image before and after processing respectively?
a) r1 = s1 and r2 = s2
b) r1 = r2, s1 = 0 and s2 = L – 1, L is the max gray value allowed
c) r1 = 1 and r2 = 0
d) None of the mentioned
View Answer
Answer: b
Explanation: If r1 = r2, s1 = 0 and s2 = L – 1, the contrast stretching transformation is a
thresholding function.

339. What condition prevents the intensity artifacts to be created while processing with contrast
stretching, if r and s are gray-values of image before and after processing respectively?
a) r1 = s1 and r2 = s2
b) r1 = r2, s1 = 0 and s2 = L – 1, L is the max gray value allowed
c) r1 = 1 and r2 = 0
d) r1 ≤ r2 and s1 ≤ s2
View Answer

Answer: d
Explanation: While processing through contrast stretching, if r1 ≤ r2 and s1 ≤ s2 is maintained, the
function remains single valued and so monotonically increasing. This helps in the prevention of
creation of intensity artifacts.

340. A contrast stretching result been obtained by setting (r1, s1) = (rmin, 0) and (r2, s2) = (rmax, L –
1), where, r and s are gray-values of image before and after processing respectively, L is the max
gray value allowed and rmax and rmin are maximum and minimum gray-values in image
respectively. What should we term the transformation function if r1 = r2 = m, some mean gray-
value.
a) Linear function
b) Thresholding function
c) Intermediate function
d) None of the mentioned
View Answer

Answer: b
Explanation: From (r1, s1) = (rmin, 0) and (r2, s2) = (rmax, L – 1), we have s1 = 0 and s2 = L – 1 and
if r1 = r2 = m is set then the result becomes r1 = r2, s1 = 0 and s2 = L – 1, i.e. a thresholding
function.

341. A specific range of gray-levels highlighting is the basic idea of

a) Contrast stretching
b) Bit –plane slicing
c) Thresholding
d) Gray-level slicing
View Answer

Answer: d
Explanation: gray-level slicing is being done by two approach: One approach is to give all gray
level of a specific range high value and a low value to all other gray levels.
Second approach is to brighten the pixels gray-value of interest and preserve the background.
I.e. in both highlighting of a specific range of gray-level is been done.
342. What is/are the approach(s) of the gray-level slicing?
a) To give all gray level of a specific range high value and a low value to all other gray levels
b) To brighten the pixels gray-value of interest and preserve the background
c) All of the mentioned
d) None of the mentioned
View Answer

Answer: c
Explanation: There are basically two approach of gray-level slicing:
One approach is to give all gray level of a specific range high value and a low value to all other
gray levels.
Second approach is to brighten the pixels gray-value of interest and preserve the background.

343. Which of the following transform produces a binary image after processing?
a) Contrast stretching
b) Gray-level slicing
c) All of the mentioned
d) None of the mentioned
View Answer

Answer: c
Explanation: The approach of gray-level slicing “to give all gray level of a specific range high
value and a low value to all other gray levels” produces a binary image.
One of the transformation in Contrast stretching darkens the value of r (input image gray-level)
below m (some predefined gray-value) and brightens the value of r above m, giving a binary
image as result.

344. Specific bit contribution in the image highlighting is the basic idea of
a) Contrast stretching
b) Bit –plane slicing
c) Thresholding
d) Gray-level slicing
View Answer

Answer: b
Explanation: Bit-plane slicing highlights the contribution of specific bits made to total image,
instead of highlighting a specific gray-level range.

345. In bit-plane slicing if an image is represented by 8 bits and is composed of eight 1-bit plane,
with plane 0 showing least significant bit and plane 7 showing most significant bit. Then, which
plane(s) contain the majority of visually significant data.
a) Plane 4, 5, 6, 7
b) Plane 0, 1, 2, 3
c) Plane 0
d) Plane 2, 3, 4, 5
View Answer
Answer: a
Explanation: In bit-plane slicing, for the given data, the higher-ordered bits (mostly top four)
contains most of the data visually signified.

Digital Image Processing Questions and

Answers – Gaussain Lowpass and
Sharpening Frequency Domain Filters
This set of Digital Image Processing Multiple Choice Questions & Answers (MCQs) focuses on
“Gaussain Lowpass and Sharpening Frequency Domain Filters”.

346. If the Gaussian filter is expressed as H(u, v) = e(-D2 (u,v)/2D 02),where D(u, v) is the distance
from point(u, v), D0 is the distance defining cutoff frequency, then for what value of D(u, v) the
filter is down to 0.607 of its maximum value?
a) D(u, v) = D0
b) D(u, v) = D02
c) D(u, v) = D03
d) D(u, v) = 0
View Answer

Answer: a
Explanation: For the given Gaussian filter of 2-D image, the value D(u, v) = D0 gives the filter a
down to 0.607 of its maximum value.

347. State the statement as true or false. “The GLPF did produce as much smoothing as the
BLPF of order 2 for the same value of cutoff frequency”.
a) True
b) False
View Answer

Answer: b
Explanation: For the same value of cutoff frequency, the GLPF did not produce as much
smoothing as the BLPF of order 2, because the profile of GLPF is not as tight as BLPF of order
2.

348. In general, which of the following assures of no ringing in the output?

a) Gaussian Lowpass Filter
b) Ideal Lowpass Filter
c) Butterworth Lowpass Filter
d) All of the mentioned
View Answer
Answer: a
Explanation: Using Gaussian Lowpass Filter no ringing is assured, but Ideal Lowpass Filter and
Butterworth Lowpass Filter of order 2and more produces significant ringing.

349. The lowpass filtering process can be applied in which of the following area(s)?
a) The field of machine perception, with application of character recognition
b) In field of printing and publishing industry
c) In field of processing satellite and aerial images
d) All of the mentioned
View Answer

Answer: d
Explanation: In case of broken characters recognition system, LPF is used. LPF is used as
preprocessing system in printing and publishing industry, and in case of remote sensed images
LPF is used to blur out as much detail as possible leaving the large feature recognizable.

350. The edges and other abrupt changes in gray-level of an image are associated
with
a) High frequency components
b) Low frequency components
c) Edges with high frequency and other abrupt changes in gray-level with low frequency
components
d) Edges with low frequency and other abrupt changes in gray-level with high frequency
components
View Answer

Answer: a
Explanation: High frequency components are related with the edges and other abrupt changes in
gray-level of an image.

351. A type of Image is called as VHRR image. What is the definition of VHRR image?
a) Very High Range Resolution image
b) Very High Resolution Range image
c) Very High Resolution Radiometer image
d) Very High Range Radiometer Image
View Answer

Answer: c
Explanation: A VHRR image is a Very High Resolution Radiometer Image.

352. The Image sharpening in frequency domain can be achieved by which of the following
method(s)?
a) Attenuating the high frequency components
b) Attenuating the low-frequency components
c) All of the mentioned
d) None of the mentioned
View Answer

Answer: b
Explanation: The Image sharpening in frequency domain is achieved by attenuating the low-
frequency components without disturbing the high-frequency components.

353. The function of filters in Image sharpening in frequency domain is to perform reverse
operation of which of the following Lowpass filter?
a) Gaussian Lowpass filter
b) Butterworth Lowpass filter
c) Ideal Lowpass filter
d) None of the Mentioned
View Answer

Answer: c
Explanation: The function of filters in Image sharpening in frequency domain is to perform
precisely reverse operation of Ideal Lowpass filter.
The transfer function of Highpass filter is obtained by relation: Hhp(u, v) = 1 – Hlp(u, v), where
Hlp(u, v) is transfer function of corresponding lowpass filter.

354. If D0 is the cutoff distance measured from origin of frequency rectangle and D(u, v) is the
distance from point(u, v). Then what value does an Ideal Highpass filter will give if D(u, v) ≤ D0
andifD(u, v) >D0?
a) 0 and 1 respectively
b) 1 and 0 respectively
c) 1 in both case
d) 0 in both case
View Answer

Answer: a
Explanation: Unlike Ideal lowpass filter, an Ideal highpass filter attenuates the low-frequency
components and so gives 0 for D(u, v) ≤ D0 and 1 for D(u, v) >D0.

355. What is the relation of the frequencies to a circle of radius D0, where D0 is the cutoff
distance measured from origin of frequency rectangle, for an Ideal Highpass filter?
a) IHPF sets all frequencies inside circle to zero
b) IHPF allows all frequencies, without attenuating, outside the circle
c) All of the mentioned
d) None of the mentioned
View Answer

Answer: c
Explanation: An Ideal high pass filter gives 0 for D(u, v) ≤ D0 and 1 for D(u, v) >D0.
356. Which of the following is the transfer function of the Butterworth Highpass Filter, of order
n, D0 is the cutoff distance measured from origin of frequency rectangle and D(u, v) is the
distance from point(u, v)?
a)

b)
c)
d) none of the mentioned
View Answer

Answer: a
Explanation: The transfer function of Butterworth highpass filter of order n, D0 is the cutoff
distance measured from origin of frequency rectangle and D(u, v) is the distance from point(u, v)

is given by: .

357. Which of the following is the transfer function of the Ideal Highpass Filter? Given D0 is the
cutoff distance measured from origin of frequency rectangle and D(u, v) is the distance from
point(u, v).

a)

b)
c)
d) none of the mentioned
View Answer

Answer: b
Explanation: The transfer function of Ideal highpass filter, whereD0 is the cutoff distance
measured from origin of frequency rectangle and D(u, v) is the distance from point(u, v) is given

by: .
advertisement

358. Which of the following is the transfer function of the Gaussian Highpass Filter? Given D0 is
the cutoff distance measured from origin of frequency rectangle and D(u, v) is the distance from
point(u, v).

a)

b)
c)
d) none of the mentioned
View Answer

Answer: c
Explanation: The transfer function of Gaussian highpass filter, where D0 is the cutoff distance
measured from origin of frequency rectangle and D(u, v) is the distance from point(u, v) is given
by: .

359. For a given image having smaller objects, which of the following filter(s), having D0 as the
cutoff distance measured from origin of frequency rectangle, would you prefer for a comparably
smoother result?
a) IHLF with D0 15
b) BHPF with D0 15 and order 2
c) GHPF with D0 15 and order 2
d) All of the mentioned
View Answer

Answer: c
Explanation: For the same format as for BHPF, GHPF gives a result comparably smoother than
BHPF. However, BHPF performance for filtering smaller object is comparable with IHPF.

360. Which of the following statement(s) is true for the given fact that “Applying Highpass
filters has an effect on the background of the output image”?
a) The average background intensity increases to near white
b) The average background intensity reduces to near black
c) The average background intensity changes to a value average of black and white
d) All of the mentioned
View Answer

Answer: b
Explanation: The Highpass filter eliminates the zero frequency components of the Fourier
transformed image HPFs are applied on. So, the average background intensity reduces to near
black.

Digital Image Processing Questions and

Answers – Elements of Visual Perception
This set of Digital Image Processing Multiple Choice Questions & Answers (MCQs) focuses on
“Elements of Visual Perception”.

361. Which of the following is a receptor in the retina of human eye?

a) Rods
b) Cones
c) Rods and Cones
d) Neither Rods nor Cones
View Answer

Answer: c
Explanation: Rods are long slender receptors while cones are shorter and thicker receptors.

362. How is image formation in the eye different from that in a photographic camera
a) No difference
b) Variable focal length
c) Varying distance between lens and imaging plane
d) Fixed focal length
View Answer

Answer: b
Explanation: Fibers in ciliary body vary shape of the lens thereby varying its focal length.

363. Range of light intensity levels to which the human eye can adapt (in Log of Intensity-mL)
a) 10-6 to 10-4
b) 104 to 106
c) 10-6 to 104
d) 10-5 to 105
View Answer

Answer: c
Explanation: Range of light intensity to which human eye can adapt is enormous
and about the order 1010 from 10-6 to 104.

364. What is subjective brightness?

a) Related to intensity
b) Related to brightness
c) Related to image perception
d) Related to image formation
View Answer

Answer: a
Explanation: It is the intensity as perceived by the human eye.

365. What is brightness adaptation?

a) Changing the eye‟ s overall sensitivity
b) Changing the eye‟ s imaging ability
c) Adjusting the focal length
d) Transition from scotopic to photopic vision
View Answer

Answer: a
Explanation: The human eye a wide dynamic range by changing the eye‟ s overall sensitivity and
this is called brightness adaptation.

366. The inner most membrane of the human eye is

a) Blind Spot
b) Sclera
c) Choroid
d) Retina
View Answer

Answer: d
Explanation: Retina is the innermost membrane of the human eye.

367. What is the function of Iris?

a) Source of nutrition
b) Detect color
c) Varies focal length
d) Control amount of light
View Answer

Answer: d
Explanation: Iris is responsible for controlling the amount of light that enters the human eye.

368. serve to a general, overall picture of the field of view.

a) Cones
b) Rods
c) Retina
d) All of the Mentioned
View Answer

Answer: b
Explanation: Rods produce an overall picture of the field of view.

369. Ratio of number of rods to the number of cones is

a) 1:20
b) 1:2
c) 1:1
d) 1:5
View Answer
Answer: a
Explanation: No of rods: 6 to 7 million, No of rods: 75 to 150.

370. The absence of receptors is in the retinal area called

a) Lens
b) Ciliary body
c) Blind spot
d) Fovea
View Answer

Answer: c
Explanation: Except the blind spot, receptors are radially distributed.

Digital Image Processing Questions and

Answers – Relationships between Pixels
This set of Digital Image Processing Multiple Choice Questions & Answers (MCQs) focuses on
“Relationships between Pixels”.

371. In 4-neighbours of a pixel p, how far are each of the neighbours located from p?
a) one pixel apart
b) four pixels apart
c) alternating pixels
d) none of the Mentioned
View Answer

Answer: a
Explanation: Each pixel is a unit distance apart from the pixel p.

372. If S is a subset of pixels, pixels p and q are said to be if there exists a path
between them consisting of pixels entirely in S.
a) continuous
b) ambiguous
c) connected
d) none of the Mentioned
View Answer

Answer: c
Explanation: Pixels p and q are said to be connected if there exists a path between them
consisting of pixels entirely in S.
373. If R is a subset of pixels, we call R a of the image if R is a connected set.
a) Disjoint
b) Region
c) Closed
d) Adjacent
View Answer

Answer: b
Explanation: R is called a Region of the image.

374. Two regions are said to be if their union forms a connected set.
a) Adjacent
b) Disjoint
c) Closed
d) None of the Mentioned
View Answer

Answer: a
Explanation: The regions are said to be Adjacent to each other.

375. If an image contains K disjoint regions, what does the union of all the regions represent?
a) Background
b) Foreground
c) Outer Border
d) Inner Border
View Answer

Answer: b
Explanation: The union of all regions is called Foreground and its complement is called the
Background.

376. For a region R, the set of points that are adjacent to the complement of R is called as

a) Boundary
b) Border
c) Contour
d) All of the Mentioned
View Answer

Answer: d
Explanation: The words boundary, border and contour mean the same set.

377. The distance between pixels p and q, the pixels have a distance less than or equal to some
value of radius r centred at (x,y) is called :
a) Euclidean distance
b) City-Block distance
c) Chessboard distance
d) None of the Mentioned
View Answer

Answer: a
Explanation: Euclidean distance is measured using a radius from a defined centre.

378. The distance between pixels p and q, the pixels have a distance less than or equal to some
value of radius r, form a diamond centred at (x,y) is called :
a) Euclidean distance
b) Chessboard distance
c) City-Block distance
d) None of the Mentioned
View Answer

Answer: c
Explanation: Formation of a diamond is measured as City-Block distance.

379. The distance between pixels p and q, the pixels have a distance less than or equal to some
value of radius r, form a square centred at (x,y) is called :
a) Euclidean distance
b) Chessboard distance
c) City-Block distance
d) None of the Mentioned
View Answer

Answer: b
Explanation: Distance measured by forming a square around the centre is called Chessboard
distance.

380. Which of the following is NOT is not a type of Adjacency?

a) 4-Adjacency
b) 8-Adjacency
c) m-Adjacency
d) None of the Mentioned
View Answer

Answer: d
Explanation: All the mentioned adjacency types are valid.

Digital Image Processing Questions And

Answers – Color Fundamentals
This set of Digital Image Processing test focuses on “Color Fundamentals”.

381. How many categories does the color image processing is basically divided into?
a) 4
b) 2
c) 3
d) 5
View Answer

Answer: b
Explanation: Color image processing is divided into two major areas: full-color and pseudo-color
processing.

382. What are the names of categories of color image processing?

a) Full-color and pseudo-color processing
b) Half-color and full-color processing
c) Half-color and pseudo-color processing
d) Pseudo-color and Multi-color processing
View Answer

Answer: a
Explanation: Color image processing is divided into two major areas: full-color and pseudo-color
processing. In the first category, the images are acquired with a full-color sensor like color TV or
color scanner. In the second category, there is a problem of assigning a color to a particular
monochrome intensity or range of intensities.

383. What are the basic quantities that are used to describe the quality of a chromatic light
source?
a) Radiance, brightness and wavelength
b) Brightness and luminence
c) Radiance, brightness and luminence
d) Luminence and radiance
View Answer

Answer: c
Explanation: Three quantities are used to describe the quality of a chromatic light source:
radiance, luminance and brightness.

384. What is the quantity that is used to measure the total amount of energy flowing from the
light source?
a) Brightness
b) Intensity
c) Luminence
d) Radiance
View Answer
Answer: d
Explanation: Three quantities are used to describe the quality of a chromatic light source:
radiance, luminance and brightness. Radiance is used to measure the total amount of energy
flows from the light source and is generally measured in watts (W).

385. What are the characteristics that are used to distinguish one color from the other?
a) Brightness, Hue and Saturation
b) Hue, Brightness and Intensity
c) Saturation, Hue
d) Brightness, Saturation and Intensity
View Answer

Answer: a
Explanation: The characteristics generally used to distinguish one color from another are
brightness, hue and saturation. Brightness embodies the chromatic notion of intensity. Hue is an
attribute associated with dominant wavelength in a mixture of light waves. Saturation refers to
the relative purity or the amount of white light mixed with a hue.

386. What are the characteristics that are taken together in chromaticity?
a) Saturation and Brightness
b) Hue and Saturation
c) Hue and Brightness
d) Saturation, Hue and Brightness
View Answer

Answer: b
Explanation: Hue and saturation are taken together are called chromaticity and therefore, a color
may be characterized by its brightness and chromaticity.

387. Which of the following represent the correct equations for trichromatic coefficients?
a) x=X/(X+Y+Z), y=Y/(X+Y+Z), z=Z/(X+Y+Z)
b) x=(Y+Z)/(X+Y+Z), y=(X+Z)/(X+Y+Z), z=(X+Y)/(X+Y+Z)
c) x=X/(X-Y+Z), y=Y/(X-Y+Z), z=Z/(X-Y+Z)
d) x=(-X)/(X+Y+Z), y=(-Y)/(X+Y+Z), z=(-Z)/(X+Y+Z)
View Answer

Answer: a
Explanation: Tri-stimulus values are the amounts of red, green and blue needed to form any
particular color and they are denoted as X,Y and Z respectively. A colors the specified by its
trichromatic coefficients x, y & z: =X/(X+Y+Z), y=Y/(X+Y+Z), z=Z/(X+Y+Z).

388. What do you mean by tri-stimulus values?

a) It is the amount of red, green and yellow needed to form any particular color
b) It is the amount of red, green and indigo needed to form any particular color
c) It is the amount of red, yellow and blue needed to form any particular color
d) It is the amount of red, green and blue needed to form any particular color
View Answer

Answer: d
Explanation: The amounts of red, green and blue needed to form any particular color are called
the tri-stimulus values and are denoted by X, Y and Z respectively. A color is then specified by
its trichromatic coefficients, whose equations are formed from tri-stimulus values.

389. What is the value obtained by the sum of the three trichromatic coefficients?
a) 0
b)-1
c) 1
d) Null
View Answer

Answer: c
Explanation: From the equations: x=X/(X+Y+Z), y=Y/(X+Y+Z), z=Z/(X+Y+Z) it is the noted
that sum of the coefficients is x+y+z≅1.

390. What is the name of area of the triangle in C.I E chromatic diagram that shows a typical
range of colors produced by RGB monitors?
a) Color gamut
b) Tricolor
c) Color game
d) Chromatic colors
View Answer

Answer: a
Explanation: The triangle in C.I.E chromatic diagram shows a typical range of colors called the
color gamut produced by RGB monitors. The irregular region inside the triangle is representative
of the color gamut of today‟ s high-quality color printing devices.

Digital Image Processing Questions And

Answers – Color Models
This set of Digital Image Processing Multiple Choice Questions & Answers (MCQs) focuses on
“Color Models”.

391. Color model is also named as (another name):

a) Color space
b) Color gap
c) Color space & color system
d) Color system
View Answer

Answer: c
Explanation: A color model is also called as color space or color system .Its purpose is to
facilitate the specification of colors in some standard, generally accepted way.

392. What do you mean by the term pixel depth?

a) It is the number of bits used to represent each pixel in RGB space
b) It is the number of bytes used to represent each pixel in RGB space
c) It is the number of units used to represent each pixel in RGB space
d) It is the number of mm used to represent each pixel in RGB space
View Answer

Answer: a
Explanation: Images are represented in the RGB color model consist of three component images
one for each primary color. When fed into RGB monitor, these three images combine on the
phosphor screen to produce a composite color image. The number of bits used to represent each
pixel in RGB space is called the pixel depth.

393. How many bit RGB color image is represented by full-color image?
a) 32-bit RGB color image
b) 24-bit RGB color image
c) 16-bit RGB color image
d) 8-bit RGB color image
View Answer

Answer: b
Explanation: The term full-color image is used often to denote a 24-bit RGB color image. The
total number of colors in a 24-bit RGB color image is (28)3=16777216.

394. What is the equation used to obtain S component of each RGB pixel in RGB color format?
a) S=1+3/(R+G+B) [min⁡(R,G,B)].
b) S=1+3/(R+G+B) [max⁡(R,G,B)].
c) S=1-3/(R+G+B) [max⁡(R,G,B)].
d) S=1-3/(R+G+B) [min⁡(R,G,B)].
View Answer

Answer: d
Explanation: If an image is given in RGB format then the saturation component is obtained by
the equation.

395. What is the equation used to obtain I(Intensity) component of each RGB pixel in RGB color
format?
a) I=1/2(R+G+B)
b) I=1/3(R+G+B)
c) I=1/3(R-G-B)
d) I=1/3(R-G+B)
View Answer

Answer: b
Explanation: If an image is given in RGB format then the intensity (I) component is obtained by
the equation, I=1/3 (R+G+B).

396. What is the equation used for obtaining R value in terms of HSI components?
a) R=I[1-(S cos⁡H)/cos⁡(60°-H) ].
b) R=I[1+(S cos⁡H)/cos(120°-H)].
c) R=I[1+(S cos⁡H)/cos⁡(60°-H) ].
d) R=I[1+(S cos⁡H)/cos(30°-H) ].
View Answer

Answer: c
Explanation: Given values of HSI in the interval [0, 1], the R value in the RGB components is
given by the equation:

397. What is the equation used for calculating B value in terms of HSI components?
a) B=I(1+S)
b) B=S(1-I)
c) B=S(1+I)
d) B=I(1-S)
View Answer

Answer: d
Explanation: Given values of HSI in the interval [0, 1], the B value in the RGB components is
given by the equation: B=I(1-S).
advertisement

398. What is the equation used for calculating G value in terms of HSI components?
a) G=3I-(R+B)
b) G=3I+(R+B)
c) G=3I-(R-B)
d) G=2I-(R+B)
View Answer

Answer: a
Explanation: Given values of HSI in the interval [0, 1], the B value in the RGB components is
given by the equation: G=3I-(R+B).

399. Which of the following color models are used for color printing?
a) RGB
b) CMY
c) CMYK
d) CMY and CMYK
View Answer

Answer: d
Explanation: The hardware oriented models which are prominently used in the color printing
process are CMY (cyan, magenta and yellow) and CMYK (cyan, magenta, yellow and black).

Digital Image Processing Questions And

Answers – Regional Descriptors
This set of Digital Image Processing MCQs focuses on “Regional Descriptors”.

400. What does the total number of pixels in the region defines?
a) Perimeter
b) Area
c) Intensity
d) Brightness
View Answer

Answer: b
Explanation: The area of a region is defined by the total number of pixels in the region. The
perimeter is given the number of pixels along the length of the boundary of the region.

401. What is the unit of compactness of a region?

a) Meter
b) Meter2
c) No units
d) Meter-1
View Answer

Answer: c
Explanation: The compactness of a region is defined as (perimeter)2/area. Thus, the compactness
of a region is a dimensionless quantity.

402. For which of the following regions, compactness is minimal?

a) Rectangle
b) Square
c) Irregular
d) Disk
View Answer
Answer: d
Explanation: We know that, compactness of a region is defined as (perimeter)2/area. Thus, disk
shaped region has a minimal value of this ratio and hence the minimal compactness.

403. Compactness is insensitive to orientation.

a) True
b) False
View Answer

Answer: a
Explanation: With the exception of errors introduced by the rotation of the digital image, we can
state that compactness of a region is insensitive to the orientation of the image.

404. Which of the following measures are not used to describe a region?
a) Mean and median of grey values
b) Minimum and maximum of grey values
c) Number of pixels alone
d) Number of pixels above and below mean
View Answer

Answer: c
Explanation: Some of the measures which are used to describe a region are mean and median of
grey values, minimum and maximum of grey values and number of pixels above and below
mean. The area of the region, i.e., the total number of pixels in the region cannot alone describe
the region.

405. We cannot use normalized area as one of the region descriptor.

a) True
b) False
View Answer

Answer: b
Explanation: One of the regional descriptor is normalized area. It can be quite useful to extract
information from the image. In satellite images of earth, the data can be refined by normalized it
with respect to land mass per region.

406. What is the study of properties of a figure that are unaffected by any deformation?
a) Topology
b) Geography
c) Statistics
d) Deformation
View Answer

Answer: a
Explanation: We can define topology as the study of properties of a figure that are unaffected by
any deformation, as long as there is no joining or tearing of the figure. We use topological
properties in the region description.

407. On which of the following operation of an image, the topology of the region changes?
a) Stretching
b) Rotation
c) Folding
d) Change in distance measure
View Answer

Answer: c
Explanation: If a topological descriptor is defined by the number of holes in an image, then the
number of holes will not vary if the image is stretched or rotated. The number of holes in the
region will change only if the image is torn or folded.

408. Topological properties don‟ t depend on the distance measures.

a) True
b) False
View Answer

Answer: a
Explanation: We know that, as stretching affects distance, topological properties do not depend
on the notion of distance or any properties implicitly based on the concept of distance measures.

409. What is the Euler number of the image shown below?

a) 0
b) 1
c) 2
d) -1
View Answer

Answer: d
Explanation: The image shown in the question has two holes and one connected components. So,
the Euler number E is given as 1-2=-1.

410. What is the Euler number of a region with polygonal network containing V,Q and F as the
number of vertices, edges and faces respectively?
a) V+Q+F
b) V-Q+F
c) V+Q-F
d) V-Q-F
View Answer

Answer: b
Explanation: It is very important to classify the polygonal network. Let V,Q and F denote the
number of vertices, edges and faces respectively. Then,
V-Q+F=C-H
Where C,H represents the number of connected components and number of holes in the region
respectively. So, the Euler number E is given by V-Q+F.

411. What is the Euler number of the region shown in the figure below?

a) 1
b) -2
c) -1
d) 2
View Answer

Answer: b
Explanation: The polygonal network given in the figure has 7 vertices, 11 edges and 2 faces.
Thus the Euler number is given by the formula,
E=V-Q+F=7-11+2=-2.
advertisement

412. The texture of the region provides measure of which of the following properties?
a) Smoothness alone
b) Coarseness alone
c) Regularity alone
d) Smoothness, coarseness and regularity
View Answer

Answer: d
Explanation: One of the important approach to region description is texture content. This helps to
provide the measure of some of the important properties of an image like smoothness, coarseness
and regularity of the region.

413. Structural techniques deal with the arrangement of image primitives.

a) True
b) False
View Answer

Answer: a
Explanation: Structural techniques deal with the arrangement of image primitives, such as the
description of the texture based on the regularly spaced parallel lines.

414. Which of the following techniques is based on the Fourier transform?

a) Structural
b) Spectral
c) Statistical
d) Topological
View Answer

Answer: b
Explanation: Spectral techniques are based on properties of the Fourier spectrum and are used
primarily to detect global periodicity in an image by identifying high energy, narrow peaks in the
image.

Digital Image Processing Questions And

Answers – Boundary Descriptors
This set of Digital Image Processing Multiple Choice Questions & Answers (MCQs) focuses on
“Boundary Descriptors”.

415. The length of a boundary is one of the boundary descriptors.

a) True
b) False
View Answer

Answer: a
Explanation: The length of a boundary is one of the simple boundary descriptor. The length of
the boundary is approximately given by the number of pixels along that boundary.

416. Which of the following of a boundary is defined as the line perpendicular to the major axis?
a) Equilateral axis
b) Equidistant axis
c) Minor axis
d) Median axis
View Answer

Answer: c
Explanation: The minor axis of a boundary is defined as the line perpendicular to the major axis
and of such length that a box passing through the outer four points of intersection of the
boundary with the two axes completely encloses the boundary.

417. Which of the following is the useful descriptor of a boundary, whose value is given by the
ratio of length of the major axis to the minor axis?
a) Radius
b) Perimeter
c) Area
d) Eccentricity
View Answer

Answer: d
Explanation: Eccentricity, which is the ratio of major axis to the minor axis which is one of the
important parameter that is used to describe a boundary.

418. The term, Curvature is defined as:

a) Rate of change of area
b) Rate of change of slope
c) Slope
d) Rate of change of diameter
View Answer

Answer: b
Explanation: Curvature of a boundary is defined as the rate of change of slope. In general, as the
boundaries tend to be locally ragged, it is difficult to obtain reliable measures of curvature at a
point on a digital boundary.

419. If the boundary is traversed in the clockwise direction, a vertex point „p‟ is said to be a
part of the convex segment if the rate of change of slope at „p‟ is:
a) Negative
b) Zero
c) Non negative
d) Cannot be determined
View Answer

Answer: c
Explanation: If the boundary is traversed in the clockwise direction and the rate of change of
slope at the vertex point is non negative, then that point is said to be in the convex segment.

420. A point „p‟ is said to be corner point, if the change of slope is less than 100.
a) True
b) False
View Answer
Answer: b
Explanation: In general, a point „p‟ is said to be on the straight line segment if the change
of slope is less than 100 and said to be at the corner point if the change exceeds 900.

421. Based on the 4-directional code, the first difference of smallest magnitude is called as:
a) Shape number
b) Chain number
c) Difference
d) Difference number
View Answer

Answer: a
Explanation: We know that, the first difference of a chain coded boundary depends on the
starting point. Based on such 4 directional boundary, the first difference of smallest magnitude is
called as the shape number of the boundary.

422. The order of shape number for a closed boundary is:

a) Odd
b) Even
c) 1
d) Any positive value
View Answer

Answer: b
Explanation: The order of shape number gives the number of digits in its representation. The
value of this order is even for closed boundary and limits the number of possible different
shapes.

423. What is the order of the shape number of a rectangular boundary with the dimensions of
3×3?
a) 3
b) 6
c) 9
d) 12
View Answer

Answer: d
Explanation: The order of shape number is also defined as the perimeter of the boundary. Since,
given is a rectangle of dimensions 3×3, the perimeter of the rectangle is given as 2(3+3) = 12.
424. The chain code for the following shape is given as:

a) 000030032232221211
b) 003010203310321032
c) 022332103210201330
d) 012302301023100321
View Answer

Answer: a
Explanation: The effective boundary for the given figure is given as

So, the chain code is given as 000030032232221211.

425. What is the shape number for the boundary given in the previous figure?
a) 003231023101230123
b) 012301220331023010
c) 133021030012330120
d) 000310330130031303
View Answer

Answer: d
Explanation: The chain code for the boundary is given as 000030032232221211.
We know that, shape number is the first difference of a chain coded boundary. Thus the shape
number of the above given boundary will be 000310330130031303.

426. Statistical moments are used to describe the shape of boundary segments quantitatively.
a) True
b) False
View Answer
Answer: a
Explanation: Statistical moments like mean, variance and higher order moments can
quantitatively describe the shape of boundary segments.
advertisement

427. Which of the following techniques of boundary descriptions have the physical interpretation
of boundary shape?
a) Fourier transform
b) Statistical moments
c) Laplace transform
d) Curvature
View Answer

Answer: b
Explanation: The statistical moments have an advantage over the other techniques that it helps in
the physical interpretation of the shape of the boundary.

428. Statistical moments is sensitive to rotation.

a) True
b) False
View Answer

Answer: b
Explanation: The statistical moment technique of describing the shape of boundary is insensitive
of the rotation of the shape. If desired, size normalization can be achieved by scaling the range of
values of „g‟ and „r‟ .

Digital Image Processing Questions and

Answers – Spatial and Gray-Level Resolution
and Aliasing
This set of Digital Image Processing online test focuses on “Spatial and Gray-Level Resolution
and Aliasing”.

429. The principal factor to determine the spatial resolution of an image is

a) Quantization
b) Sampling
c) Contrast
d) Dynamic range
View Answer
Answer: b
Explanation: The spatial resolution of an image principally determine by Sampling.

430. What causes the effect, imperceptible set of very fine ridge like structures in areas of
smooth gray levels?
a) Caused by the use of an insufficient number of gray levels in smooth areas of a digital image
b) Caused by the use of huge number of gray levels in smooth areas of a digital image
c) All of the mentioned
d) None of the mentioned
View Answer

Answer: a
Explanation: The set of very fine ridge like structures in area of smooth gray levels generally is
quite visible in images displayed using 16 or less uniformly spaced gray levels.

431. What is the name of the effect caused by the use of an insufficient number of gray levels in
smooth areas of a digital image?
a) Dynamic range
b) Ridging
c) Graininess
d) False contouring
View Answer

Answer: d
Explanation: The effect, caused due to insufficient number of gray levels in smooth areas of a
digital image, is called false contouring, so called because the ridges resemble topographic
contours in a map.

432. Using rough rule of thumb, and assuming powers of 2 for convenience, what image size are
about the smallest images that can be expected to be reasonably free of objectionable sampling
checkerboards and false contouring?
a) 512*512pixels and 16 gray levels
b) 256*256pixels and 64 gray levels
c) 64*64pixels and 16 gray levels
d) 32*32pixels and 32 gray levels
View Answer

Answer: b
Explanation: An image of 128*128pixels shows a pronounced checkerboard pattern, while for
256*256pixels image a minimum gray level of 64 is required to remove false contouring.
Also the effect is quite visible in images displayed using 16 or less uniformly spaced gray levels.

433. What does a shift up and right in the curves of isopreference curve simply means? Verify in
terms of N (number of pixels) and k (L=2k, L is the gray level) values.
a) Smaller values for N and k, implies a better picture quality
b) Larger values for N and k, implies low picture quality
c) Larger values for N and k, implies better picture quality
d) Smaller values for N and k, implies low picture quality
View Answer

Answer: c
Explanation: Points lying on an isopreference curve correspond to images of equal subjective
quality. It was found that the isopreference curves tended to shift right and upward with the
details of the image. So, a shift up and right in the curves simply means larger values for N and
k, implying better picture quality.

434. How does the curves behave to the detail in the image in isopreference curve?
a) Curves tend to become more vertical as the detail in the image decreases
b) Curves tend to become less vertical as the detail in the image increases
c) Curves tend to become less vertical as the detail in the image decreases
d) Curves tend to become more vertical as the detail in the image increases
View Answer

Answer: d
Explanation: The curves in isopreference curve tend to become more vertical as the detail in the
image increases.
The right side graph shows the same, curve for crowd is nearly vertical.

435. For an image with a large amount of detail, if the value of N (number of pixels) is fixed then
what is the gray level dependency in the perceived quality of this type of image?
a) Totally independent of the number of gray levels used
b) Nearly independent of the number of gray levels used
c) Highly dependent of the number of gray levels used
d) None of the mentioned
View Answer

Answer: b
Explanation: For image with high details of the image only a few gray levels may be needed.

436. What is a band-limited function?

a) A function of limited duration whose highest frequency is finite
b) A function of limited duration whose highest frequency is infinite
c) All of the mentioned
d) None of the mentioned
View Answer

Answer: a
Explanation: Functions whose area under the curve is finite can be represented in terms of sines
and cosines of various frequencies. The highest frequency is determined by the sine/cosine
component is the highest “frequency content” of the function. If this highest frequency is finite
and that the function is of unlimited duration, then, these functions are called band-limited
functions.

437. For a band-limited function, which Theorem says that “if the function is sampled at a rate
equal to or greater than twice its highest frequency, the original function can be recovered from
its samples”?
a) Band-limitation theorem
b) Aliasing frequency theorem
c) Shannon sampling theorem
d) None of the mentioned
View Answer

Answer: c
Explanation: For a band-limited function, Shannon sampling theorem says that “if the function is
sampled at a rate equal to or greater than twice its highest frequency, the original function can be
recovered from its samples”.

438. What is the name of the phenomenon that corrupts the sampled image, and how does it
happen?
a) Shannon sampling, if the band-limited functions are undersampled
b) Shannon sampling, if the band-limited functions are oversampled
c) Aliasing, if the band-limited functions are undersampled
d) Aliasing, if the band-limited functions are oversampled
View Answer

Answer: c
Explanation: If the band-limited functions is undersampled, then a phenomenon called aliasing
corrupts the sampled image.
advertisement

439. How aliasing does corrupts the sampled image?

a) By introducing additional frequency components to the sampled function
b) By removing some frequency components from the sampled function
c) All of the mentioned
d) None of the mentioned
View Answer
Answer: a
Explanation: Aliasing corrupts the sampled image by introducing additional frequency
components into the sampled function. These added components are called aliased frequencies.

440. How can one reduce the aliasing effect on an image?

a) By reducing the high-frequency components of image by blurring the image
b) By increasing the high-frequency components of image by blurring the image
c) By reducing the high-frequency components of image by clarifying the image
d) By increasing the high-frequency components of image by clarifying the image
View Answer

Answer: a
Explanation: Aliasing corrupts the sampled image by introducing additional frequency
components to the sampled function. So, the principal approach for reducing the aliasing effects
on an image is to reduce its high-frequency components by blurring the image prior to sampling.

Digital Image Processing Questions and

Answers – Zooming and Shrinking Digital
Images
This set of Digital Image Processing Multiple Choice Questions & Answers (MCQs) focuses on
“Zooming and Shrinking Digital Images”.

441. In terms of Sampling and Quantization, Zooming and Shrinking may be viewed as

a) Oversampling for both

b) Oversampling and Undersampling respectively
c) Undersampling and Oversampling respectively
d) Undersampling for both
View Answer

Answer: b
Explanation: Oversampling increases the number of sample in the image, i.e. like Zooming.
Undersampling decreases the number of samples in the image, i.e. like Shrinking.

442. The two steps: one is the creation of new pixel locations, and other is the assignment of gray
levels to those new locations are involved in
a) Shrinking
b) Zooming
c) All of the mentioned
d) None of the mentioned
View Answer
Answer: b
Explanation: Suppose that we have an image of size500*500pixels and we want to enlarge it 1.5
times to 750*750pixels.
Creation of new Pixels: One of the easiest ways to visualize zooming is laying an imaginary
750*750 grid over the original image and so there would be less spacing by one pixel in the grid
because we are fitting it over a smaller image.
Assignment of gray levels to new locations: In order to perform gray-level assignment for any
point in the overlay, we assign its gray level to the new pixel in the grid its closest pixel in the
original image.
When the above steps are done with all points in the overlay grid, we expand it to the original
specified size to obtain the zoomed image.

443. While Zooming, In order to perform gray-level assignment for any point in the overlay, we
assign its gray level to the new pixel in the grid its closest pixel in the original image. What‟ s
this method of gray-level assignment called?
a) Neighbor Duplication
b) Duplication
c) Nearest neighbor Interpolation
d) None of the mentioned
View Answer

Answer: c
Explanation: Because we look for the closest pixel in the original image and assign its gray level
to the new pixel in the grid.

444. A special case of nearest neighbor Interpolation that just duplicates the pixels the number of
times to achieve the desired size, is known as
a) Bilinear Interpolation
b) Contouring
c) Ridging
d) Pixel Replication
View Answer

Answer: d
Explanation: A special case of nearest neighbor interpolation is Pixel replication and is
applicable when we want to increase the size of an image an integer number of times.
For example, doubling the size of an image is achieved duplicating each column and hence
image size gets doubled in the horizontal direction. Then, we duplicate each row of the enlarged
image to double the size in the vertical direction. Similarly, enlarging the image by any integer
number of times (triple, quadruple, and so on) is possible.

445. Nearest neighbor Interpolation has an undesirable feature, that is

a) Aliasing effect
b) False contouring effect
c) Ridging effect
d) Checkerboard effect
View Answer

Answer: d
Explanation: At greater magnification nearest neighbor Interpolation has the undesirable feature
that it produces a checkerboard effect.

446. What does the bilinear Interpolation do for gray-level assignment?

a) Assign gray level to the new pixel using its right neighbor
b) Assign gray level to the new pixel using its left neighbor
c) Assign gray level to the new pixel using its four nearest neighbors
d) Assign gray level to the new pixel using its eight nearest neighbors
View Answer

Answer: c
Explanation: Bilinear interpolation uses the four nearest neighbors of the new pixel. Let (x‟ ,
y‟ ) is the coordinates of a point in the zoomed image and the gray level assigned to the point
is v(x, y‟ ).
For bilinear interpolation, the assigned gray level is given by
v(x‟ , y‟ ) = ax‟ + by‟ + cx‟ y‟ + d
Here, a, b, c and d are determined from the four equations in four unknowns that can be written
using the four nearest neighbors of point (x‟ , y‟ ).

447. Row-column deletion method of Image Shrinking is an equivalent process to which method
of Zooming?
a) Bilinear Interpolation
b) Contouring
c) Pixel Replication
d) There is no such equivalent process
View Answer

Answer: c
Explanation: Row-column deletion method is used to shrink an image by one-half, one-fourth
and so on.
In case of one-half we delete every other row and column.
advertisement

448. Image Shrinking has an undesirable feature, that is

a) Aliasing effect
b) False contouring effect
c) Ridging effect
d) Checkerboard effect
View Answer

Answer: a
Explanation: Although Image Shrinking uses the grid analogy of nearest neighbor interpolation,
but that we now expand the grid to fit over the original image, do gray-level nearest neighbor or
bilinear interpolation, causing the possible aliasing effect, and then shrink the grid back to its
original specified size.

449. State for the validation of the statement:

“In general-purpose for a digital image of zooming and shrinking, where Bilinear Interpolation
generally is the method of choice over nearest neighbor Interpolation”.
a) True
b) False
View Answer

Answer: a
Explanation: For case 32*32 to 1024*1024, the data is rather lost in nearest neighbor
Interpolation, but the result of Bilinear Interpolation remains reasonably good for the same.
 MODEL QUESTION PAPER

Elective-II

Digital Image Processing (188142/238142)

Branch: Electronics and Telecommunication / E&C engineering.

Q1. A continuous image is digitised at _______ points.

A random

B vertex

C contour

D sampling

Ans.: D

Q2. What is the tool used in tasks such as zooming, shrinking, rotating, etc.?

A Sampling

B Interpolation

C Filters

D None of the Mentioned

Ans.: B

Q3. Quantitatively, spatial resolution cannot be represented in which of the

following ways

A line pairs

B pixels

C dots

D none of the Mentioned

Ans.: D
Q4. The most familiar single sensor used for Image Acquisition is

A Microdensitometer
B Photodiode
C CMOS

D None of the Mentioned

Ans.: B

Q5 The difference is intensity between the highest and the lowest intensity
levels in an image is ___________

A Noise

B Saturation

C Contrast

D Brightness

Ans.: C

Q6. The spatial coordinates of a digital image (x,y) are proportional to:

A Position

B Brightness

C Contrast

D Noise

Ans.: B

Q7. Among the following image processing techniques which is fast, precise
and flexible.

A Optical

B Digital

C Electronic
D Photographic

Ans.: B

Q8. An image is considered to be a function of a(x,y), where a represents:

A Height of image

B Width of image

C Amplitude of image

D Resolution of image

Ans.: C

Q9. What is pixel?

A Pixel is the elements of a digital image

B Pixel is the elements of an analog image

C Pixel is the cluster of a digital image

D Pixel is the cluster of an analog image

Ans.: A

Q10. The range of values spanned by the gray scale is called:

A Dynamic range

B Band range

C Peak range

D Resolution range

Ans.: A

Q11. Which is a colour attribute that describes a pure colour?

A Saturation

B Hue
C Brightness

D Intensity

Ans.: B

Q12. Which means the assigning meaning to a recognized object.

A Interpretation

B Recognition

C Acquisition

D Segmentation

Ans.: A

Q13. What is the expanded form of JPEG?

A Joint Photographic Expansion Group

B Joint Photographic Experts Group

C Joint Photographs Expansion Group

D Joint Photographic Expanded Group

Ans.: B

Q14. The principal factor to determine the spatial resolution of an image is

_______

A Quantization

B Sampling

C Contrast

D Dynamic range

Ans.: B

Q15. How aliasing does corrupt the sampled image?

A By introducing additional frequency components to the sampled function

B By removing some frequency components from the sampled function

C All of the mentioned

D None of the mentioned

Ans.: A

Q16. How can one reduce the aliasing effect on an image?

A By reducing the high-frequency components of image by blurring the image

B By increasing the high-frequency components of image by blurring the

image

C By reducing the high-frequency components of image by clarifying the image

D By increasing the high-frequency components of image by clarifying the

image

Ans.: A

Q17. For pixels p(x, y), q(s, t), the city-block distance between p and q is
defined as:

A D(p, q) = [(x – s)2 + (y – t)2]1/2

B D(p, q) = |x – s| + |y – t|

C D(p, q) = max (|x – s| + |y – t|)

D None of the mentioned

Ans.: B

Q18. The domain that refers to image plane itself and the domain that refers
to Fourier transform of an image is/are :

A Spatial domain in both

B Frequency domain in both

C Spatial domain and Frequency domain respectively

D Frequency domain and Spatial domain respectively

Ans.:

Q19. Using gray-level transformation, the basic function Logarithmic deals with
which of the following transformation?

A Log and inverse-log transformations

B Negative and identity transformations

C nth and nth root transformations

D All of the mentioned

Ans.: A

Q20. If r be the gray-level of image before processing and s after processing

then which expression defines the negative transformation, for the gray-level
in the range [0, L-1]?

As=L–1–r

B s = crᵞ, c and ᵞ are positive constants

C s = c log (1 + r), c is a constant and r ≥ 0

D none of the mentioned

Ans.: A

Q21. Which of the following transformations expands the value of dark pixels
while the higher-level values are being compressed?

A Log transformations
B Inverse-log transformations
C Negative transformations
D None of the mentioned

Ans.: A

Q22. What is gamma correction?

A A process to remove power-law transformation response phenomena

B A process to remove log transformation response phenomena
C A process to correct log transformation response phenomena
D A process to correct power-law transformation response phenomena

Ans.: D

Q23. What is the sum of all components of a normalized histogram?

A 1
B -1
C 0
D None of the mentioned

Ans.: A

Q24. Smoothing filter is used for which of the following work(s)?

A Blurring
B Noise reduction
C All of the mentioned
D None of the mentioned

Ans.: C

Q25. Which of the following filter(s) results in a value as average of pixels in

the
neighborhood of filter mask.

A Smoothing linear spatial filter

B Averaging filter
C Lowpass filter
D All of the mentioned

Ans.: D

Q26. A spatial averaging filter having all the coefficients equal is termed
_________

A A box filter
B A weighted average filter
C A standard average filter
D A median filter

Ans.: A

Q27. An image contains noise having appearance as black and white dots
superimposed on the image. Which of the following noise(s) has the same
appearance?

A Salt-and-pepper noise
B Gaussian noise
C All of the mentioned
D None of the mentioned

Ans.: C

Q28. Which filter(s) used to find the brightest point in the image?

A Median filter
B Max filter
C Mean filter
D All of the mentioned

Ans.: B

Q29. In linear spatial filtering, what is the pixel of the image under mask
corresponding to the mask coefficient w (1, -1), assuming a 3*3 mask?

A f (x, -y)
B f (x + 1, y)
C f (x, y – 1)
D f (x + 1, y – 1)
Ans.: D

Q30. The function of filters in Image sharpening in frequency domain is to

perform reverse operation of which of the following Low pass filter?

A Gaussian Lowpass filter

B Butterworth Lowpass filter
C Ideal Lowpass filter
D None of the Mentioned

Ans.: C

Q31. Which of the following statement(s) is true for the given fact that
“Applying High pass filters has an effect on the background of the output
image”?
A The average background intensity increases to near white of black and white
B The average background intensity reduces to near black
C The average background intensity changes to a value average
D All of the mentioned
Ans.: B

Q32. Of the following, _________ has the maximum frequency.

A UV Rays
B Gamma Rays
C Microwaves
D Radio Waves

Ans.: B

Q33. How is radiance measured?

A lumens
B watts
C armstrong
D hertz

Ans.: B

Q34. Which of the following is used for chest and dental scans?

A Hard X-Rays

B Soft X-Rays

C Radio waves

D Infrared Rays

Ans.: B

Q35. Wavelength and frequency are related as : (c = speed of light)

A c = wavelength / frequency

B frequency = wavelength / c

C wavelength = c * frequency

D c = wavelength * frequency

Ans.: C

Q36. Which of the following is/are more commercially successful image

enhancement method in mask mode radiography, an area under medical
imaging?
A Addition
B Subtraction
C Multiplication
D Division

Ans.: B

Q37. A First derivative in image processing is implemented using which of the

following given operator(s)?
A Magnitude of Gradient vector
B The Laplacian
C All of the mentioned
D None of the mentioned

Ans.: A

Q38. Compressed image can be recovered back by

A image enhancement
B image decompression
C image contrast
D image equalization

Ans.: B

Q39. Coding redundancy works on

A pixels

B matrix

C intensity

D coordinates

Ans.: C

Q40. Every run length pair introduce new

A pixels

B matrix

C frames

D intensity

Ans.: D
Q41. Logic operations between two or more images are performed on pixel-
by-pixel basis, except for one that is performed on a single image. Which one

A AND
B OR
C NOT
D None of the mentioned
Ans.: C

Q42. How many bit RGB color image is represented by full-color image?

A 32-bit RGB color image

B 24-bit RGB color image
C 16-bit RGB color image
D 8-bit RGB color image

Ans.: B

Q43. Which file types use Lossless compression?

A JPEG
B GIF
C BMP
D PNG

Ans.: B,D

Q44. Makes the file smaller by deleting parts of the file permanently (forever)

A Lossy Compression
B Lossless Compression

Ans.: A

Q45. What would you use compression for?

A Making an image file smaller

B Modifying an image

Ans.: A

Q46. Which of these is an advantage for Lossy compression?

A The file size becomes significantly (much) smaller

B The file size does not become much smaller than 50%
C none of the above

Ans.: A

Q47. For line detection we use mask that is

A Gaussian
B laplacian
C ideal
D butterworth

Ans.: B

Q48. A typical Fourier Spectrum with spectrum value ranging from 0 to 106,
which of the following transformation is better to apply.

A nonzero
B zero
C positive
D negative

Ans.: B

Q49. For edge detection we observes

A intensity transition
B shape transition
C color transition
D sign transition
Ans.: D

Q50. Thresholding is the example of

A discontinuity
B similarity
C continuity
D recognition

Ans.: A

Q51. Imaging in geological exploration, industry and medicine uses

A audio
B sound
C sunlight
D ultraviolet

Ans.: B

Q52. Which waves can penetrate through clouds

A ultrasonic
B radar
C visible and infrared
D Infrared
Ans.: B

Q53. Imaging system produces

A high resolution image

B voltage signal
C digitized image
D analog signal

Ans.: C
Q54. The digitization process i.e. the digital image has M rows and N columns,
requires decisions about values for M, N, and for the number, L, of gray levels
allowed for each pixel. The value M and N have to be:

A M and N have to be positive integer

B M and N have to be negative integer
C M have to be negative and N have to be positive integer

D M have to be positive and N have to be negative integer

Ans.: A

Q55. After digitization process a digital image with M rows and N columns
have to be positive and for the number, L, max gray levels i.e. an integer
power of 2 for each pixel. Then, the number b, of bits required to store a
digitized image is:

A b=M*N*k
B b=M*N*L
C b=M*L*k
D b=L*N*k

Ans.: A

Q56. In _______ image we notice that the components of histogram are

concentrated on the low side on intensity scale.

A bright
B dark
C colourful
D All of the Mentioned

Ans.: B

Q57. Histogram Equalization is mainly used for ________________

A Image enhancement
B Blurring
C Contrast adjustment
D None of the Mentioned

Ans.: A

Q58. Which type of Histogram Processing is suited for minute detailed

enhancements?

A Intensive
B Local
C Global
D Random

Ans.: A

Q59. Which type of Histogram Processing is suited for minute detailed

enhancements?

A Intensive

B Local

C Global

D Random

Ans.: B

Q60. The characteristics of the low pass filter h(x, y) is/are_________

A Has a dominant component at origin

B Has concentric, circular components about the centre component

C All of the mentioned

D None of the mentioned

Ans.: C
 Model Question Paper
Subject :Digital Image Processing

Branch: E&TC

Class: BE

Semester:VIII

1)Intensity levels in 8-bit image are

A)128

B)255

C)256

D)512

Ans:C

2) In image accentuating a specific range is called

A) Slicing

B) Color Slicing

C) Enhancing

D) Cutting

Ans:B

3) A type of Image is called as VHRR image. What is the definition of VHRR image?

A) Very High Range Resolution image

B) Very High Resolution Range image

C) Very High Resolution Radiometer image

D) Very High Range Radiometer Image

Ans:C

4) Low pass filtering can be applied in following areas

A) The field of machine perception, with application of character recognition

B) In field of printing and publishing industry

C)In field of processing satellite and aerial images

D)All of the mentioned

Ans:D

5)Black Color is represented by

A) 0

B)255

C)256

D)1

Ans:A

6) The Image sharpening in frequency domain can be achieved by which of the following method(s)?

A) Attenuating the high frequency components

B) Attenuating the low-frequency components

C) All of the mentioned

D) None of the mentioned

Ans:B

7) The function of filters in Image sharpening in frequency domain is to perform reverse operation of
which of the following Lowpass filter?

A) Gaussian Lowpass filter

B) Butterworth Lowpass filter

C) Ideal Lowpass filter

D) None

Ans:C

8) The edges and other abrupt changes in gray-level of an image are associated with_________

A) High frequency components

B) Low frequency components

C) Edges with high frequency and other abrupt changes in gray-level with low frequency components

D) Edges with low frequency and other abrupt changes in gray-level with high frequency components

Ans:A

9)Gradient computation equation is

A) |Gx|+|Gy|

B) |Gx|-|Gy|

C) |Gx|/|Gy|

D) |Gx|x|Gy|

Ans:A
10) Which of the following statement(s) is true for the given fact that “Applying Highpass filters has an
effect on the background of the output image”?

A) The average background intensity increases to near white

B) The average background intensity reduces to near black

C) The average background intensity changes to a value average of black and white

D) All of the mentioned

Ans:B

11)Gaussian noise is referred to as

A) Red Noise

B) White Noise

C) Black Noise

D) Normal Noise

Ans:D

12)Convolution in spatial domain is multiplication in

A) Frequency

B) Time

C) Spatial

D) Plane

Ans:A

13) In medicine radio waves are used in

A) MRI

B) surgery

C) CT scan

D) Injections

Ans:A
14 Which one is not the process of image processing

A) high level

B) low level

C) last level

D) Mid level

Ans:C

15) Filters that replaces pixel value with medians of intensity levels is

A) Arithematic mean Filter

B) Geometric mean Filter

C) Median Filter

D) Sequence Mean Filter

Ans:C

16)The spatial coordinates of a digital image (x,y) are proportional to

A) Position

B) Brightness

C) Contrast

D) Saturation

Ans:B

17)Among the following image processing techniques which is fast, precise and flexible

A) Optical

B) Digital

C) Electronic

D) Photographic

Ans:B

18)An image is considered to be a function of a(x,y), where a represents

A) Height of image

B) Width of image

C) Amplitude of image

D) Resolution of image

Ans:C
19)The range of values spanned by the gray scale is called

A) Dynamic range

B) Band range

C) Peak range

D) Resolution range

Ans:A

20) Which is a colour attribute that describes a pure colour?

A) Saturation

B) Hue

C) Brightness

D) Intensity

Ans:B

21) Which one is not the area of digital image processing

A) law enforcement

B) lithography

C) medicine

D) voice calling

Ans:D

22)Which means the assigning meaning to a recognized object

A) Interpretation

B) Recognition

C) Acquisition

D) Segmentation

Ans:A

23)A typical size comparable in quality to monochromatic TV image is of size

A) 256 X 256

B) 512 X 512

C) 1920 X 1080

D) 1080 X 1080

Ans:B
24)The number of gray values are integer powers of

A) 4

B)2

C)8

D)1

Ans:B

25)What is the first and foremost step in Image Processing?

A) Image restoration

B) Image enhancement

C) Image acquisition

D) Segmentation

Ans:C

26)In which step of processing, the images are subdivided successively into smaller regions?

A) Image enhancement

B) Image acquisition

C) Segmentation

D) wavelet

Ans:D

27)What is the next step in image processing after compression?

A) Wavelets

B) Representation and description

C) Segmentation

D) Morphological processing

Ans:D

28) What is the step that is performed before color image processing in image processing?

A) Wavelets and multi resolution processing

B) Image enhancement

C) Image acquisition

D) Image restoration

Ans:D
29)How many number of steps are involved in image processing?

A) 10

B) 11

C) 9

D) 12

Ans:A

30)What is the expanded form of JPEG?

A) Joint Photographic Expansion Group

B) Joint Photographic Experts Group

C) Joint Photographic Expanded Group

D) Joint Photographs Expansion Group

Ans:B

31)Which of the following step deals with tools for extracting image components those are useful in
the representation and description of shape?

A) Representation & description

B) Segmentation

C) Compression

D) Morphological processing

Ans:D

32)In which step of the processing, assigning a label (e.g., “vehicle”) to an object based on its
descriptors is done?

A) Object recognition

B) Morphological processing

C) Representation & description

D) Segmentation

Ans:A

33)What role does the segmentation play in image processing?

A) Deals with extracting attributes that result in some quantitative information of interest

B) Deals with techniques for reducing the storage required saving an image, or the bandwidth
required transmitting it

C) Deals with property in which images are subdivided successively into smaller regions
D) Deals with partitioning an image into its constituent parts or objects

Ans:D

34)What is the correct sequence of steps in image processing?

A) Image acquisition->Image enhancement->Image restoration->Color image processing-

>Compression->Wavelets and multi resolution processing->Morphological processing-
>Segmentation->Representation & description->Object recognition

B) Image acquisition->Image enhancement->Image restoration->Color image processing->Wavelets

and multi resolution processing->Compression->Morphological processing->Segmentation-
>Representation & description->Object recognition

C) Image acquisition->Image enhancement->Color image processing->Image restoration->Wavelets

and multi resolution processing->Compression->Morphological processing->Segmentation-
>Representation & description->Object recognition

D) Image acquisition->Image enhancement->Image restoration->Color image processing->Wavelets

and multi resolution processing->Compression->Morphological processing->Representation &
description->Segmentation->Object recognition

Ans:B

35) A structured light illumination technique was used for lens deformation

A) lens deformation

B) inverse filtering

C) lens enhancement

D)lens error

Ans:A

36) Tomography is the algorithm that uses images

A) edges

B) slices

C) boundaries

D) illumination

Ans:B
37) Major use of gamma rays imaging includes

A) Radars

B) astronomical observations

C) industry

D) lithography

Ans:B

38) Angiography uses what technique

A) Image addition

B) Image Multiplication

C) Image division

D) None

Ans:B

39)What is the sum of the coefficient of the mask defined using HPF?

A) 1

B) -1

C) 0

D) None of the mentioned

Ans:C

40)Which is not an example of image processing

A ) thumb prints

B) paper currency

C)mp3

D)lisence plate detection

Ans:C

41) An image is a two dimensional function where x and y are

A) spatial coordinates

B) frequency coordinates

C)time coordinates

D) real coordinates

Ans:A
42) Lithography uses

A) ultraviolet

B) x-rays

C)gamma

D) visible rays

Ans:A

43) Image subtraction is used for

A)color enhancement

B) Frequency enhancement

C)Spatial enhancement

D)Detection

Ans:D

44) Sensor strip mounted in a ring configuration is used in

A) microscopy

B) medical

C) industry

D) radar

Ans:B

45)1024 x 1024 image has resolution of

A) 1048576

B) 1148576

C) 1248576

D) 1348576

Ans:A
46)The lens is made up of concentric layers of

A) strong cells

B) inner cells

C) fibrous cells

D) outer cells

Ans:C

47)Radio wave band encompasses

A) audio

B) AM

C) FM

D) Both b and c

Ans:D

48)L = 23 would have

A) 2 levels

B) 4levels

C) 8 levels

D) 16 levels

Ans:C

49)Digital images are displayed as a discrete set if

A) values

B) numbers

C) frequencies

D) intensities

Ans:D

50)In MxN, M is no of

A) intensity levels

B) colors

C) rows

D) columns

Ans:C
51) Each element of the matrix is called

A) dots

B) coordinate

C) pixels

D) value

Ans:C

52)Imaging system produces

A) high resolution image

B) low resolution image

C) digitized image

D) analog signal

Ans:C

53)Digitizing the coordinate values is called

A) radiance

B) variance

C) sampling

D) quantization

Ans:C

54) The smallest element of an image is called

A) pel

B) dot

C) resolution

D) digits

Ans:A

55)Types of imaging sensors are

A) two

B) three

C) four

D) five

Ans:B

56)E = hv in this expression, h is called

A) speed of light

B) light constant

C) plank's constant

D) acceleration constant

Ans:C

57)DPI stands for

A) dots per image

B) dots per inches

C) dots per intensity

D) diameter per inches

Ans:B

58)No of bits to store image is denoted by the formula

A) b = NxK

B) b = MxN

C) b = MxNxK

D) b = MxK

Ans: C

59) MRI in imaging stands for

A) magnetic resonance imaging

B) magnetic resistance imaging

C) magnetic resonance intensity

D) major resonance imaging

Ans:A

60)Digitizing the amplitude values is called

A) radiance

B) illuminance

C) sampling

D) quantization

Ans:D
 Model Question Paper
Subject: Digital Image Processing Branch:E&TC

Class:BE Semester:VIII

1. What is the third step in digital image processing?

(A) Image Restoration

(B) Segmentation

(C) Image Enhancement

(D) Colour Image Processing

Ans: a

2. Digitizing the coordinate values of a continuous image is called

(A) Compression

(B) Quantization

(C) Sampling

(D) Segmentation

Ans: c

3. _____ is the total amount of energy that flows from light source.

(A) Radiance

(B) Darkness

(C) Brightness

(D) Luminance

Ans: a

4.Lossy compression is useful in

(A) Military imaging

(B) Space imaging

(C) Medical imaging

(D) Television broad casting

Ans: d

5. A continuous image is digitised at _______ points.

a) random
b) vertex
c) contour
d) sampling

Ans: d

6.The transition between continuous values of the image function and its digital equivalent is
called ______________
a) Quantisation
b) Sampling
c) Rasterisation
d) None of the Mentioned

Ans:a

7. Images quantised with insufficient brightness levels will lead to the occurrence of
____________
a) Pixillation
b) Blurring
c) False Contours

d)none of the above

Ans:c
8.The smallest discernible change in intensity level is called ____________
a) Intensity Resolution
b) Contour
c) Saturation
d) Contrast

Ans:a

9. What is the tool used in tasks such as zooming, shrinking, rotating, etc.?
a) Sampling
b) Interpolation
c) Filters

d)none of the above

Ans:b

10. The type of Interpolation where for each new location the intensity of the immediate pixel
is assigned is ___________
a) bicubic interpolation
b) cubic interpolation
c) bilinear interpolation
d) nearest neighbour interpolation

Ans:d

11. The type of Interpolation where the intensity of the FOUR neighbouring pixels is used to
obtain intensity a new location is called __________

a) Cubic interpolation
b) nearest neighbour interpolation
c) bilinear interpolation
d) bicubic interpolation

Ans: b

12. Dynamic range of imaging system is a ratio where the upper limit is determined by
a)Saturation
b) Noise
c) Brightness
d) Contrast
Ans:a

13. For Dynamic range ratio the lower limit is determined by

a) Saturation
b) Brightness
c) Noise

d) Contrast

Ans:c

14. Quantitatively, spatial resolution cannot be represented in which of the following ways
a) line pairs
b) pixels
c) dots
d) none of the Mentioned

Ans:d

15.A geometry consisting of in-line arrangement of sensors for image acquisition

a) A photodiode
b) Sensor strips
c) Sensor arrays
d) CMOS

Ans:b

16. The process of using known data to estimate values at unknown locations is called
a) Acquisition
b) Interpolation
c) Pixelation
d) None of the Mentioned

Ans:b

17. What is the first and foremost step in Image Processing?

a) Image restoration
b) Image enhancement
c) Image acquisition
d) Segmentation

Ans:c

18. In which step of processing, the images are subdivided successively into smaller regions?
a) Image enhancement
b) Image acquisition
c) Segmentation
d) Wavelets

Ans:c

19. How many number of steps are involved in image processing?

a) 10
b) 9
c) 11
d) 12

Ans:a

20. What is the expanded form of JPEG?

a) Joint Photographic Expansion Group
b) Joint Photographic Experts Group
c) Joint Photographs Expansion Group
d) Joint Photographic Expanded Group

Ans:b
21.The principal factor to determine the spatial resolution of an image is _______
a) Quantization
b) Sampling
c) Contrast
d) Dynamic range

Ans:b

22. What causes the effect, imperceptible set of very fine ridge like structures in areas of
smooth gray levels?
a) Caused by the use of an insufficient number of gray levels in smooth areas of a digital
image
b) Caused by the use of huge number of gray levels in smooth areas of a digital image
c) All of the mentioned
d) None of the mentioned

Ans:a

23. What is the name of the effect caused by the use of an insufficient number of gray levels
in smooth areas of a digital image?
a) Dynamic range
b) Ridging
c) Graininess
d) False contouring

Ans:d

24. Using rough rule of thumb, and assuming powers of 2 for convenience, what image size
are about the smallest images that can be expected to be reasonably free of objectionable
sampling checkerboards and false contouring?
a) 512*512pixels and 16 gray levels
b) 256*256pixels and 64 gray levels
c) 64*64pixels and 16 gray levels
d) 32*32pixels and 32 gray levels

Ans:b
25. What does a shift up and right in the curves of isopreference curve simply means? Verify
in terms of N (number of pixels) and k (L=2k, L is the gray level) values.
a) Smaller values for N and k, implies a better picture quality
b) Larger values for N and k, implies low picture quality
c) Larger values for N and k, implies better picture quality
d) Smaller values for N and k, implies low picture quality

Ans:c

26. How does the curves behave to the detail in the image in isopreference curve?
a) Curves tend to become more vertical as the detail in the image decreases
b) Curves tend to become less vertical as the detail in the image increases
c) Curves tend to become less vertical as the detail in the image decreases
d) Curves tend to become more vertical as the detail in the image increases

Ans:d

27. For an image with a large amount of detail, if the value of N (number of pixels) is fixed
then what is the gray level dependency in the perceived quality of this type of image?
a) Totally independent of the number of gray levels used
b) Nearly independent of the number of gray levels used
c) Highly dependent of the number of gray levels used
d) None of the mentioned

Ans:b

28. What is a band-limited function?

a) A function of limited duration whose highest frequency is finite
b) A function of limited duration whose highest frequency is infinite
c) All of the mentioned
d) None of the mentioned

Ans:a
29. For a band-limited function, which Theorem says that “if the function is sampled at a rate
equal to or greater than twice its highest frequency, the original function can be recovered
from its samples”?
a) Band-limitation theorem
b) Aliasing frequency theorem
c) Shannon sampling theorem
d) None of the mentioned
Ans:c

30. What is the name of the phenomenon that corrupts the sampled image, and how does it
happen?
a) Shannon sampling, if the band-limited functions are undersampled
b) Shannon sampling, if the band-limited functions are oversampled
c) Aliasing, if the band-limited functions are undersampled
d) Aliasing, if the band-limited functions are oversampled

Ans:c

31. How aliasing does corrupts the sampled image?

a) By introducing additional frequency components to the sampled function
b) By removing some frequency components from the sampled function
c) All of the mentioned
d) None of the mentioned

Ans:a

32. How can one reduce the aliasing effect on an image?

a) By reducing the high-frequency components of image by blurring the image
b) By increasing the high-frequency components of image by blurring the image
c) By reducing the high-frequency components of image by clarifying the image
d) By increasing the high-frequency components of image by clarifying the image
Ans:a

33If h(rk) = nk, rk the kthgray level and nk total pixels with gray level rk, is a histogram in gray
level range [0, L – 1]. Then how can we normalize a histogram?
a) If each value of histogram is added by total number of pixels in image, say n, p(rk)=nk+n
b) If each value of histogram is subtracted by total number of pixels in image, say n, p(rk)=nk-
n
c) If each value of histogram is multiplied by total number of pixels in image, say n,
p(rk)=nk * n
d) If each value of histogram is divided by total number of pixels in image, say n, p(rk)=nk / n

Ans:d

34. What is the sum of all components of a normalized histogram?

a) 1
b) -1
c) 0
d) None of the mentioned

Ans:a

35. A low contrast image will have what kind of histogram when, the histogram, h(rk) = nk,
rk the kthgray level and nk total pixels with gray level rk, is plotted nk versus rk?
a) The histogram that are concentrated on the dark side of gray scale
b) The histogram whose component are biased toward high side of gray scale
c) The histogram that is narrow and centered toward the middle of gray scale
d) The histogram that covers wide range of gray scale and the distribution of pixel is
approximately uniform

Ans:c

36. A bright image will have what kind of histogram, when the histogram, h(rk) = nk, rk the
kthgray level and nk total pixels with gray level rk, is plotted nk versus rk?
a) The histogram that are concentrated on the dark side of gray scale
b) The histogram whose component are biased toward high side of gray scale
c) The histogram that is narrow and centered toward the middle of gray scale
d) The histogram that covers wide range of gray scale and the distribution of pixel is
approximately uniform

Ans:b

37. A high contrast image and a dark image will have what kind of histogram respectively,
when the histogram, h(rk) = nk, rk the kthgray level and nk total pixels with gray level rk, is
plotted nk versus rk?
The histogram that are concentrated on the dark side of gray scale.
The histogram whose component are biased toward high side of gray scale.
The histogram that is narrow and centered toward the middle of gray scale.
The histogram that covers wide range of gray scale and the distribution of pixel is
approximately uniform.
a) I) And II) respectively
b) III) And II) respectively
c) II) And IV) respectively
d) IV) And I) respectively

Ans:d

38. The transformation s = T(r) producing a gray level s for each pixel value r of input image.
Then, if the T(r) is single valued in interval 0 ≤ r ≤ 1, what does it signifies?
a) It guarantees the existence of inverse transformation
b) It is needed to restrict producing of some inverted gray levels in output
c) It guarantees that the output gray level and the input gray level will be in same range
d) All of the mentioned

Ans:a

39. The transformation s = T(r) producing a gray level s for each pixel value r of input image.
Then, if the T(r) is monotonically increasing in interval 0 ≤ r ≤ 1, what does it signifies?
a) It guarantees the existence of inverse transformation
b) It is needed to restrict producing of some inverted gray levels in output
c) It guarantees that the output gray level and the input gray level will be in same range
d) All of the mentioned
Ans:b

40. The transformation s = T(r) producing a gray level s for each pixel value r of input image.
Then, if the T(r) is satisfying 0 ≤ T(r) ≤ 1 in interval 0 ≤ r ≤ 1, what does it signifies?
a) It guarantees the existence of inverse transformation
b) It is needed to restrict producing of some inverted gray levels in output
c) It guarantees that the output gray level and the input gray level will be in same range
d) All of the mentioned

Ans:c

41. What is the full form for PDF, a fundamental descriptor of random variables i.e. gray
values in an image?
a) Pixel distribution function
b) Portable document format
c) Pel deriving function
d) Probability density function
Ans:d

42. What is the full form of CDF?

a) Cumulative density function
b) Contour derived function
c) Cumulative distribution function
d) None of the mentioned

Ans:c

43. For the transformation T(r) = [∫0r pr(w) dw], r is gray value of input image, pr(r) is PDF of
random variable r and w is a dummy variable. If, the PDF are always positive and that the
function under integral gives the area under the function, the transformation is said to be
__________
a) Single valued
b) Monotonically increasing
c) All of the mentioned
d) None of the mentioned

Ans:c

44. The transformation T (rk) = ∑k(j=0) nj /n, k = 0, 1, 2, …, L-1, where L is max gray value
possible and r-k is the kthgray level, is called _______
a) Histogram linearization
b) Histogram equalization
c) All of the mentioned
d) None of the mentioned

Ans:c

45. If the histogram of same images, with different contrast, are different, then what is the
relation between the histogram equalized images?
a) They look visually very different from one another
b) They look visually very similar to one another
c) They look visually different from one another just like the input images
d) None of the mentioned

Ans:b

46.In 4-neighbours of a pixel p, how far are each of the neighbours located from p?
a) one pixel apart
b) four pixels apart
c) alternating pixels
d) none of the Mentioned

Ans:a

47. If S is a subset of pixels, pixels p and q are said to be ____________ if there exists a path
between them consisting of pixels entirely in S.
a) continuous
b) ambiguous
c) connected
d) none of the Mentioned

Ans:c

48. If R is a subset of pixels, we call R a _________ of the image if R is a connected set.

a) Disjoint
b) Region
c) Closed
d) Adjacent

Ans:b

49. Two regions are said to be ___________ if their union forms a connected set.
a) Adjacent
b) Disjoint
c) Closed
d) None of the Mentioned
Ans:a

50. If an image contains K disjoint regions, what does the union of all the regions represent?
a) Background
b) Foreground
c) Outer Border
d) Inner Border

Ans:b

51. For a region R, the set of points that are adjacent to the complement of R is called as
________
a) Boundary
b) Border
c) Contour
d) All of the Mentioned
Ans:d

52. The distance between pixels p and q, the pixels have a distance less than or equal to some
value of radius r centred at (x,y) is called :
a) Euclidean distance
b) City-Block distance
c) Chessboard distance
d) None of the Mentioned

Ans:a

53. The distance between pixels p and q, the pixels have a distance less than or equal to some
value of radius r, form a diamond centred at (x,y) is called :
a) Euclidean distance
b) Chessboard distance
c) City-Block distance
d) None of the Mentioned

Ans:c

54. The distance between pixels p and q, the pixels have a distance less than or equal to some
value of radius r, form a square centred at (x,y) is called :
a) Euclidean distance
b) Chessboard distance
c) City-Block distance
d) None of the Mentioned

Ans:b

55. Which of the following is NOT is not a type of Adjacency?

a) 4-Adjacency
b) 8-Adjacency
c) m-Adjacency
d) None of the Mentioned
Ans:d

56. What is accepting or rejecting certain frequency components called as?

a) Filtering
b) Eliminating
c) Slicing
d) None of the Mentioned

Ans:a

57. A filter that passes low frequencies is _____________

a) Band pass filter
b) High pass filter
c) Low pass filter
d) None of the Mentioned

Ans:c

58. What is the process of moving a filter mask over the image and computing the sum of
products at each location called as?
a) Convolution
b) Correlation
c) Linear spatial filtering
d) Non linear spatial filtering

Ans:b

59. The standard deviation controls ___________ of the bell (2-D Gaussian function of bell
shape).
a) Size
b) Curve
c) Tightness
d) None of the Mentioned
Ans:c

60. What is required to generate an M X N linear spatial filter?

a) MN mask coefficients
b) M+N coordinates
c) MN spatial coefficients
d) None of the Mentioned

Ans:a
3/25/2021 MCQ based test on unit 2 of DIVP

MCQ based test on unit 2 of DIVP

*Required

1. Email address *

2. Name of the student *

3. Roll number *

4. Class and division *

MCQ based test on unit 2 of DIVP

5. What is the output of a smoothing, linear spatial filter? * 1 point

Mark only one oval.

Median of pixels

Maximum of pixels

Minimum of pixels

Average of pixels

https://docs.google.com/forms/d/1zL9C8JhoyjkARhhXWNWXw5PMUGIJKbCR7cgS1UcbbLA/edit 1/15
3/25/2021 MCQ based test on unit 2 of DIVP

6. Box filter is a type of smoothing filter. * 1 point

Mark only one oval.

True

False

7. If the size of the averaging filter used to smooth the original image to first 1 point

image is 9, then what would be the size of the averaging filter used in
smoothing the same original picture to second in second image? *

Mark only one oval.

15

https://docs.google.com/forms/d/1zL9C8JhoyjkARhhXWNWXw5PMUGIJKbCR7cgS1UcbbLA/edit 2/15
3/25/2021 MCQ based test on unit 2 of DIVP

8. The mask shown in the figure below belongs to which type of filter? * 1 point

Mark only one oval.

Sharpening spatial filter

Median filter

Sharpening frequency filter

Smoothening spatial filter

9. Which of the following expression is used to denote spatial domain 1 point

process? *

Mark only one oval.

g(x,y)=T[f(x,y)]

f(x+y)=T[g(x+y)]

g(xy)=T[f(xy)]

g(x-y)=T[f(x-y)]

10. Which of the following shows three basic types of functions used 1 point

frequently for image enhancement? *

Mark only one oval.

Linear, logarithmic and inverse law

Power law, logarithmic and inverse law

Linear, logarithmic and power law

Linear, exponential and inverse law

https://docs.google.com/forms/d/1zL9C8JhoyjkARhhXWNWXw5PMUGIJKbCR7cgS1UcbbLA/edit 3/15
3/25/2021 MCQ based test on unit 2 of DIVP

11. Which expression is obtained by performing the negative transformation 1 point

on the negative of an image with gray levels in the range[0,L-1] ? *

Mark only one oval.

s=L+1-r

s=L+1+r

s=L-1-r

s=L-1+r

12. What is the general form of representation of log transformation? * 1 point

Mark only one oval.

s=clog10(1/r)

s=clog10(1+r)

s=clog10(1*r)

s=clog10(1-r)

13. What is the name of process used to correct the power-law response 1 point

phenomena? *

Mark only one oval.

Beta correction

Alpha correction

Gamma correction

Pie correctionon

https://docs.google.com/forms/d/1zL9C8JhoyjkARhhXWNWXw5PMUGIJKbCR7cgS1UcbbLA/edit 4/15
3/25/2021 MCQ based test on unit 2 of DIVP

14. Which of the following transformation function requires much information 1 point

to be specified at the time of input? *

Mark only one oval.

Log transformation

Power transformation

Piece-wise transformation

Linear transformation

15. In contrast stretching, if r1=s1 and r2=s2 then which of the following is 1 point

true? *

Mark only one oval.

The transformation is not a linear function that produces no changes in gray levels

The transformation is a linear function that produces no changes in gray levels

The transformation is a linear function that produces changes in gray levels

The transformation is not a linear function that produces changes in gray levels

16. In contrast stretching, if r1=r2, s1=0 and s2=L-1 then which of the following 1 point

is true? *

Mark only one oval.

The transformation becomes a thresholding function that creates an octal image

The transformation becomes a override function that creates an octal image

The transformation becomes a thresholding function that creates a binary image

The transformation becomes a thresholding function that do not create an octal

image

https://docs.google.com/forms/d/1zL9C8JhoyjkARhhXWNWXw5PMUGIJKbCR7cgS1UcbbLA/edit 5/15
3/25/2021 MCQ based test on unit 2 of DIVP

17. In which type of slicing, highlighting a specific range of gray levels in an 1 point
image often is desired? *

Mark only one oval.

Gray-level slicing

Bit-plane slicing

Contrast stretching

Byte-level slicing

18. Which of the following depicts the main functionality of the Bit-plane 1 point

slicing? *

Mark only one oval.

Highlighting a specific range of gray levels in an image

Highlighting the contribution made to total image appearance by specific bits

Highlighting the contribution made to total image appearance by specific byte

Highlighting the contribution made to total image appearance by specific pixels

19. Which of the following is the primary objective of sharpening of an image? 1 point

Mark only one oval.

Blurring the image

Highlight fine details in the image

Increase the brightness of the image

Decrease the brightness of the image

https://docs.google.com/forms/d/1zL9C8JhoyjkARhhXWNWXw5PMUGIJKbCR7cgS1UcbbLA/edit 6/15
3/25/2021 MCQ based test on unit 2 of DIVP

20. In spatial domain, which of the following operation is done on the pixels in 1 point

sharpening the image? *

Mark only one oval.

Integration

Average

Median

Differentiation

21. Which of the following is the valid response when we apply a first 1 point

derivative? *

Mark only one oval.

Non-zero at flat segments

Zero at the onset of gray level step

Zero in flat segments

Zero along ramps

22. Which of the following is not a valid response when we apply a second 1 point

derivative? *

Mark only one oval.

Zero response at onset of gray level step

Nonzero response at onset of gray level step

Zero response at flat segments

Nonzero response along the ramps

https://docs.google.com/forms/d/1zL9C8JhoyjkARhhXWNWXw5PMUGIJKbCR7cgS1UcbbLA/edit 7/15
3/25/2021 MCQ based test on unit 2 of DIVP

23. Which of the following derivatives produce a double response at step 1 point

changes in gray level? *

Mark only one oval.

First order derivative

Third order derivative

Second order derivative

First and second order derivatives

24. The lowpass filtering process can be applied in which of the following 1 point

area(s)? *

Mark only one oval.

The field of machine perception, with application of character recognition

In field of printing and publishing industry

In field of processing satellite and aerial images

All of the mentioned

25. The edges and other abrupt changes in gray-level of an image are 1 point

associated with_________ *

Mark only one oval.

High frequency components

Low frequency components

Edges with high frequency and other abrupt changes in gray-level with low
frequency components

Edges with low frequency and other abrupt changes in gray-level with high
frequency components

https://docs.google.com/forms/d/1zL9C8JhoyjkARhhXWNWXw5PMUGIJKbCR7cgS1UcbbLA/edit 8/15
3/25/2021 MCQ based test on unit 2 of DIVP

26. If D0 is the cutoff distance measured from origin of frequency rectangle 1 point

and D(u, v) is the distance from point(u, v). Then what value does an Ideal
Highpass filter will give if D(u, v) ≤ D0 andifD(u, v) >D0? *

Mark only one oval.

0 and 1 respectively

1 and 0 respectively

1 in both case

0 in both case

27. A bright image will have what kind of histogram, when the histogram, h(rk) 1 point
= nk, rk the kth gray level and nk total pixels with gray level rk, is plotted nk
versus rk? *

Mark only one oval.

The histogram that are concentrated on the dark side of gray scale

The histogram whose component are biased toward high side of gray scale

The histogram that is narrow and centered toward the middle of gray scale

The histogram that covers wide range of gray scale and the distribution of pixel is
approximately uniform

28. The transformation s = T(r) producing a gray level s for each pixel value r of 1 point

input image. Then, if the T(r) is single valued in interval 0 ≤ r ≤ 1, what does
it signifies? *

Mark only one oval.

It guarantees the existence of inverse transformation

It is needed to restrict producing of some inverted gray levels in output

It guarantees that the output gray level and the input gray level will be in same
range

All of the mentioned

https://docs.google.com/forms/d/1zL9C8JhoyjkARhhXWNWXw5PMUGIJKbCR7cgS1UcbbLA/edit 9/15
3/25/2021 MCQ based test on unit 2 of DIVP

29. The transformation s = T(r) producing a gray level s for each pixel value r of 1 point
input image. Then, if the T(r) is monotonically increasing in interval 0 ≤ r ≤
1, what does it signifies? *

Mark only one oval.

It guarantees the existence of inverse transformation

It is needed to restrict producing of some inverted gray levels in output

It guarantees that the output gray level and the input gray level will be in same
range

All of the mentioned

30. For the transformation T(r) = [∫0r pr(w) dw], r is gray value of input image, 1 point

pr(r) is PDF of random variable r and w is a dummy variable. If, the PDF are
always positive and that the function under integral gives the area under
the function, the transformation is said to be __________ *

Mark only one oval.

Single valued

Monotonically increasing

All of the mentioned

None of the mentioned

31. Which of the following mask(s) is/are used to sharpen images by 1 point
subtracting a blurred version of original image from the original image
itself? *

Mark only one oval.

Unsharp mask

High-boost filter

All of the mentioned

None of the mentioned

https://docs.google.com/forms/d/1zL9C8JhoyjkARhhXWNWXw5PMUGIJKbCR7cgS1UcbbLA/edit 10/15
3/25/2021 MCQ based test on unit 2 of DIVP

32. Which of the following gives an expression for high boost filtered image 1 point

fhb, if f represents an image, f blurred version of f, fs unsharp mask

filtered image and A ≥ 1? *

Mark only one oval.

fhb = (A – 1) f(x, y) + f(x, y) – f x, y)

fhb = A f(x, y) – f(x,y)

fhb = (A – 1) f(x, y) + fs(x, y)

All of the mentioned

33. The domain that refers to image plane itself and the domain that refers to 1 point

Fourier transform of an image is/are : *

Mark only one oval.

Spatial domain in both

Frequency domain in both

Spatial domain and Frequency domain respectively

Frequency domain and Spatial domain respectively

34. For Image Enhancement a general-approach is to use a function of values 1 point

of f (input image) in a predefined neighborhood of (x, y) to determine the
value of g (output image) at (x, y). The techniques that uses such
approaches are called ________ *

Mark only one oval.

Contouring

Contrast stretching

Mask processing

None of the mentioned

https://docs.google.com/forms/d/1zL9C8JhoyjkARhhXWNWXw5PMUGIJKbCR7cgS1UcbbLA/edit 11/15
3/25/2021 MCQ based test on unit 2 of DIVP

35. * 2 points

Mark only one oval.

36. * 2 points

Mark only one oval.

24

25

https://docs.google.com/forms/d/1zL9C8JhoyjkARhhXWNWXw5PMUGIJKbCR7cgS1UcbbLA/edit 12/15
3/25/2021 MCQ based test on unit 2 of DIVP

37. * 2 points

Mark only one oval.

1 0 First row 1 0 Second row

1 1 First row 0 0 Second row

1 0 First row 0 1 Second row

0 1 First row 0 1 Second row

38. * 4 points

Mark only one oval.

2 1 First row 4 3 Second row

6 8 First row 2 4 Second row

2 6 First row 4 8 Second row

8 6 First row 2 4 Second row

39. Which is not true with image enhancement? * 2 points

Mark only one oval.

It is a subjective process

It requires knowledge of model of degradation

It can be represented mathematically

Examples :Contrast stretching, Histogram equalization

https://docs.google.com/forms/d/1zL9C8JhoyjkARhhXWNWXw5PMUGIJKbCR7cgS1UcbbLA/edit 13/15
3/25/2021 MCQ based test on unit 2 of DIVP

40. Image gets degraded due to____ * 1 point

Mark only one oval.

Image sensor noise

Blur due to misfocus

Blur due to motion

All of the above

41. Following is the most popular filter used for restoration * 1 point

Mark only one oval.

Laplacian filter

Median filter

Wiener filter

Averaging filter

42. Median filter is also known as ___________ * 2 points

Mark only one oval.

Non linear filter

Order statistics filter

Linear filter

Averaging filter

43. The key approach in Homomorphic filtering is to separate the illumination 1 point

and reflectance components.State whether true or false. *

Mark only one oval.

True

False

https://docs.google.com/forms/d/1zL9C8JhoyjkARhhXWNWXw5PMUGIJKbCR7cgS1UcbbLA/edit 14/15
3/25/2021 MCQ based test on unit 2 of DIVP

44. Histogram of two images can be same. * 1 point

Mark only one oval.

True

False

45. Salt and Pepper noise is removed by averaging filter. * 1 point

Mark only one oval.

True

False

46. Binary image is obtained by Thresholding operation * 1 point

Mark only one oval.

True

False

This content is neither created nor endorsed by Google.

 Forms

https://docs.google.com/forms/d/1zL9C8JhoyjkARhhXWNWXw5PMUGIJKbCR7cgS1UcbbLA/edit 15/15
3/25/2021 MCQ based test on unit 3 of DIVP

MCQ based test on unit 3 of DIVP

*Required

1. Email address *

2. E mail id *

3. Name of the student *

4. Class and division *

5. Roll number *

MCQ based test on unit 3 of DIVP

6. Image compression is comprised of________ * 1 point

Mark only one oval.

Encoder

Decoder

Frames

Both A and B

https://docs.google.com/forms/d/1nIsiwacLvLB7yoUtT9KkiPqbWwdZnz26uUpaFhO4ls4/edit 1/15
3/25/2021 MCQ based test on unit 3 of DIVP

7. Information is the _______________ 1 point

Mark only one oval.

Data

Meaningful data

Raw data

Both A and B

8. Coding redundancy works on __________ * 1 point

Mark only one oval.

Pixels

Matrix

Coordinates

Intensity

9. Sequence of code word assigned is known as 1 point

Mark only one oval.

word

byte

codeword

nibble

10. Every run length pair introduces new____________ * 1 point

Mark only one oval.

pixels

matrix

intensity

frame

https://docs.google.com/forms/d/1nIsiwacLvLB7yoUtT9KkiPqbWwdZnz26uUpaFhO4ls4/edit 2/15
3/25/2021 MCQ based test on unit 3 of DIVP

11. Every run length pair introduces new____________ * 1 point

Mark only one oval.

pixels

matrix

intensity

frame

12. If the pixels are reconstructed without error mapping is said to 1 point

be__________ *

Mark only one oval.

irreversible

reversible

frames

facsimile

13. Types of coding redundancy are ______ * 1 point

Mark only one oval.

14. Information per source is called_________ * 1 point

Mark only one oval.

sampling

entropy

quantization

normalization

https://docs.google.com/forms/d/1nIsiwacLvLB7yoUtT9KkiPqbWwdZnz26uUpaFhO4ls4/edit 3/15
3/25/2021 MCQ based test on unit 3 of DIVP

15. Compression is done for saving______________ * 1 point

Mark only one oval.

Bandwidth

Storage

Money

both A and B

16. System of symbols used to represent event is called _____________ * 1 point

Mark only one oval.

nibble

byte

code

word

17. Information ignored by the human eye is known as_________ * 1 point

Mark only one oval.

coding redundancy

spatial redundancy

irrelevant information

temporal redundancy

18. Normally internet delivers data at the rate of __________ * 1 point

Mark only one oval.

56 kbps

72 kbps

24kbps

64 kbps

https://docs.google.com/forms/d/1nIsiwacLvLB7yoUtT9KkiPqbWwdZnz26uUpaFhO4ls4/edit 4/15
3/25/2021 MCQ based test on unit 3 of DIVP

19. In the formula 1-1/C, C is the________ * 1 point

Mark only one oval.

complex ratio

compression ratio

constant

condition

20. One is not a type of data redundancy is __________ * 1 point

Mark only one oval.

spatial

temporal

coding

fascimile

21. Redundancy of the data can be found using the formula__________ * 1 point

Mark only one oval.

1-1/C

1+1/C

1/C

None from the above

22. Inserting data on to the images is called__________ * 1 point

Mark only one oval.

Image enhancement

Image compression

Image watermarking

Image restoration

https://docs.google.com/forms/d/1nIsiwacLvLB7yoUtT9KkiPqbWwdZnz26uUpaFhO4ls4/edit 5/15
3/25/2021 MCQ based test on unit 3 of DIVP

23. A codec is capable of ___________ * 1 point

Mark only one oval.

encoding

decoding

framing

both A and B

24. __________ is used to reduce coding redundancy * 1 point

Mark only one oval.

fixed length coding

variable length coding

run length coding

Both A and B

25. __________ is used to reduce spatial redundancy * 1 point

Mark only one oval.

fixed length coding

variable length coding

run length coding

Both A and B

26. Eye does not respond with equal sensitivity to all visual information. * 1 point

Mark only one oval.

True

False

https://docs.google.com/forms/d/1nIsiwacLvLB7yoUtT9KkiPqbWwdZnz26uUpaFhO4ls4/edit 6/15
3/25/2021 MCQ based test on unit 3 of DIVP

27. There are ___________ types of fidelity criteria. * 1 point

Mark only one oval.

28. Subjective criterion depends on _______ * 1 point

Mark only one oval.

Mean square error

evaluation made by observers

type of compression

Both A and B

29. Source encoder consists of________________ * 1 point

Mark only one oval.

Mapper,Quantizer,Symbol decoder

Mapper,Quantizer,Symbol encoder

Mapper,Quantizer

Mapper,Symbol encoder

30. If the quantizer is used then it produces lossless compression. * 1 point

Mark only one oval.

True

False

https://docs.google.com/forms/d/1nIsiwacLvLB7yoUtT9KkiPqbWwdZnz26uUpaFhO4ls4/edit 7/15
3/25/2021 MCQ based test on unit 3 of DIVP

31. Mapper is used to transform input data into format designed to reduce 1 point
inter pixel redundancy in an input image. *

Mark only one oval.

True

False

32. Mapper uses Run length coding and it is an irreversible process. * 1 point

Mark only one oval.

True

False

33. Channel encoder and channel decoder are designed to reduce impact of 1 point
channel noise. *

Mark only one oval.

True

False

34. ______________ is used to provide resiliency against transmission errors. * 1 point

Mark only one oval.

Arithmetic code

Huffman code

Hamming code

https://docs.google.com/forms/d/1nIsiwacLvLB7yoUtT9KkiPqbWwdZnz26uUpaFhO4ls4/edit 8/15
3/25/2021 MCQ based test on unit 3 of DIVP

35. _______ is a block code. * 1 point

Mark only one oval.

Arithmetic code

Huffman code

Hamming code

36. _______ is a non block code. * 1 point

Mark only one oval.

Arithmetic code

Huffman code

Hamming code

37. Lossy compression techniques are used in__________ * 1 point

Mark only one oval.

Speech

Medical reports

images

Both A AND C

Both A and B

38. Lossless compression techniques are used in__________ * 1 point

Mark only one oval.

Medical reports

computer files

speech

Both A and C

Both A and B

https://docs.google.com/forms/d/1nIsiwacLvLB7yoUtT9KkiPqbWwdZnz26uUpaFhO4ls4/edit 9/15
3/25/2021 MCQ based test on unit 3 of DIVP

39. Blocking artifacts are less pronounced in the DCT than in the DFT. * 1 point

Mark only one oval.

True

False

40. DFT provides very good energy compaction than DCT. * 1 point

Mark only one oval.

True

False

41. The JPEG compression starts by breaking the image into_____________ * 1 point

Mark only one oval.

8x8 pixels

16x16 pixels

24x24 pixels

32x32 pixels

42. JPEG stands for______________ * 1 point

Mark only one oval.

Joint Photographic Extension Group

Joint Photographic Engineering Group

Joint Photographic Experts Group

https://docs.google.com/forms/d/1nIsiwacLvLB7yoUtT9KkiPqbWwdZnz26uUpaFhO4ls4/edit 10/15
3/25/2021 MCQ based test on unit 3 of DIVP

43. DCT is a lossless transformation. * 1 point

Mark only one oval.

True

False

44. In a JPEG encoder zigzag scanning is used to form__________ * 1 point

Mark only one oval.

quantization

1 d sequence

entropy table

45. JPEG 2000 is a ___________ based compression standard. * 1 point

Mark only one oval.

DCT

DFT

DWT

46. JPEG 2000 produces______ artifacts. * 1 point

Mark only one oval.

blocking

ringing

ringing and blocking

https://docs.google.com/forms/d/1nIsiwacLvLB7yoUtT9KkiPqbWwdZnz26uUpaFhO4ls4/edit 11/15
3/25/2021 MCQ based test on unit 3 of DIVP

47. JPEG 2000 is used in____________ * 1 point

Mark only one oval.

Consumer applications

Medical applications

Remote sensing

All of the above

48. Wavelet based compression does not have blocking artifacts . * 1 point

Mark only one oval.

True

False

49. Just like JPEG Wavelet algorithm divides an image into blocks. * 1 point

Mark only one oval.

True

False

50. To display Fourier spectrum following image processing technique is used 1 point

Mark only one oval.

Bit plane slicing

Gray level slicing

Log transformation

Histogram processing

Other:

https://docs.google.com/forms/d/1nIsiwacLvLB7yoUtT9KkiPqbWwdZnz26uUpaFhO4ls4/edit 12/15
3/25/2021 MCQ based test on unit 3 of DIVP

51. Which image processing technique is used to improve the following 1 point
image? *

Mark only one oval.

Homomophic filter

Median filter

Averaging filter

LoG filter

52. Which image processing technique is used to improve the following 1 point
image? *

Mark only one oval.

DoG filter

Laplacian filter

Sobel filter

Wiener filter

https://docs.google.com/forms/d/1nIsiwacLvLB7yoUtT9KkiPqbWwdZnz26uUpaFhO4ls4/edit 13/15
3/25/2021 MCQ based test on unit 3 of DIVP

53. Which image processing technique is used to get the right sided 1 point

processed image? *

Mark only one oval.

Coloring image

Pseudo coloring

Green filter

54. Which image processing technique is used to obtain image C by 1 point

processing image A and image B? *

Mark only one oval.

A AND B

A OR B

A -- B

A+B

https://docs.google.com/forms/d/1nIsiwacLvLB7yoUtT9KkiPqbWwdZnz26uUpaFhO4ls4/edit 14/15
3/25/2021 MCQ based test on unit 3 of DIVP

55. Which image processing technique is used to obtain image C by 1 point

processing image A and image B? *

Mark only one oval.

A AND B

A OR B

A -- B

A+B

This content is neither created nor endorsed by Google.

 Forms

https://docs.google.com/forms/d/1nIsiwacLvLB7yoUtT9KkiPqbWwdZnz26uUpaFhO4ls4/edit 15/15
3/25/2021 MCQ based test on Unit 1 of DIVP

MCQ based test on Unit 1 of DIVP

*Required

1. Email address *

2. Name of the student *

3. Roll number *

4. Class and division *

MCQ based test on unit 1 of DIVP

5. The spatial coordinates of a digital image (x,y) are proportional to: * 1 point

Mark only one oval.

Position

Brightness

Contrast

Noise

https://docs.google.com/forms/d/1e-VDoOsJPnb00rQZzPcxBoxfToii1r1vgjGlezUNbss/edit 1/17
3/25/2021 MCQ based test on Unit 1 of DIVP

6. The range of values spanned by the gray scale is called: * 1 point

Mark only one oval.

Dynamic range

Band range

Peak range

Resolution range

7. Which is a colour attribute that describes a pure colour? * 1 point

Mark only one oval.

Saturation

Hue

Brightness

Intensity

8. Which gives a measure of the degree to which a pure colour is diluted by 1 point

white light? *

Mark only one oval.

Saturation

Hue

Brightness

Intensity

https://docs.google.com/forms/d/1e-VDoOsJPnb00rQZzPcxBoxfToii1r1vgjGlezUNbss/edit 2/17
3/25/2021 MCQ based test on Unit 1 of DIVP

9. In which step of processing, the images are subdivided successively into 1 point
smaller regions? *

Mark only one oval.

Image enhancement

Image acquisition

Segmentation

Wavelets

10. What role does the segmentation play in image processing? * 1 point

Mark only one oval.

Deals with extracting attributes that result in some quantitative information of

interest

Deals with techniques for reducing the storage required saving an image, or the
bandwidth required transmitting it

Deals with partitioning an image into its constituent parts or objects

Deals with property in which images are subdivided successively into smaller
regions

11. To convert a continuous image f(x, y) to digital form, we have to sample 1 point

the function in __________ *

Mark only one oval.

Coordinates

Amplitude`

All of the mentioned

None of the mentioned

https://docs.google.com/forms/d/1e-VDoOsJPnb00rQZzPcxBoxfToii1r1vgjGlezUNbss/edit 3/17
3/25/2021 MCQ based test on Unit 1 of DIVP

12. For a continuous image f(x, y), how could be Sampling defined? * 1 point

Mark only one oval.

Digitizing the coordinate values

Digitizing the amplitude values

All of the mentioned

None of the mentioned

13. What do you mean by the term pixel depth? * 1 point

Mark only one oval.

It is the number of bits used to represent each pixel in RGB space

It is the number of bytes used to represent each pixel in RGB space

It is the number of units used to represent each pixel in RGB space

It is the number of mm used to represent each pixel in RGB space

14. How many bit RGB color image is represented by full-color image? * 1 point

Mark only one oval.

32-bit RGB color image

24-bit RGB color image

16-bit RGB color image

8-bit RGB color image

15. Which of the following color models are used for color printing? * 1 point

Mark only one oval.

RGB

CMY

CMYK

CMY and CMYK

https://docs.google.com/forms/d/1e-VDoOsJPnb00rQZzPcxBoxfToii1r1vgjGlezUNbss/edit 4/17
3/25/2021 MCQ based test on Unit 1 of DIVP

16. What are the names of categories of color image processing? * 1 point

Mark only one oval.

Full-color and pseudo-color processing

Half-color and full-color processing

Half-color and pseudo-color processing

Pseudo-color and Multi-color processing

17. What are the characteristics that are taken together in chromaticity? * 1 point

Mark only one oval.

Saturation and Brightness

Hue and Saturation

Hue and Brightness

Saturation, Hue and Brightness

18. Which of the following is/are more commercially successful image 1 point

enhancement method in mask mode radiography, an area under medical

imaging? *

Mark only one oval.

Addition

Subtraction

Multiplication

Division

https://docs.google.com/forms/d/1e-VDoOsJPnb00rQZzPcxBoxfToii1r1vgjGlezUNbss/edit 5/17
3/25/2021 MCQ based test on Unit 1 of DIVP

19. Which of the following operations are used for masking? * 1 point

Mark only one oval.

AND, OR

AND, NOT

NOT, OR

All of the mentioned

20. While implementing logic operation on gray-scale images, the processing 1 point

of pixel values is done as __________ *

Mark only one oval.

String of integer numbers

String of floating numbers

String of binary numbers

None of the mentioned

21. Logic operations between two or more images are performed on pixel- 1 point

by-pixel basis, except for one that is performed on a single image. Which
one is that? *

Mark only one oval.

AND

OR

NOT

None of the mentioned

https://docs.google.com/forms/d/1e-VDoOsJPnb00rQZzPcxBoxfToii1r1vgjGlezUNbss/edit 6/17
3/25/2021 MCQ based test on Unit 1 of DIVP

22. Two images having one pixel gray value 01010100 and 00000101 at the 1 point

same location, are operated against AND operator. What would be the
resultant pixel gray value at that location in the enhanced image? *

Mark only one oval.

10100100

11111011

00000100

01010101

23. The function of iris is * 1 point

Mark only one oval.

to detect colour

to control amount of light

to add nutrition value

to vary focal length

Other:

24. The digitization process i.e. the digital image has M rows and N columns, 1 point

requires decisions about values for M, N, and for the number, L, of max
gray levels is an integer power of 2 i.e. L = 2k, allowed for each pixel. If we
assume that the discrete levels are equally spaced and that they are
integers then they are in the interval __________ and Sometimes the range
of values spanned by the gray scale is called the ________ of an image. *

Mark only one oval.

[0, L – 1] and static range respectively

[0, L / 2] and dynamic range respectively

[0, L / 2] and static range respectively

[0, L – 1] and dynamic range respectively

https://docs.google.com/forms/d/1e-VDoOsJPnb00rQZzPcxBoxfToii1r1vgjGlezUNbss/edit 7/17
3/25/2021 MCQ based test on Unit 1 of DIVP

25. The dependence of the perceived intensity of an object on its surrounding 1 point

background is called-------- *

Mark only one oval.

Mach band effect

Simultaneous contrast

Weber effect

MTF

26. In the given graph the concept of ________ is explained * 1 point

Mark only one oval.

Mach band effect

Simultaneous contrast

Weber effect

MTF

https://docs.google.com/forms/d/1e-VDoOsJPnb00rQZzPcxBoxfToii1r1vgjGlezUNbss/edit 8/17
3/25/2021 MCQ based test on Unit 1 of DIVP

27. Let V={0,1). Pixel P and pixel Q are_______________- * 2 points

Mark only one oval.

4 connected and 8 connected

4 connected but not 8 connected

Not 4 connected but 8 connected

None of the above

Other:

28. For animated grapics _____ file format is used * 1 point

Mark only one oval.

BMP

GIF

JPEG

TIFF

Other:

https://docs.google.com/forms/d/1e-VDoOsJPnb00rQZzPcxBoxfToii1r1vgjGlezUNbss/edit 9/17
3/25/2021 MCQ based test on Unit 1 of DIVP

29. This format is developed by Microsoft for Windows * 1 point

Mark only one oval.

BMP

GIF

JPEG

TIFF

Other:

30. This file format is widely used for compression * 1 point

Mark only one oval.

BMP

GIF

JPEG

TIFF

Other:

31. This colour model is ideal for developing image processing algorithms. * 1 point

Mark only one oval.

RGB

HSI

CMY

YIQ

Other:

https://docs.google.com/forms/d/1e-VDoOsJPnb00rQZzPcxBoxfToii1r1vgjGlezUNbss/edit 10/17
3/25/2021 MCQ based test on Unit 1 of DIVP

32. This colour model is close to Human Visual System. * 1 point

Mark only one oval.

RGB

HSI

CMY

YIQ

Other:

33. NTSC transmission system developed _______ model. * 1 point

Mark only one oval.

RGB

HSI

CMY

YIQ

Other:

34. * 2 points

Mark only one oval.

Other:

https://docs.google.com/forms/d/1e-VDoOsJPnb00rQZzPcxBoxfToii1r1vgjGlezUNbss/edit 11/17
3/25/2021 MCQ based test on Unit 1 of DIVP

35. * 2 points

Mark only one oval.

3,5

5,3

6,4

4,3

Other:

36. ________ is called smallest discernible detail in an image * 1 point

Mark only one oval.

Gray level resolution

Temporal resolution

Spatial resolution

None of the above

Other:

37. ________ is called smallest discernible change in gray level. * 1 point

Mark only one oval.

Gray level resolution

Brightness resolution

Spatial resolution

Both A and B

Other:

https://docs.google.com/forms/d/1e-VDoOsJPnb00rQZzPcxBoxfToii1r1vgjGlezUNbss/edit 12/17
3/25/2021 MCQ based test on Unit 1 of DIVP

38. The effect caused by the use of an insufficient number of gray levels in 1 point

smooth areas of a digital image is called as _____________ *

Mark only one oval.

Ridges

False contouring

Gray level resolution

Spatial resolution

Other:

39. What is the equation used for calculating B value in terms of HSI 1 point

components? *

Mark only one oval.

B=I(1+S)

B=S(1-I)

B=S(1+I)

B=I(1-S)

40. What do you mean by tri-stimulus values? * 1 point

Mark only one oval.

It is the amount of red, green and yellow needed to form any particular color

It is the amount of red, green and indigo needed to form any particular color

It is the amount of red, yellow and blue needed to form any particular color

It is the amount of red, green and blue needed to form any particular color

https://docs.google.com/forms/d/1e-VDoOsJPnb00rQZzPcxBoxfToii1r1vgjGlezUNbss/edit 13/17
3/25/2021 MCQ based test on Unit 1 of DIVP

41. An image of size 1024X1024 in which each pixel is of 8 bit requires _____ 1 point

storage space *

Mark only one oval.

1 MB

10 MB

5 MB

100 MB

42. ____ type of storage is characterised by infrequent access. * 1 point

Mark only one oval.

Online storage

Short term storage

Archival storage

43. _____ type of storage is used for fast recalls * 1 point

Mark only one oval.

Online storage

Short term storage

Archival storage

44. Advantage of digital image________ * 1 point

Mark only one oval.

It can be stored and compressed

Specialized image processing hardware is used to increase the storage capability.

Ease of processing

All of the above

https://docs.google.com/forms/d/1e-VDoOsJPnb00rQZzPcxBoxfToii1r1vgjGlezUNbss/edit 14/17
3/25/2021 MCQ based test on Unit 1 of DIVP

45. ____ are used for image compression and for pyramidal representation in 1 point

which images are subdivided successively into smaller regions. *

Mark only one oval.

Fourier coeficients

Wavelets

DCT coefficients

JPEG images

46. Retina consists of_____ photoreceptors. * 1 point

Mark only one oval.

Rods

Cones

Rods and cones

47. Which of the following step deals with tools for extracting image 1 point

components those are useful in the representation and description of

shape? *

Mark only one oval.

Segmentation

Representation & description

Compression

Morphological processing

https://docs.google.com/forms/d/1e-VDoOsJPnb00rQZzPcxBoxfToii1r1vgjGlezUNbss/edit 15/17
3/25/2021 MCQ based test on Unit 1 of DIVP

48. In which step of the processing, assigning a label (e.g., “vehicle”) to an 1 point

object based on its descriptors is done? *

Mark only one oval.

Object recognition

Morphological processing

Segmentation

Representation & description

49. For a continuous image f(x, y), Quantization is defined as * 1 point

Mark only one oval.

Digitizing the coordinate values

Digitizing the amplitude values

All of the mentioned

None of the mentioned

50. The quality of a digital image is well determined by ___________ * 1 point

Mark only one oval.

The number of samples

The discrete gray levels

All of the mentioned

None of the mentioned

https://docs.google.com/forms/d/1e-VDoOsJPnb00rQZzPcxBoxfToii1r1vgjGlezUNbss/edit 16/17
3/25/2021 MCQ based test on Unit 1 of DIVP

51. After digitization process a digital image with M rows and N columns have 1 point

to be positive and for the number, L, max gray levels i.e. an integer power
of 2 for each pixel. Then, the number b, of bits required to store a digitized
image is: *

Mark only one oval.

b=M*N*k

b=M*N*L

b=M*L*k

b=L*N*k

This content is neither created nor endorsed by Google.

 Forms

https://docs.google.com/forms/d/1e-VDoOsJPnb00rQZzPcxBoxfToii1r1vgjGlezUNbss/edit 17/17
1.

One that is not the field of x-ray band

a.

industry

b.

astronomy

c.

radar

d.

medical diagnoses

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (c).

radar

2.

A star in the constellation of Cygnus exploded about

a.

15050 years ago

b.

16000 years ago

c.

16050 years ago

d.

15000 years ago

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (d).

15000 years ago

3.

Middle infrared light is used in

a.

mineral mapping

b.

soil moisture

c.

water penetration

d.

vegetation discrimination

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (a).

mineral mapping

4.

Ultraviolet light is used in

a.

law enforcement

b.

radar

c.

nuclear medicine

d.

fluorescence microscopy
View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (d).

fluorescence microscopy

5.

For marine acquisition the energy source consists usually of

a.

five gun towed

b.

four gun towed

c.

three gun towed

d.

two gun towed

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (d).

two gun towed

6.

Imaging in geological exploration, industry and medicine uses

a.

audio

b.

sound

c.

sunlight

d.
ultraviolet

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (b).

sound

7.

Major application of contrast-enhancement radiography is

a.

industry

b.

astronomical observations

c.

angipgraphy

d.

lithography

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (c).

angipgraphy

8.

The principle energy source for images

a.

electrical spectrum

b.

magnetic spectrum

c.

electro spectrum
d.

electro magnetic spectrum

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (d).

electro magnetic spectrum

9.

The most energetic rays of EM energy spectrum

a.

gamma rays

b.

x-rays

c.

ultraviolet rays

d.

visible rays

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (a).

gamma rays

10.

Which waves can penetrate through clouds

a.

ultrasonic

b.

radar

c.
visible and infrared

d.

gamma

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (b).

radar

11.

Image enhancement and restoration are used to process

a.

high resolution images

b.

degraded images

c.

high quality images

d.

brighter images

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (b).

degraded images

12.

The dominant application of microwave in image processing is

a.

medicines

b.
radar

c.

lens enhancement

d.

medical diagnoses

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (b).

radar

13.

The transmission electron microscope works much like a

a.

slide projector

b.

side projector

c.

dual projector

d.

imaging projector

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (a).

slide projector

14.

Microwave band is used in

a.

industry
b.

radar

c.

medicine

d.

lithography

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (b).

radar

15.

Waves having longest wave length

a.

x-rays

b.

microwaves

c.

gamma

d.

radio waves

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (d).

radio waves

16.

In medicine radio waves are used in

a.
MRI

b.

surgery

c.

CT scan

d.

injections

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (a).

MRI

17.

Fluorescence microscopy is an excellent for materials made of

a.

chlorine

b.

fluorine

c.

fluoresce

d.

copper

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (c).

fluoresce

18.

Which one is not the process of image processing

a.

high level

b.

low level

c.

last level;

d.

mid level

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (c).

last level;

19.

Which one is not the area of digital image processing

a.

law enforcement

b.

lithography

c.

medicine

d.

voice calling

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (d).

voice calling

20.
A structured light illumination technique was used for

a.

lens deformation

b.

inverse filtering

c.

lens enhancement

d.

lens error

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (a).

lens deformation

21.

Tomography is the algorithm that uses images

a.

edges

b.

slices

c.

boundaries

d.

illumination

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (b).
slices

22.

Cygnus loop is an example of

a.

gamma rays

b.

visible spectrum

c.

x-rays

d.

uv rays

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (d).

uv rays

23.

Major use of gamma rays imaging includes

a.

radar

b.

astronomical observations

c.

industry

d.

lithography
View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (b).

astronomical observations

24.

Angiography uses what technique

a.

image addition

b.

image multiplication

c.

image division

d.

None of the above

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (b).

image multiplication

25.

Wavelength of thermal infrared ranges from

a.

10.4-12.5

b.

10.4-13.5

c.

11.4-12.5

d.
10.3-12.5

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (a).

10.4-12.5

26.

Which is not an example of image processing

a.

thumb prints

b.

paper currency

c.

mp3

d.

lisence plate detection

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (c).

mp3

27.

An image is a two dimensional function where x and y are

a.

spatial coordinates

b.

frequency coordinates

c.

time coordinates
d.

real coordinates

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (a).

spatial coordinates

28.

Electromagnetic visible spectrum ranges from

a.

400-700nm

b.

600-900nm

c.

400-700pm

d.

600-900pm

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (a).

400-700nm

29.

Early bartlane systems were capable of coding image in

a.

two gray levels

b.

three gray levels

c.
four gray levels

d.

five gray level

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (d).

five gray level

30.

Lithography uses

a.

ultraviolet

b.

x-rays

c.

gamma

d.

visible rays

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (a).

ultraviolet

31.

Visible red light is used in

a.

soil moisture

b.
mineral mapping

c.

water penetration

d.

vegetation discrimination

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (d).

vegetation discrimination

32.

Which one is not the source of images?

a.

mecatronic

b.

acoustic

c.

ultrasonic

d.

electronic

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (a).

mecatronic

33.

Which color is having largest frequency in visible spectrum

a.

blue
b.

violet

c.

green

d.

red

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (b).

violet

34.

Oldest source of EM radiations used for imaging

a.

visible

b.

gamma

c.

x-rays

d.

ultraviolet

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (c).

x-rays

35.

Visible blue light is used in

a.
soil moisture

b.

mineral mapping

c.

water penetration

d.

vegetation discrimination

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (c).

water penetration

36.

Weather observation and prediction is major application of

a.

spectral imaging

b.

multi spectral imaging

c.

central imaging

d.

bio imaging

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (b).

multi spectral imaging

37.

Image subtraction is used for

a.

color enhancement

b.

frequency enhancement

c.

spatial enhancement

d.

detection

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (d).

detection

38.

Computerized axial tomography uses

a.

x-rays

b.

gamma

c.

microwaves

d.

radio waves

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (a).

x-rays

39.
Wavelength of near infrared ranges from

a.

0.76-1.90

b.

0.76-0.90

c.

0.36-0.90

d.

0.76-0.10

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (b).

0.76-0.90

40.

Wavelength of visible green ranges from

a.

0.52-0.70

b.

0.52-0.62

c.

0.53-0.60

d.

0.52-0.60

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (d).

0.52-0.60
41.

The major area of imaging in visual spectrum is in

a.

automated visual inspection

b.

auto visual inspection

c.

visual inspection

d.

automated inspection

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (a).

automated visual inspection

42.

Detecting anomalies is a major theme of

a.

lithography

b.

astronomy

c.

industrial inspection

d.

medicine inspection
View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (c).

industrial inspection

43.

Which is the image processing related fields

a.

medicines

b.

chemistry

c.

neurobiology

d.

chemicals

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (c).

neurobiology

44.

Manufactured goods often checked using

a.

voice over IP

b.

digital image processing

c.

audio processing

d.
video processing

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (b).

digital image processing

45.

Remote sensing is an application of

a.

gamma rays

b.

x-rays

c.

visible and infrared

d.

ultraviolet

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (c).

visible and infrared

46.

Which is the first fundamental step in image processing

a.

filtration

b.

image acquisition

c.

image enhancement
d.

image restoration

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (b).

image acquisition

47.

Which color is having largest wavelength in visible spectrum

a.

red

b.

blue

c.

green

d.

yellow

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (a).

red

48.

Fluorescing area shine against dark background to permit

a.

detection

b.

correction

c.
inspection

d.

enhancement

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (a).

detection

49.

Which radio wave band having longest wavelength

a.

gamma rays

b.

x-rays

c.

radio waves

d.

ultraviolet

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (c).

radio waves

50.

The spatial coordinates of a digital image (x,y) are proportional to:

a.

Position

b.

Brightness
c.

Contrast

d.

Noise

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (b).

Brightness

51.

Among the following image processing techniques which is fast, precise and flexible.

a.

Optical

b.

Digital

c.

Electronic

d.

Photographic

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (b).

Digital

52.

An image is considered to be a function of a(x,y), where a represents:

a.

Height of image
b.

Width of image

c.

Amplitude of image

d.

Resolution of image

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (c).

Amplitude of image

53.

The range of values spanned by the gray scale is called:

a.

Dynamic range

b.

Band range

c.

Peak range

d.

Resolution range

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (a).

Dynamic range

54.

Which is a colour attribute that describes a pure colour?

a.
Saturation

b.

Hue

c.

Brightness

d.

Intensity

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (b).

Hue

55.

Which gives a measure of the degree to which a pure colour is diluted by white light?

a.

Saturation

b.

Hue

c.

Intensity

d.

Brightness

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (a).

Saturation

56.

Which means the assigning meaning to a recognized object.

a.

Interpretation

b.

Recognition

c.

Acquisition

d.

Segmentation

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (a).

Interpretation

57.

A typical size comparable in quality to monochromatic TV image is of size.

a.

256 X 256

b.

512 X 512

c.

1920 X 1080

d.

1080 X 1080

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (b).

512 X 512

58.
The number of grey values are integer powers of:

a.

b.

c.

d.

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (b).

59.

What is the first and foremost step in Image Processing?

a.

Image restoration

b.

Image enhancement

c.

Image acquisition

d.

Segmentation

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (c).

Image acquisition
60.

In which step of processing, the images are subdivided successively into smaller regions?

a.

Image enhancement

b.

Image acquisition

c.

Segmentation

d.

Wavelets

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (d).

Wavelets

61.

What is the next step in image processing after compression?

a.

Wavelets

b.

Segmentation

c.

Representation and description

d.

Morphological processing

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (d).

Morphological processing

62.

What is the step that is performed before color image processing in image processing?

a.

Wavelets and multi resolution processing

b.

Image enhancement

c.

Image restoration

d.

Image acquisition

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (c).

Image restoration

63.

How many number of steps are involved in image processing?

a.

10

b.

c.

11

d.

12
View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (a).

10

64.

What is the expanded form of JPEG?

a.

Joint Photographic Expansion Group

b.

Joint Photographic Experts Group

c.

Joint Photographs Expansion Group

d.

Joint Photographic Expanded Group

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (b).

Joint Photographic Experts Group

65.

Which of the following step deals with tools for extracting image components those are useful in the
representation and description of shape?

a.

Segmentation

b.

Representation & description

c.

Compression

d.
Morphological processing

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (d).

Morphological processing

66.

In which step of the processing, assigning a label (e.g., “vehicle”) to an object based on its descriptors is
done?

a.

Object recognition

b.

Morphological processing

c.

Segmentation

d.

Representation & description

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (a).

Object recognition

67.

What role does the segmentation play in image processing?

a.

Deals with extracting attributes that result in some quantitative information of interest

b.

Deals with techniques for reducing the storage required saving an image, or the bandwidth required
transmitting it

c.
Deals with partitioning an image into its constituent parts or objects

d.

Deals with property in which images are subdivided successively into smaller regions

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (c).

Deals with partitioning an image into its constituent parts or objects

68.

What is the correct sequence of steps in image processing?

a.

Image acquisition->Image enhancement->Image restoration->Color image processing->Compression-

>Wavelets and multi resolution processing->Morphological processing->Segmentation->Representation
& description->Object recognition

b.

Image acquisition->Image enhancement->Image restoration->Color image processing->Wavelets and

multi resolution processing->Compression->Morphological processing->Segmentation->Representation
& description->Object recognition

c.

Image acquisition->Image enhancement->Color image processing->Image restoration->Wavelets and

multi resolution processing->Compression->Morphological processing->Segmentation->Representation
& description->Object recognition

d.

Image acquisition->Image enhancement->Image restoration->Color image processing->Wavelets and

multi resolution processing->Compression->Morphological processing->Representation & description-
>Segmentation->Object recognition

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (b).

Image acquisition->Image enhancement->Image restoration->Color image processing->Wavelets and

multi resolution processing->Compression->Morphological processing->Segmentation->Representation
& description->Object recognition
1.

Sensor strip mounted in a ring configuration is used in

a.

microscopy

b.

medical

c.

industry

d.

radar

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (b).

medical

2.

1024 x 1024 image has resolution of

a.

1048576

b.

1148576

c.

1248576

d.

1348576

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (a).
1048576

3.

The lens is made up of concentric layers of

a.

strong cells

b.

inner cells

c.

fibrous cells

d.

outer cells

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (c).

fibrous cells

4.

Radio wave band encompasses

a.

audio

b.

AM

c.

FM

d.

Both b and c

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (d).

Both b and c

5.

L = 23 would have

a.

2 levels

b.

4 levels

c.

6 levels

d.

8 levels

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (d).

8 levels

6.

The cornea is the tough transparent tissues that covers eye's

a.

eye lid

b.

lashes

c.

anterior

d.

exterior
View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (c).

anterior

7.

Digital images are displayed as a discrete set if

a.

values

b.

numbers

c.

frequencies

d.

intensities

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (d).

intensities

8.

In MxN, M is no of

a.

intensity levels

b.

colors

c.

rows

d.
columns

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (c).

rows

9.

Each element of the matrix is called

a.

dots

b.

coordinate

c.

pixels

d.

value

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (c).

pixels

10.

Imaging system produces

a.

high resolution image

b.

voltage signal

c.

digitized image
d.

analog signal

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (c).

digitized image

11.

Digitizing the coordinate values is called

a.

radiance

b.

illuminance

c.

sampling

d.

quantization

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (c).

sampling

12.

The smallest element of an image is called

a.

pixel
b.

dot

c.

coordinate

d.

digits

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (a).

pixel

13.

Types of imaging sensors are

a.

two

b.

three

c.

four

d.

five

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (b).

three

14.

E = hv in this expression, h is called

a.
speed of light

b.

light constant

c.

plank's constant

d.

acceleration constant

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (c).

plank's constant

15.

The fovea itself is a circular indentation in the retina of about

a.

1.8mm

b.

1.5mm

c.

1.6mm

d.

1.7mm

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (b).

1.5mm

16.

Type of zooms are

a.

b.

c.

d.

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (d).

17.

DPI stands for

a.

dots per image

b.

dots per inches

c.

dots per intensity

d.

diameter per inches

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (b).

dots per inches

18.
Hard x-rays are used in

a.

medicines

b.

lithoscopy

c.

industry

d.

radar

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (c).

industry

19.

No of bits to store image is denoted by the formula

a.

b = NxK

b.

b = MxN

c.

b = MxNxK

d.

b = MxK

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (c).

b = MxNxK
20.

MRI in imaging stands for

a.

magnetic resonance imaging

b.

magnetic resistance imaging

c.

magnetic resonance intensity

d.

major resonance imaging

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (a).

magnetic resonance imaging

21.

Digitizing the amplitude values is called

a.

radiance

b.

illuminance

c.

sampling

d.

quantization
View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (d).

quantization

22.

Process of using known to estimate unknown is called

a.

interchange

b.

interpolation

c.

extrapolation

d.

estimation

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (b).

interpolation

23.

The choroid lies directly below the

a.

eye lid

b.

cornea

c.

retina

d.
sclera

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (d).

sclera

24.

Value of speed of light constant c

a.

2.998x10^8

b.

3.998x10^8

c.

4.998x10^8

d.

5.998x10^8

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (a).

2.998x10^8

25.

Black and white images have only

a.

2 levels

b.

3 levels

c.

4 levels
d.

5 levels

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (a).

2 levels

26.

Gamma rays have largest

a.

wavelength

b.

frequency

c.

energy

d.

power

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (b).

frequency

27.

Part of the eye , that is not the membrane of the eye is

a.

cornea

b.

cells

c.
retina

d.

choroid

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (b).

cells

28.

In MxN, N is no of

a.

intensity levels

b.

colors

c.

rows

d.

columns

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (d).

columns

29.

One that is not the measuring substance of the image is

a.

radiance

b.

refraction
c.

illumination

d.

brightness

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (b).

refraction

30.

Discernible change in intensity level of image is

a.

wide domain

b.

spatial domain

c.

frequency domain

d.

algebraic domain

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (c).

frequency domain

31.

Black and white pixels of image are represented in matrix as

a.
1 and 2

b.

0 and 1

c.

0 and 2

d.

0 and -1

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (b).

0 and 1

32.

Image sensor produces

a.

voltage waveform

b.

current waveform

c.

audio

d.

discrete signals

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (a).

voltage waveform

33.
Mechanical digitizers are referred to

a.

densitometer

b.

micrometer

c.

microdensity

d.

microdensitometer

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (d).

microdensitometer

34.

Cone vision is called

a.

photopic

b.

photogenic

c.

photograph

d.

protoplasm

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (a).

photopic
35.

Digitizing the image requires

a.

reflection

b.

sampling

c.

quantization

d.

Both b and c

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (d).

Both b and c

36.

A matrix is denoted by

a.

M.N

b.

MxN

c.

M+N

d.

MN

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (b).
MxN

37.

Changing the overall sensitivity of the image is called

a.

illumination

b.

brightness

c.

brightness adaption

d.

illumination adaption

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (c).

brightness adaption

38.

Image linear interpolation is given by the formula

a.

v(x,y) = ax+by+cxy+d

b.

v(x,y) = ax+by+cxy

c.

v(x,y) = ax+by+d

d.

v(x,y) = by+cxy+d

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (a).

v(x,y) = ax+by+cxy+d

39.

One that is not the type of image sensor is

a.

single sensor

b.

line sensor

c.

matrix sensor

d.

array sensor

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (c).

matrix sensor

40.

X-rays pass through the patient's body for generating diagnostic

a.

x-ray film

b.

rays

c.

images

d.

reel
View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (a).

x-ray film

41.

Value of plank's constant h is

a.

9.55x10-34

b.

8.55x10-34

c.

7.55x10-34

d.

6.55x10-34

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (d).

6.55x10-34

42.

Digital image processing is build on mathematical and

a.

probabilistic formulations

b.

additional formulations

c.

probabilistic addition
d.

probabilistic subtraction

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (a).

probabilistic formulations

43.

The lens has a fixed

a.

focal length

b.

width

c.

length

d.

focal width

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (a).

focal length

44.

Functions that combines to produce Æ’ (x,y)

a.

illumination and frequency

b.

intensity and reflectance

c.
illumination and radiance

d.

illumination and reflectance

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (d).

illumination and reflectance

45.

The innermost membrane of the eye is

a.

eye lid

b.

cornea

c.

retina

d.

sclera

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (c).

retina

46.

Radio waves have largest

a.

wavelength

b.

frequency
c.

energy

d.

power

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (a).

wavelength

47.

Matrix is made up of

a.

rows

b.

column

c.

values

d.

Both a and b

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (d).

Both a and b

48.

Discernible small details of image is

a.

wide domain

b.
spatial domain

c.

frequency domain

d.

algebraic domain

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (b).

spatial domain

49.

To convert a continuous sensed data into Digital form, which of the following is required?

a.

Sampling

b.

Quantization

c.

Both Sampling and Quantization

d.

Neither Sampling nor Quantization

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (c).

Both Sampling and Quantization

50.

To convert a continuous image f(x, y) to digital form, we have to sample the function in __________

a.

Coordinates
b.

Amplitude

c.

All of the mentioned

d.

None of the mentioned

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (c).

All of the mentioned

51.

For a continuous image f(x, y), how could be Sampling defined?

a.

Digitizing the coordinate values

b.

Digitizing the amplitude values

c.

All of the mentioned

d.

None of the mentioned

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (a).

Digitizing the coordinate values

52.
For a continuous image f(x, y), Quantization is defined as

a.

Digitizing the coordinate values

b.

Digitizing the amplitude values

c.

All of the mentioned

d.

None of the mentioned

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (b).

Digitizing the amplitude values

53.

Validate the statement:

“For a given image in one-dimension given by function f(x, y), to sample the function we take equally
spaced samples, superimposed on the function, along a horizontal line. However, the sample values still
span (vertically) a continuous range of gray-level values. So, to convert the given function into a digital
function, the gray-level values must be divided into various discrete levels.”

a.

True

b.

False

c.

May be

d.

Can't Say
View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (a).

True

54.

How is sampling been done when an image is generated by a single sensing element combined with
mechanical motion?

a.

The number of sensors in the strip defines the sampling limitations in one direction and Mechanical
motion in the other direction.

b.

The number of sensors in the sensing array establishes the limits of sampling in both directions.

c.

The number of mechanical increments when the sensor is activated to collect data.

d.

None of the mentioned.

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (c).

The number of mechanical increments when the sensor is activated to collect data.

55.

How does sampling gets accomplished with a sensing strip being used for image acquisition?

a.

The number of sensors in the strip establishes the sampling limitations in one image direction and
Mechanical motion in the other direction

b.

The number of sensors in the sensing array establishes the limits of sampling in both directions

c.

The number of mechanical increments when the sensor is activated to collect data
d.

None of the mentioned

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (a).

The number of sensors in the strip establishes the sampling limitations in one image direction and
Mechanical motion in the other direction

56.

How is sampling accomplished when a sensing array is used for image acquisition?

a.

The number of sensors in the strip establishes the sampling limitations in one image direction and
Mechanical motion in the other direction

b.

The number of sensors in the sensing array defines the limits of sampling in both directions

c.

The number of mechanical increments at which we activate the sensor to collect data

d.

None of the mentioned

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (b).

The number of sensors in the sensing array defines the limits of sampling in both directions

57.

The quality of a digital image is well determined by ___________

a.

The number of samples

b.

The discrete gray levels

c.

All of the mentioned

d.

None of the mentioned

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (c).

All of the mentioned

58.

Assume that an image f(x, y) is sampled so that the result has M rows and N columns. If the values of the
coordinates at the origin are (x, y) = (0, 0), then the notation (0, 1) is used to signify :

a.

Second sample along first row

b.

First sample along second row

c.

First sample along first row

d.

Second sample along second row

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (a).

Second sample along first row

59.

The resulting image of sampling and quantization is considered a matrix of real numbers. By what
name(s) the element of this matrix array is called __________

a.

Image element or Picture element

b.

Pixel or Pel

c.

All of the mentioned

d.

None of the mentioned

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (c).

All of the mentioned

60.

Let Z be the set of real integers and R the set of real numbers. The sampling process may be viewed as
partitioning the x-y plane into a grid, with the central coordinates of each grid being from the Cartesian
product Z2, that is a set of all ordered pairs (zi, zj), with zi and zj being integers from Z. Then, f(x, y) is
said a digital image if:

a.

(x, y) are integers from Z2 and f is a function that assigns a gray-level value (from Z) to each distinct pair
of coordinates (x, y)

b.

(x, y) are integers from R2 and f is a function that assigns a gray-level value (from R) to each distinct pair
of coordinates (x, y)

c.

(x, y) are integers from R2 and f is a function that assigns a gray-level value (from Z) to each distinct pair
of coordinates (x, y)

d.

(x, y) are integers from Z2 and f is a function that assigns a gray-level value (from R) to each distinct pair
of coordinates (x, y)

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (d).
(x, y) are integers from Z2 and f is a function that assigns a gray-level value (from R) to each distinct pair
of coordinates (x, y)

61.

Let Z be the set of real integers and R the set of real numbers. The sampling process may be viewed as
partitioning the x-y plane into a grid, with the central coordinates of each grid being from the Cartesian
product Z2, that is a set of all ordered pairs (zi, zj), with zi and zj being integers from Z. Then, f(x, y) is a
digital image if (x, y) are integers from Z2 and f is a function that assigns a gray-level value (that is, a real
number from the set R) to each distinct coordinate pair (x, y). What happens to the digital image if the
gray levels also are integers?

a.

The Digital image then becomes a 2-D function whose coordinates and amplitude values are integers

b.

The Digital image then becomes a 1-D function whose coordinates and amplitude values are integers

c.

The gray level can never be integer

d.

None of the mentioned

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (a).

The Digital image then becomes a 2-D function whose coordinates and amplitude values are integers

62.

The digitization process i.e. the digital image has M rows and N columns, requires decisions about values
for M, N, and for the number, L, of gray levels allowed for each pixel. The value M and N have to be:

a.

M and N have to be positive integer

b.
M and N have to be negative integer

c.

M have to be negative and N have to be positive integer

d.

M have to be positive and N have to be negative integer

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (a).

M and N have to be positive integer

63.

The digitization process i.e. the digital image has M rows and N columns, requires decisions about values
for M, N, and for the number, L, of max gray levels. There are no requirements on M and N, other than
that M and N have to be positive integer. However, the number of gray levels typically is

a.

An integer power of 2 i.e. L = 2k

b.

A Real power of 2 i.e. L = 2k

c.

Two times the integer value i.e. L = 2k

d.

None of the mentioned

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (a).

An integer power of 2 i.e. L = 2k

64.

The digitization process i.e. the digital image has M rows and N columns, requires decisions about values
for M, N, and for the number, L, of max gray levels is an integer power of 2 i.e. L = 2k, allowed for each
pixel. If we assume that the discrete levels are equally spaced and that they are integers then they are in
the interval __________ and Sometimes the range of values spanned by the gray scale is called the
________ of an image.

a.

[0, L – 1] and static range respectively

b.

[0, L / 2] and dynamic range respectively

c.

[0, L / 2] and static range respectively

d.

[0, L – 1] and dynamic range respectively

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (d).

[0, L – 1] and dynamic range respectively

65.

After digitization process a digital image with M rows and N columns have to be positive and for the
number, L, max gray levels i.e. an integer power of 2 for each pixel. Then, the number b, of bits required
to store a digitized image is:

a.

b=M*N*k

b.

b=M*N*L

c.

b=M*L*k

d.

b=L*N*k

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (a).
b=M*N*k

66.

An image whose gray-levels span a significant portion of gray scale have __________ dynamic range
while an image with dull, washed out gray look have __________ dynamic range.

a.

Low and High respectively

b.

High and Low respectively

c.

Both have High dynamic range, irrespective of gray levels span significance on gray scale

d.

Both have Low dynamic range, irrespective of gray levels span significance on gray scale

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (b).

High and Low respectively

67.

Validate the statement “When in an Image an appreciable number of pixels exhibit high dynamic range,
the image will have high contrast.”

a.

True

b.

False

c.

May be

d.

Can't Say
View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (a).

True

68.

In digital image of M rows and N columns and L discrete gray levels, calculate the bits required to store a
digitized image for M=N=32 and L=16.

a.

16384

b.

4096

c.

8192

d.

512

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (b).

4096

69.

A continuous image is digitised at _______ points.

a.

random

b.

vertex

c.

contour

d.
sampling

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (d).

sampling

70.

The transition between continuous values of the image function and its digital equivalent is called
______________

a.

Quantisation

b.

Sampling

c.

Rasterisation

d.

None of the Mentioned

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (a).

Quantisation

71.

Images quantised with insufficient brightness levels will lead to the occurrence of ____________

a.

Pixillation

b.

Blurring
c.

False Contours

d.

None of the Mentioned

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (c).

False Contours

72.

The smallest discernible change in intensity level is called ____________

a.

Intensity Resolution

b.

Contour

c.

Saturation

d.

Contrast

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (a).

Intensity Resolution

73.

What is the tool used in tasks such as zooming, shrinking, rotating, etc.?

a.

Sampling
b.

Interpolation

c.

Filters

d.

None of the Mentioned

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (b).

Interpolation

74.

The type of Interpolation where for each new location the intensity of the immediate pixel is assigned is
___________

a.

bicubic interpolation

b.

cubic interpolation

c.

bilinear interpolation

d.

nearest neighbour interpolation

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (d).

nearest neighbour interpolation

75.

The type of Interpolation where the intensity of the FOUR neighbouring pixels is used to obtain intensity
a new location is called ___________
a.

cubic interpolation

b.

nearest neighbour interpolation

c.

bilinear interpolation

d.

bicubic interpolation

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (b).

nearest neighbour interpolation

76.

Dynamic range of imaging system is a ratio where the upper limit is determined by

a.

Saturation

b.

Noise

c.

Brightness

d.

Contrast

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (a).

Saturation

77.
For Dynamic range ratio the lower limit is determined by

a.

Saturation

b.

Brightness

c.

Noise

d.

Contrast

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (c).

Noise

78.

Quantitatively, spatial resolution cannot be represented in which of the following ways

a.

line pairs

b.

pixels

c.

dots

d.

none of the Mentioned

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (d).

none of the Mentioned

79.

The most familiar single sensor used for Image Acquisition is

a.

Microdensitometer

b.

Photodiode

c.

CMOS

d.

None of the Mentioned

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (b).

Photodiode

80.

A geometry consisting of in-line arrangement of sensors for image acquisition

a.

A photodiode

b.

Sensor strips

c.

Sensor arrays

d.

CMOS

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (b).
Sensor strips

81.

CAT in imaging stands for

a.

Computer Aided Telegraphy

b.

Computer Aided Tomography

c.

Computerised Axial Telegraphy

d.

Computerised Axial Tomography

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (d).

Computerised Axial Tomography

82.

The section of the real plane spanned by the coordinates of an image is called the _____________

a.

Spacial Domain

b.

Coordinate Axes

c.

Plane of Symmetry

d.

None of the Mentioned

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (a).

Spacial Domain

83.

The difference is intensity between the highest and the lowest intensity levels in an image is
___________

a.

Noise

b.

Saturation

c.

Contrast

d.

Brightness

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (c).

Contrast

84.

_____________ is the effect caused by the use of an insufficient number of intensity levels in smooth
areas of a digital image.

a.

Gaussian smooth

b.

Contouring

c.

False Contouring
d.

Interpolation

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (c).

False Contouring

85.

The process of using known data to estimate values at unknown locations is called

a.

Acquisition

b.

Interpolation

c.

Pixelation

d.

None of the Mentioned

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (b).

Interpolation

86.

Which of the following is NOT an application of Image Multiplication?

a.

Shading Correction

b.

Masking

c.
Pixelation

d.

Region of Interest operations

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (c).

Pixelation

87.

The procedure done on a digital image to alter the values of its individual pixels is

a.

Neighbourhood Operations

b.

Image Registration

c.

Geometric Spacial Transformation

d.

Single Pixel Operation

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (d).

Single Pixel Operation

88.

In Geometric Spacial Transformation, points whose locations are known precisely in input and reference
images.

a.

Tie points

b.

Reseau points
c.

Known points

d.

Key-points

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (a).

Tie points

89.

Of the following, _________ has the maximum frequency.

a.

UV Rays

b.

Gamma Rays

c.

Microwaves

d.

Radio Waves

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (b).

Gamma Rays

90.

How is array operation carried out involving one or more images?

a.

array by array

b.
pixel by pixel

c.

column by column

d.

row by row

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (b).

pixel by pixel

91.

The property indicating that the output of a linear operation due to the sum of two inputs is same as
performing the operation on the inputs individually and then summing the results is called ___________

a.

additivity

b.

heterogeneity

c.

homogeneity

d.

None of the Mentioned

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (a).

additivity

92.

The property indicating that the output of a linear operation to a constant times as input is the same as
the output of operation due to original input multiplied by that constant is called _________
a.

additivity

b.

heterogeneity

c.

homogeneity

d.

None of the Mentioned

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (c).

homogeneity

93.

Enhancement of differences between images is based on the principle of ____________

a.

Additivity

b.

Homogeneity

c.

Subtraction

d.

None of the Mentioned

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (c).

Subtraction

94.
A commercial use of Image Subtraction is ___________

a.

Mask mode radiography

b.

MRI scan

c.

CT scan

d.

None of the Mentioned

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (a).

Mask mode radiography

95.

Region of Interest (ROI) operations is commonly called as ___________

a.

Shading correction

b.

Masking

c.

Dilation

d.

None of the Mentioned

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (b).

Masking
96.

If every element of a set A is also an element of a set B, then A is said to be a _________ of set B.

a.

Disjoint set

b.

Union

c.

Subset

d.

Complement set

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (c).

Subset

97.

Consider two regions A and B composed of foreground pixels. The ________ of these two sets is the set
of elements belonging to set A or set B or both.

a.

OR

b.

AND

c.

NOT

d.

XOR

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (a).
OR

98.

Imaging systems having physical artefacts embedded in the imaging sensors produce a set of points
called __________

a.

Tie Points

b.

Control Points

c.

Reseau Marks

d.

None of the Mentioned

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (c).

Reseau Marks

99.

Image processing approaches operating directly on pixels of input image work directly in ____________

a.

Transform domain

b.

Spatial domain

c.

Inverse transformation

d.

None of the Mentioned

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (b).

Spatial domain

1.

Gaussian noise is referred to as

a.

red noise

b.

black noise

c.

white noise

d.

normal noise

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult! Search Google

Answer: (d).

normal noise

2.

Convolution in spatial domain is multiplication in

a.

frequency domain

b.

time domain

c.
spatial domain

d.

plane

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult! Search Google

Answer: (a).

frequency domain

3.

Linear functions possesses the property of

a.

additivity

b.

homogeneity

c.

multiplication

d.

Both a and b

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult! Search Google

Answer: (d).

Both a and b

4.

PDF in image processing is called

a.

probability degraded function

b.
probability density function

c.

probabilistic degraded function

d.

probabilistic density function

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult! Search Google

Answer: (b).

probability density function

5.

Filter that replaces the pixel value with the medians of intensity levels is

a.

arithmetic mean filter

b.

geometric mean filter

c.

median filter

d.

sequence mean filter

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult! Search Google

Answer: (c).

median filter

6.

In geometric mean filters when alpha is equal to 1 then it works as

a.
notch filter

b.

bandpass filter

c.

wiener filter

d.

inverse filter

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult! Search Google

Answer: (d).

inverse filter

7.

In wiener filtering it is assumed that noise and image are

a.

different

b.

homogenous

c.

correlated

d.

uncorrelated

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult! Search Google

Answer: (d).

uncorrelated

8.
EBCT scanners stands for

a.

electrical beam computed tomography

b.

electric beam computed tomography

c.

electronic beam computed tomography

d.

electron beam computed tomography

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult! Search Google

Answer: (d).

electron beam computed tomography

9.

PSF stands for

a.

probability spread function

b.

point spread function

c.

probability spike function

d.

point spike function

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult! Search Google

Answer: (b).

point spread function

Powered by

Valueimpression

10.

Filter that performs opposite to band rejected filter is called

a.

lowpass filter

b.

bandpass filter

c.

highpass filter

d.

max filter
View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult! Search Google

Answer: (b).

bandpass filter

11.

Degradation can be estimated by

a.

2ways

b.

3ways

c.

4ways

d.

5ways

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult! Search Google

Answer: (b).

3ways

12.

The purpose of restoration is to gain

a.

degraded image

b.

original image

c.
pixels

d.

coordinates

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult! Search Google

Answer: (b).

original image

13.

Power spectra and noise of undegraded image must be known is a statement of

a.

notch filter

b.

bandpass filter

c.

wiener filter

d.

max filter

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult! Search Google

Answer: (c).

wiener filter

14.

Contraharmonic mean filter produces

a.

degraded image

b.
original image

c.

restored image

d.

plane

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult! Search Google

Answer: (c).

restored image

15.

One that is not the type of a mean filter

a.

arithmetic mean filter

b.

geometric mean filter

c.

harmonic mean filter

d.

sequence mean filter

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult! Search Google

Answer: (d).

sequence mean filter

16.

Restoration can not be done using

a.
single projection

b.

double projection

c.

triple projection

d.

octa projection

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult! Search Google

Answer: (a).

single projection

17.

Mean filters reduce noise using

a.

sharpening

b.

blurring

c.

restoration

d.

acquisition

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult! Search Google

Answer: (b).

blurring

18.
In geometric mean filters when alpha is equal to 0 then it works as

a.

notch filter

b.

bandpass filter

c.

parametric wiener filter

d.

inverse filter

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult! Search Google

Answer: (c).

parametric wiener filter

19.

To improve the speed of convergence algorithm used is

a.

newton

b.

Raphson

c.

wiener

d.

newton-Raphson

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult! Search Google

Answer: (d).

newton-Raphson
Powered by

Valueimpression

20.

Degraded image is produced using degradation process and

a.

additive noise

b.

destruction

c.

pixels

d.

coordinates
View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult! Search Google

Answer: (a).

additive noise

21.

The inverse of image convolution is

a.

image nonconvolution

b.

image inconvolution

c.

image deconvolution

d.

image byconvolution

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult! Search Google

Answer: (c).

image deconvolution

22.

Impulse is simulated by

a.

black dot

b.

gray dot
c.

bright dot

d.

sharp dot

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult! Search Google

Answer: (c).

bright dot

23.

The approach to restoration is

a.

inverse filtering

b.

spike filtering

c.

black filtering

d.

ranking

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult! Search Google

Answer: (a).

inverse filtering

24.

Square of standard deviation is called

a.

variance
b.

noise

c.

restoration

d.

power

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult! Search Google

Answer: (a).

variance

25.

CT stands for

a.

computerized tomography

b.

computed tomography

c.

computerized terminology

d.

computed terminology

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult! Search Google

Answer: (b).

computed tomography

26.

SNR in noise stands for

a.

signal to noise ratio

b.

serial to noise ratio

c.

signal to notch ratio

d.

serial to notch ratio

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult! Search Google

Answer: (a).

signal to noise ratio

27.

Approach that incorporates both degradation function and statistical noise in restoration is called

a.

inverse filtering

b.

spike filtering

c.

wiener filtering

d.

ranking

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult! Search Google

Answer: (c).

wiener filtering
28.

Bandreject filters are used where the noise components are usually

a.

rejected

b.

unknown

c.

known

d.

taken

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult! Search Google

Answer: (c).

known

29.

Spatial filtering is used in the presence of

a.

additive random noise

b.

gamma noise

c.

black noise

d.

exponential noise

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult! Search Google

Answer: (a).
additive random noise

Powered by

Valueimpression

30.

Order statistics filters are filters whose responses are based on

a.

additive noise

b.

probability density function

c.

pixels

d.
ranking

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult! Search Google

Answer: (d).

ranking

31.

Images usually gets corrupted during

a.

transmission

b.

degradation

c.

restoration

d.

acquisition

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult! Search Google

Answer: (a).

transmission

32.

Minimum mean square error filter is also called

a.

square error filter

b.
most square error filter

c.

least square error filter

d.

error filter

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult! Search Google

Answer: (c).

least square error filter

33.

High frequency components are passed by

a.

lowpass filter

b.

bandpass filter

c.

highpass filter

d.

max filter

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult! Search Google

Answer: (c).

highpass filter

34.

One that is not a type of a noise is

a.
Rayleigh noise

b.

gamma noise

c.

black noise

d.

exponential noise

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult! Search Google

Answer: (c).

black noise

35.

Filter that replaces the pixel value with the minimum values of intensity levels is

a.

max filter

b.

geometric mean filter

c.

median filter

d.

min filter

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult! Search Google

Answer: (d).

min filter

36.
FFT stands for

a.

fast Fourier transform

b.

frequency Fourier transform

c.

frequency fast transform

d.

fast frequency transform

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult! Search Google

Answer: (a).

fast Fourier transform

37.

Automatically determined filters provides inferior results as compared to

a.

manually determined filters

b.

bandpass filters

c.

wiener filters

d.

error filters

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult! Search Google

Answer: (a).

manually determined filters

38.

Frequencies in predefined neighborhood are rejected by

a.

notch filter

b.

bandpass filter

c.

highpass filter

d.

max filter

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult! Search Google

Answer: (a).

notch filter

39.

Degraded image is given in a

a.

frequency domain

b.

time domain

c.

spatial domain

d.

plane

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult! Search Google

Answer: (c).

spatial domain

Powered by

Valueimpression

40.

Filter that computes midpoint between min and max value is called

a.

max filter

b.

midpoint filter

c.

median filter
d.

min filter

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult! Search Google

Answer: (b).

midpoint filter

41.

Low frequency components are passed by

a.

lowpass filter

b.

bandpass filter

c.

highpass filter

d.

max filter

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult! Search Google

Answer: (a).

lowpass filter

42.

Principle sources of noise arise during image

a.

destruction
b.

degradation

c.

restoration

d.

acquisition

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult! Search Google

Answer: (d).

acquisition

43.

Periodic noises arise from

a.

electrical interference

b.

gamma interference

c.

beta interference

d.

mechanical interference

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult! Search Google

Answer: (a).

electrical interference

44.

Function having both properties of additivity and homogeneity is called

a.

sharpening

b.

spike noise

c.

restoration

d.

superposition

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult! Search Google

Answer: (d).

superposition

45.

Fourier spectrum of noises are constant and usually called

a.

red noise

b.

black noise

c.

white noise

d.

green noise

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult! Search Google

Answer: (c).

white noise
46.

Salt and pepper noise also referred to the term

a.

Rayleigh noise

b.

spike noise

c.

black noise

d.

exponential noise

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult! Search Google

Answer: (b).

spike noise

47.

Constrained least squares filter does not implies best in

a.

Rayleigh noise

b.

degradation

c.

restoration

d.

optimum restoration

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult! Search Google

Answer: (d).
optimum restoration

48.

Salt and pepper noise can interchangeably be used with

a.

Rayleigh noise

b.

gamma noise

c.

black noise

d.

impulse

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult! Search Google

Answer: (d).

impulse

49.

Gaussian shape function has no

a.

ones

b.

zeros

c.

pixels

d.

coordinates
View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult! Search Google

Answer: (b).

zeros

Powered by

Valueimpression

50.

Filter that replaces the pixel value with the maximum values of intensity levels is

a.

max filter

b.

geometric mean filter

c.
median filter

d.

min filter

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult! Search Google

Answer: (a).

max filter

51.

Which of the following is a receptor in the retina of human eye?

a.

Rods

b.

Cones

c.

Rods and Cones

d.

Neither Rods nor Cones

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult! Search Google

Answer: (c).

Rods and Cones

52.

How is image formation in the eye different from that in a photographic camera

a.

No difference
b.

Variable focal length

c.

Varying distance between lens and imaging plane

d.

Fixed focal length

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult! Search Google

Answer: (b).

Variable focal length

53.

Range of light intensity levels to which the human eye can adapt (in Log of Intensity-mL)

a.

10^-6 to 10^-4

b.

10^4 to 10^6

c.

10^-6 to 10^4

d.

10^-5 to 10^5

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult! Search Google

Answer: (c).

10^-6 to 10^4

54.

What is subjective brightness?

a.

Related to intensity

b.

Related to brightness

c.

Related to image perception

d.

Related to image formation

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult! Search Google

Answer: (a).

Related to intensity

55.

What is brightness adaptation?

a.

Changing the eye’s overall sensitivity

b.

Changing the eye’s imaging ability

c.

Adjusting the focal length

d.

Transition from scotopic to photopic vision

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult! Search Google

Answer: (a).

Changing the eye’s overall sensitivity

56.

The inner most membrane of the human eye is

a.

Blind Spot

b.

Sclera

c.

Choroid

d.

Retina

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult! Search Google

Answer: (d).

Retina

57.

What is the function of Iris?

a.

Source of nutrition

b.

Detect color

c.

Varies focal length

d.

Control amount of light

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult! Search Google

Answer: (d).
Control amount of light

58.

________ serve to a general, overall picture of the field of view.

a.

Cones

b.

Rods

c.

Retina

d.

All of the Mentioned

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult! Search Google

Answer: (b).

Rods

59.

Ratio of number of rods to the number of cones is _______

a.

1:20

b.

1:2

c.

1:1

d.

1:5
View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult! Search Google

Answer: (a).

1:20

Powered by

Valueimpression

60.

The absence of receptors is in the retinal area called _____________

a.

Lens

b.

Ciliary body

c.
Blind spot

d.

Fovea

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult! Search Google

Answer: (c).

Blind spot

61.

In 4-neighbours of a pixel p, how far are each of the neighbours located from p?

a.

one pixel apart

b.

four pixels apart

c.

alternating pixels

d.

none of the Mentioned

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult! Search Google

Answer: (a).

one pixel apart

62.

If S is a subset of pixels, pixels p and q are said to be ____________ if there exists a path between them
consisting of pixels entirely in S.

a.

continuous
b.

ambiguous

c.

connected

d.

none of the Mentioned

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult! Search Google

Answer: (c).

connected

63.

If R is a subset of pixels, we call R a _________ of the image if R is a connected set.

a.

Disjoint

b.

Region

c.

Closed

d.

Adjacent

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult! Search Google

Answer: (b).

Region

64.

Two regions are said to be ___________ if their union forms a connected set.
a.

Adjacent

b.

Disjoint

c.

Closed

d.

None of the Mentioned

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult! Search Google

Answer: (a).

Adjacent

65.

If an image contains K disjoint regions, what does the union of all the regions represent?

a.

Background

b.

Foreground

c.

Outer Border

d.

Inner Border

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult! Search Google

Answer: (b).

Foreground
66.

For a region R, the set of points that are adjacent to the complement of R is called as ________

a.

Boundary

b.

Border

c.

Contour

d.

All of the Mentioned

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult! Search Google

Answer: (d).

All of the Mentioned

67.

The distance between pixels p and q, the pixels have a distance less than or equal to some value of
radius r centred at (x,y) is called :

a.

Euclidean distance

b.

City-Block distance

c.

Chessboard distance

d.

None of the Mentioned

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult! Search Google

Answer: (a).
Euclidean distance

68.

The distance between pixels p and q, the pixels have a distance less than or equal to some value of
radius r, form a diamond centred at (x,y) is called :

a.

Euclidean distance

b.

Chessboard distance

c.

City-Block distance

d.

None of the Mentioned

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult! Search Google

Answer: (c).

City-Block distance

69.

The distance between pixels p and q, the pixels have a distance less than or equal to some value of
radius r, form a square centred at (x,y) is called :

a.

Euclidean distance

b.

Chessboard distance

c.

City-Block distance

d.
None of the Mentioned

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult! Search Google

Answer: (b).

Chessboard distance

Powered by

Valueimpression

70.

Which of the following is NOT is not a type of Adjacency?

a.

4-Adjacency

b.

8-Adjacency
c.

m-Adjacency

d.

None of the Mentioned

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult! Search Google

Answer: (d).

None of the Mentioned

1.

Intensity levels in 8bit image are

a.

128

b.

255

c.

256

d.

512

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (c).

256

2.

In an image accentuating a specific range is called

a.
slicing

b.

color slicing

c.

cutting

d.

color enhancement

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (b).

color slicing

3.

RGB colors on internet applications are called

a.

safe colors

b.

colors space

c.

web colors

d.

safe web colors

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (d).

safe web colors

4.

Color transformation is processed between the

a.

single color model

b.

dual color model

c.

tri color model

d.

any color model

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (a).

single color model

5.

Black color in image processing is usually represented by the

a.

b.

c.

255

d.

256

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (a).

6.
CRT technology stands for

a.

carbon ray tube

b.

cathode ray tube

c.

cathode ray technology

d.

carbon ray technology

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (b).

cathode ray tube

7.

Full color images have at least

a.

2 components

b.

3 components

c.

4 components

d.

5 components

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (b).

3 components
8.

For HSI color space, no of transformations will be

a.

n=2

b.

n=3

c.

n=4

d.

n=5

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (b).

n=3

9.

Hue and saturation, both together produce

a.

brightness

b.

transitivity

c.

chromaticity

d.

reflectivity

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (c).
chromaticity

10.

Equation that describes the hue is

a.

H = H-90

b.

H = H-100

c.

H = H-120

d.

H = H-180

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (c).

H = H-120

11.

Image can be blurred using

a.

low pass filter

b.

contouring

c.

erosion

d.

high pass filter

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (a).

low pass filter

12.

0 degree of red color in hue image will correspond to

a.

boundary

b.

edges

c.

white region

d.

black region

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (d).

black region

13.

Black level is represented by the formula

a.

[Æ’ (x) = 0]

b.

[Æ’ (y) = 0]

c.

[Æ’ (x,y) = 0]

d.
[Æ’ (x,y) = 1]

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (c).

[Æ’ (x,y) = 0]

14.

In c(x,y) the x, y are the

a.

spatial variables

b.

frequency variables

c.

intensity variables

d.

Both a and b

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (a).

spatial variables

15.

Green plus blue color produces

a.

yellow

b.

red

c.

magenta
d.

cyan

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (d).

cyan

16.

Image can be sharpened using

a.

low pass filter

b.

contouring

c.

erosion

d.

high pass filter

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (d).

high pass filter

17.

White color in a Cartesian coordinate system can be represented as

a.

(0,1,1)

b.

(0,1,0)

c.
(0,0,1)

d.

(1,1,1)

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (d).

(1,1,1)

18.

Three primary colors are

a.

Red, green, blue

b.

Red, cyan, blue

c.

Red, white, black

d.

Red, green, yellow

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (a).

Red, green, blue

19.

Brightness of the light is a subject

a.

oriented

b.

descriptor
c.

matter

d.

defined

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (b).

descriptor

20.

Transformation set is also called

a.

color mapping functions

b.

color space

c.

chromaticity

d.

Cartesian coordinate system

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (a).

color mapping functions

21.

The total amount of energy from the light source is called

a.

brightness
b.

reflectance

c.

luminance

d.

radiance

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (d).

radiance

22.

LCD stands for

a.

liquid crystal device

b.

large crystal display

c.

liquid crystal display

d.

large crystal device

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (c).

liquid crystal display

23.

L*a*b color system is

a.

color mapping functions

b.

Cartesian system

c.

chromaticity

d.

colorimetric

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (d).

colorimetric

24.

Radiance is measured in

a.

joule

b.

watt

c.

lumens

d.

meter

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (b).

watt

25.
Color model is also called

a.

color system

b.

color space

c.

color area

d.

Both a and b

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (d).

Both a and b

26.

Hues opposites to each others are known as

a.

edges

b.

boundaries

c.

complements

d.

saturation

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (c).

complements
27.

The phenomena of perceiving color through human eye is called

a.

physiopsychological

b.

psychological

c.

physiological

d.

physiopsychology

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (a).

physiopsychological

28.

The color spectrum consists of

a.

4 colors

b.

6 colors

c.

7 colors

d.

8 colors

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (b).
6 colors

29.

Pseudo colors are also known as

a.

true colors

b.

false colors

c.

primary colors

d.

secondary colors

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (b).

false colors

30.

One that is not a color model is

a.

RCB

b.

CMYK

c.

RGB

d.

HSI

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (a).

RCB

31.

Intensity can be converted to color transformation by assigning colors to

a.

pixels

b.

coordinates

c.

pixel depth

d.

intensity levels

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (d).

intensity levels

32.

Color model used for monitors is

a.

CMYK

b.

BGR

c.

RGB

d.
CMR

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (c).

RGB

33.

RGB colors have range

a.

[0,1]

b.

[1,2]

c.

[1,0]

d.

[-1,1]

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (a).

[0,1]

34.

Luminance is measured in

a.

joule

b.

watt

c.

lumens
d.

meter

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (c).

lumens

35.

The amount of energy perceived by the human through the light source is called

a.

brightness

b.

reflectance

c.

luminance

d.

radiance

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (c).

luminance

36.

RGB colors in equal amount give

a.

white color

b.

magenta color

c.
yellow color

d.

cyan color

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (a).

white color

37.

In low key images the information lies at

a.

high intensities

b.

low intensities

c.

middle intensities

d.

zero intensities

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (b).

low intensities

38.

Full color image is a

a.

20 bit image

b.

24 bit image
c.

28 bit image

d.

32 bit image

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (b).

24 bit image

39.

Color transformation is modeled using

a.

g(x,y) = [Æ’ (x,y)]

b.

g(x,y) = T[Æ’ (x)]

c.

g(x,y) = T[Æ’ (y)]

d.

g(x,y) = T[Æ’ (x,y)]

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (d).

g(x,y) = T[Æ’ (x,y)]

40.

The color of an object is determined by the light

a.

refracted

b.
transmitted

c.

reflected

d.

absorbed

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (c).

reflected

41.

The parameter to distinguish between colors is

a.

hue

b.

saturation

c.

descriptor

d.

Both a and b

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (d).

Both a and b

42.

Color transformation technique is used in

a.
image processing

b.

multispectral image processing

c.

multi image processing

d.

spectral image processing

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (b).

multispectral image processing

43.

HSI color model stands for

a.

hue, system, intensity

b.

hue, saturation, intensity

c.

high, saturation, intensity

d.

high, system, intensity

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (b).

hue, saturation, intensity

44.

RGB space is also known as

a.

pixels

b.

coordinates

c.

pixel depth

d.

color depth

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (c).

pixel depth

45.

For CMYK color space, no of transformations will be

a.

n=2

b.

n=3

c.

n=4

d.

n=5

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (c).

n=4

46.
RGB color system is based upon

a.

Cartesian plane

b.

Cartesian system

c.

Cartesian plane system

d.

Cartesian coordinate system

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (d).

Cartesian coordinate system

47.

The visible spectrum ranges

a.

300-600 nm

b.

400-700 nm

c.

500-800 nm

d.

600-900 nm

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (b).

400-700 nm
48.

Intensity slicing is called

a.

density slicing

b.

image slicing

c.

color slicing

d.

region slicing

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (a).

density slicing

49.

Color pixel is

a.

scalar

b.

coordinate

c.

vector

d.

Both a and b

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (c).
vector

50.

Color model used for printers is

a.

CMYK

b.

RCB

c.

RGB

d.

CMR

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (a).

CMYK

51.

How many categories does the color image processing is basically divided into?

a.

b.

c.

d.
5

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (b).

52.

What are the names of categories of color image processing?

a.

Full-color and pseudo-color processing

b.

Half-color and full-color processing

c.

Half-color and pseudo-color processing

d.

Pseudo-color and Multi-color processing

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (a).

Full-color and pseudo-color processing

53.

What are the basic quantities that are used to describe the quality of a chromatic light source?

a.

Radiance, brightness and wavelength

b.

Brightness and luminence

c.

Radiance, brightness and luminence

d.

Luminence and radiance

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (c).

Radiance, brightness and luminence

54.

What is the quantity that is used to measure the total amount of energy flowing from the light source?

a.

Brightness

b.

Intensity

c.

Luminence

d.

Radiance

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (d).

Radiance

55.

What are the characteristics that are used to distinguish one color from the other?

a.

Brightness, Hue and Saturation

b.

Hue, Brightness and Intensity

c.
Saturation, Hue

d.

Brightness, Saturation and Intensity

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (a).

Brightness, Hue and Saturation

56.

What are the characteristics that are taken together in chromaticity?

a.

Saturation and Brightness

b.

Hue and Saturation

c.

Hue and Brightness

d.

Saturation, Hue and Brightness

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (b).

Hue and Saturation

57.

Which of the following represent the correct equations for trichromatic coefficients?

a.

x=X/(X+Y+Z), y=Y/(X+Y+Z), z=Z/(X+Y+Z)

b.

x=(Y+Z)/(X+Y+Z), y=(X+Z)/(X+Y+Z), z=(X+Y)/(X+Y+Z)

c.

x=X/(X-Y+Z), y=Y/(X-Y+Z), z=Z/(X-Y+Z)

d.

x=(-X)/(X+Y+Z), y=(-Y)/(X+Y+Z), z=(-Z)/(X+Y+Z)

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (a).

x=X/(X+Y+Z), y=Y/(X+Y+Z), z=Z/(X+Y+Z)

58.

What do you mean by tri-stimulus values?

a.

It is the amount of red, green and yellow needed to form any particular color

b.

It is the amount of red, green and indigo needed to form any particular color

c.

It is the amount of red, yellow and blue needed to form any particular color

d.

It is the amount of red, green and blue needed to form any particular color

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (d).

It is the amount of red, green and blue needed to form any particular color

59.

What is the value obtained by the sum of the three trichromatic coefficients?

a.

b.
1

c.

d.

Null

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (c).

60.

What is the name of area of the triangle in C.I E chromatic diagram that shows a typical range of colors
produced by RGB monitors?

a.

Color gamut

b.

Tricolor

c.

Color game

d.

Chromatic colors

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (a).

Color gamut

61.

Color model is also named as (another name):

a.

Color space

b.

Color gap

c.

Color space & color system

d.

Color system

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (c).

Color space & color system

62.

What do you mean by the term pixel depth?

a.

It is the number of bits used to represent each pixel in RGB space

b.

It is the number of bytes used to represent each pixel in RGB space

c.

It is the number of units used to represent each pixel in RGB space

d.

It is the number of mm used to represent each pixel in RGB space

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (a).

It is the number of bits used to represent each pixel in RGB space

63.
How many bit RGB color image is represented by full-color image?

a.

32-bit RGB color image

b.

24-bit RGB color image

c.

16-bit RGB color image

d.

8-bit RGB color image

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (b).

24-bit RGB color image

64.

What is the equation used to obtain S component of each RGB pixel in RGB color format?

a.

S=1+3/(R+G+B) [min⁡(R,G,B)].

b.

S=1+3/(R+G+B) [max⁡(R,G,B)].

c.

S=1-3/(R+G+B) [max⁡(R,G,B)].

d.

S=1-3/(R+G+B) [min⁡(R,G,B)].

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (d).

S=1-3/(R+G+B) [min⁡(R,G,B)].
65.

What is the equation used to obtain I(Intensity) component of each RGB pixel in RGB color format?

a.

I=1/2(R+G+B)

b.

I=1/3(R+G+B)

c.

I=1/3(R-G-B)

d.

I=1/3(R-G+B)

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (b).

I=1/3(R+G+B)

66.

What is the equation used for obtaining R value in terms of HSI components?

a.

R=I[1-(S cos⁡H)/cos⁡(60°-H) ].

b.

R=I[1+(S cos⁡H)/cos(120°-H)].

c.

R=I[1+(S cos⁡H)/cos⁡(60°-H) ].

d.

R=I[1+(S cos⁡H)/cos(30°-H) ].

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (c).
R=I[1+(S cos⁡H)/cos⁡(60°-H) ].

67.

What is the equation used for calculating B value in terms of HSI components?

a.

B=I(1+S)

b.

B=S(1-I)

c.

B=S(1+I)

d.

B=I(1-S)

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (d).

B=I(1-S)

68.

What is the equation used for calculating G value in terms of HSI components?

a.

G=3I-(R+B)

b.

G=3I+(R+B)

c.

G=3I-(R-B)

d.

G=2I-(R+B)

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (a).

G=3I-(R+B)

69.

Which of the following color models are used for color printing?

a.

RGB

b.

CMY

c.

CMYK

d.

CMY and CMYK

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (d).

CMY and CMYK

Image Segmentation

1.

Digital functions' derivatives are defined as

a.

differences

b.

multiplication
c.

addition

d.

division

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult! Search Google

2.

For line detection we use mask that is

a.

Gaussian

b.

laplacian

c.

ideal

d.

butterworth

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult! Search Google

3.

Gradient computation equation is

a.

|Gx|+|Gy|

b.

|Gx|-|Gy|

c.

|Gx|/|Gy|
d.

|Gx|x|Gy|

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult! Search Google

4.

For finding horizontal lines we use mask of values

a.

[-1 -1 -1; 2 2 2; -1 -1 -1]

b.

[2 -1 -1; -1 2 -1; -1 -1 2]

c.

[-1 2 -1; -1 2 -1; -1 2 -1]

d.

[-1 -1 2; -1 2 -1;2 -1 -1]

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult! Search Google

5.

If the inner region of the object is textured then approach we use is

a.

discontinuity

b.

similarity

c.

extraction

d.

recognition
View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult! Search Google

6.

The horizontal gradient pixels are denoted by

a.

Gx

b.

Gy

c.

Gt

d.

Gs

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult! Search Google

7.

To avoid the negative values taking absolute values in lapacian image doubles

a.

thickness of lines

b.

thinness of lines

c.

thickness of edges

d.

thinness of edges

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult! Search Google

8.

First derivative approximation says that values of constant intensities must be

a.

b.

c.

positive

d.

negative

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult! Search Google

9.

For finding lines at angle 45 we use mask of values

a.

[-1 -1 -1; 2 2 2; -1 -1 -1]

b.

[2 -1 -1; -1 2 -1; -1 -1 2]

c.

[-1 2 -1; -1 2 -1; -1 2 -1]

d.

[-1 -1 2; -1 2 -1;2 -1 -1]

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult! Search Google

Powered by

Valueimpression

10.

Second derivative approximation says that values along the ramp must be

a.

nonzero

b.

zero

c.

positive

d.

negative

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult! Search Google

11.

Ri is a connected set, where is

a.

1,2,3,4

b.

1,2,3…10

c.

1,2,3…50

d.

1,2,3…n

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult! Search Google

Answer: (d).

1,2,3…n

12.

Gradient magnitude images are more useful in

a.

point detection

b.

line detection

c.

area detection

d.

edge detection

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult! Search Google

Answer: (d).

edge detection

13.

Image having gradient pixels is called

a.

sharp image

b.

blur image

c.

gradient image

d.

binary image

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult! Search Google

Answer: (c).

gradient image

14.

In laplacian images light shades of gray level is represented by

a.

b.

c.

positive

d.
negative

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult! Search Google

Answer: (c).

positive

15.

For noise reduction we use

a.

image smoothing

b.

image contouring

c.

image enhancement

d.

image recognition

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult! Search Google

Answer: (a).

image smoothing

16.

Diagonal lines are angles at

a.

b.

30

c.
45

d.

90

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult! Search Google

Answer: (c).

45

17.

Transition between objects and background shows

a.

ramp edges

b.

step edges

c.

sharp edges

d.

Both a and b

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult! Search Google

Answer: (d).

Both a and b

18.

Horizontal lines are angles at

a.

b.
30

c.

45

d.

90

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult! Search Google

Answer: (a).

19.

Standard deviation is referred to as noiseless if having the value

a.

0.1

b.

0.2

c.

0.3

d.

0.4

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult! Search Google

Answer: (a).

0.1
Powered by

Valueimpression

20.

For edge detection we use

a.

first derivative

b.

second derivative

c.

third derivative

d.

Both a and b

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult! Search Google

Answer: (a).

first derivative
21.

Step edge transition is between pixels over the distance of

a.

1 pixel

b.

2 pixels

c.

3 pixels

d.

4 pixels

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult! Search Google

Answer: (a).

1 pixel

22.

Sobel gradient is not that good for detection of

a.

horizontal lines

b.

vertical lines

c.

Diagonal lines

d.

edges

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult! Search Google

Answer: (c).

Diagonal lines

23.

Smoothness reduced the bricks of

a.

pixels

b.

constant intensities

c.

point pixels

d.

edges

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult! Search Google

Answer: (d).

edges

24.

Second derivative approximation says that it is nonzero only at

a.

ramp

b.

step

c.

onset
d.

edges

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult! Search Google

Answer: (c).

onset

25.

Method in which images are input and attributes are output is called

a.

low level processes

b.

high level processes

c.

mid level processes

d.

edge level processes

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult! Search Google

Answer: (c).

mid level processes

26.

Computation of derivatives in segmentation is also called

a.

spatial filtering

b.

frequency filtering
c.

low pass filtering

d.

high pass filtering

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult! Search Google

Answer: (a).

spatial filtering

27.

Model of lines through region is called

a.

ramp edges

b.

step edge

c.

roof edges

d.

thinness of edges

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult! Search Google

Answer: (c).

roof edges

28.

Transition of intensity takes place between

a.

adjacent pixels
b.

near pixels

c.

edge pixels

d.

line pixels

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult! Search Google

Answer: (a).

adjacent pixels

29.

Averaging is analogous to

a.

differentiation

b.

derivation

c.

addition

d.

integration

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult! Search Google

Answer: (d).

integration
30.

Response of derivative mask is zero at

a.

sharp intensities

b.

constant intensities

c.

low intensities

d.

high intensities

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult! Search Google

Answer: (b).

constant intensities

31.

Subdivision of the image depends upon the

a.

problem

b.

objects

c.

image

d.

partition

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult! Search Google

Answer: (a).

problem

32.

One that is not a method of image segmentation is

a.

area

b.

line

c.

point

d.

edge

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult! Search Google

Answer: (a).

area
33.

Discontinuity approach of segmentation depends upon

a.

low frequencies

b.

smooth changes

c.

abrupt changes

d.

contrast

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult! Search Google

Answer: (c).

abrupt changes

34.

On ramp and step second derivatives produce

a.

single edge effect

b.

single effect

c.

double edge effect

d.

double line effect

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult! Search Google

Answer: (c).

double edge effect

35.

Point detection is done using filter that is

a.

Gaussian

b.

laplacian

c.

ideal

d.

butterworth

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult! Search Google

Answer: (b).

laplacian

36.

Second derivatives are zero at points on

a.

ramp

b.

step

c.

constant intensity

d.
edge

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult! Search Google

Answer: (a).

ramp

37.

Two regions are said to be adjacent if their union forms

a.

connected set

b.

boundaries

c.

region

d.

image

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult! Search Google

Answer: (a).

connected set

38.

8bit image has intensity levels of

a.

b.

128

c.
255

d.

256

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult! Search Google

Answer: (d).

256

39.

Sobel operators were introduced in

a.

1970

b.

1971

c.

1972

d.

1973

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult! Search Google

Answer: (a).

1970
40.

Blurring attenuate the

a.

pixels

b.

points

c.

cross gradient

d.

intensity

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult! Search Google

Answer: (d).

intensity

41.

A line is viewed as

a.

area

b.
edge segment

c.

point

d.

edge

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult! Search Google

Answer: (b).

edge segment

42.

Sobel is better than prewitt in image

a.

sharpening

b.

blurring

c.

smoothing

d.

contrast

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult! Search Google

Answer: (c).

smoothing

43.

Intensity's local changes can be detected through

a.
differentiation

b.

derivation

c.

addition

d.

integration

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult! Search Google

Answer: (b).

derivation

44.

For line detection we assume that lines are

a.

thin

b.

thick

c.

sharp

d.

blur

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult! Search Google

Answer: (a).

thin

45.
Example of similarity approach in image segmentation is

a.

edge based segmentation

b.

boundary based segmentation

c.

region based segmentation

d.

Both a and b

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult! Search Google

Answer: (c).

region based segmentation

46.

The preferred direction of mask is weighted with the

a.

low value coefficients

b.

high value coefficients

c.

mid value coefficients

d.

double value coefficients

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult! Search Google

Answer: (b).
high value coefficients

47.

Points other than exceeding the threshold in output image are marked as

a.

b.

c.

11

d.

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult! Search Google

Answer: (a).

48.

In laplacian images dark shades of gray level is represented by

a.

b.

c.

positive

d.

negative
View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult! Search Google

Answer: (d).

negative

49.

Pixels where intensity changes abruptly are called

a.

area pixels

b.

line pixels

c.

point pixels

d.

edge pixels

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult! Search Google

Answer: (d).

edge pixels
50.

Isolated point is also called

a.

edge point

b.

noise point

c.

ramp

d.

step

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult! Search Google

Answer b

Noise point

51.

Points exceeding the threshold in output image are marked as

a.

b.

c.

11

d.
x

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult! Search Google

Answer: (b).

52.

Example of discontinuity approach in image segmentation is

a.

edge based segmentation

b.

boundary based segmentation

c.

region based segmentation

d.

Both a and b

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult! Search Google

Answer: (d).

Both a and b

53.

First derivative approximation says that values of intensities at the onset must be

a.

nonzero

b.

zero

c.
positive

d.

negative

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult! Search Google

Answer: (a).

nonzero

54.

Image segmentation is also based on

a.

morphology

b.

set theory

c.

extraction

d.

recognition

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult! Search Google

Answer: (a).

morphology

55.

Image whose principle features are edges is called

a.

orthogonal

b.
isolated

c.

edge map

d.

edge normal

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult! Search Google

Answer: (c).

edge map

56.

Vertical lines are angles at

a.

b.

30

c.

45

d.

90

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult! Search Google

Answer: (d).

90

57.

If R is the entire region of the image then union of all segmented parts should be equal to

a.
R

b.

R'

c.

Ri

d.

Rn

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult! Search Google

Answer: (a).

58.

Mask's response to zero means

a.

sum to zero

b.

subtraction to zero

c.

division to zero

d.

multiplication to zero

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult! Search Google

Answer: (a).

sum to zero

59.
Lines in an image can be oriented at angle

a.

b.

90

c.

30

d.

Both a and b

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult! Search Google

Answer: (d).

Both a and b

60.

Laplacian images need

a.

contraction

b.

expansion

c.

scaling

d.

enhancement

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult! Search Google

Answer: (c).
scaling

51.

Points exceeding the threshold in output image are marked as

a.

b.

c.

11

d.

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult! Search Google

Answer: (b).

52.

Example of discontinuity approach in image segmentation is

a.

edge based segmentation

b.

boundary based segmentation

c.

region based segmentation

d.

Both a and b

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult! Search Google

Answer: (d).

Both a and b

53.

First derivative approximation says that values of intensities at the onset must be

a.

nonzero

b.

zero

c.

positive

d.

negative

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult! Search Google

Answer: (a).

nonzero

54.

Image segmentation is also based on

a.

morphology

b.

set theory
c.

extraction

d.

recognition

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult! Search Google

Answer: (a).

morphology

55.

Image whose principle features are edges is called

a.

orthogonal

b.

isolated

c.

edge map

d.

edge normal

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult! Search Google

Answer: (c).

edge map

56.

Vertical lines are angles at

a.

0
b.

30

c.

45

d.

90

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult! Search Google

Answer: (d).

90

57.

If R is the entire region of the image then union of all segmented parts should be equal to

a.

b.

R'

c.

Ri

d.

Rn

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult! Search Google

Answer: (a).

58.

Mask's response to zero means

a.

sum to zero

b.

subtraction to zero

c.

division to zero

d.

multiplication to zero

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult! Search Google

Answer: (a).

sum to zero

59.

Lines in an image can be oriented at angle

a.

b.

90

c.

30

d.

Both a and b

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult! Search Google

Answer: (d).

Both a and b
Powered by

Valueimpression

60.

Laplacian images need

a.

contraction

b.

expansion

c.

scaling

d.

enhancement

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult! Search Google

Answer: (c).

scaling

61.

For point detection we use

a.

first derivative

b.

second derivative

c.

third derivative

d.

Both a and b

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult! Search Google

Answer: (b).

second derivative

62.

Textured inner region of the object produces

a.

good boundary extraction

b.

excellent boundary extraction

c.
good boundary deletion

d.

excellent boundary deletion

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult! Search Google

Answer: (a).

good boundary extraction

63.

If the standard deviation of the pixels is positive, then sub image is labeled as

a.

black

b.

green

c.

white

d.

red

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult! Search Google

Answer: (c).

white

64.

Thresholding gives the

a.

large image

b.
gray scale image

c.

color image

d.

binary image

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult! Search Google

Answer: (d).

binary image

65.

Marr hildreth method was introduced in

a.

1980

b.

1981

c.

1982

d.

1983

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult! Search Google

Answer: (a).

1980

66.

Segmentation is a process of

a.
low level processes

b.

high level processes

c.

mid level processes

d.

edge level processes

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult! Search Google

Answer: (c).

mid level processes

67.

Log function is also called

a.

Gaussian

b.

gray scale image

c.

gradient image

d.

Mexican hat

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult! Search Google

Answer: (d).

Mexican hat

68.
Segmentation algorithms depends on intensity values'

a.

discontinuity

b.

similarity

c.

continuity

d.

Both a and b

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult! Search Google

Answer: (d).

Both a and b

69.

Sudden changes in intensity produces peak in

a.

first derivative

b.

second derivative

c.

third derivative

d.

Both a and b

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult! Search Google

Answer: (a).

first derivative
Powered by

Valueimpression

70.

Ideal edges occur over the distance of

a.

1 pixel

b.

2 pixels

c.

3 pixels

d.

4 pixels
View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult! Search Google

Answer: (a).

1 pixel

71.

Image intensities are normally ranged to

a.

[0 1]

b.

[0 2]

c.

[0 255]

d.

[0 256]

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult! Search Google

Answer: (a).

[0 1]

72.

Edge detector method is used to detect

a.

area

b.

line
c.

point

d.

edge

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult! Search Google

Answer: (d).

edge

73.

Accuracy of image segmentation can be improved by the type of

a.

processes

b.

images

c.

divisions

d.

sensors

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult! Search Google

Answer: (d).

sensors

74.

During segmentation every pixel of an image should be in

a.

connected set
b.

boundaries

c.

region

d.

concerned area

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult! Search Google

Answer: (c).

region

75.

The vertical gradient pixels are denoted by

a.

Gx

b.

Gy

c.

Gt

d.

Gs

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult! Search Google

Answer: (b).

Gy

76.

For line detection we use

a.

first derivative

b.

second derivative

c.

third derivative

d.

Both a and b

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult! Search Google

Answer: (b).

second derivative

77.

Marr hildreth method was introduced for

a.

sharpening

b.

segmentation

c.

edge finding

d.

recognition

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult! Search Google

Answer: (c).

edge finding
78.

When the desired object is detected segmentation should be

a.

paused

b.

cleared

c.

continued

d.

stopped

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult! Search Google

Answer: (d).

stopped

79.

Similarity approach of segmentation depends upon

a.

low frequencies

b.

smooth changes

c.

abrupt changes

d.

contrast

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult! Search Google

Answer: (b).
smooth changes

Powered by

Valueimpression

80.

For edge detection we combine gradient with

a.

sharpening

b.

set theory

c.

smoothing

d.
thresholding

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult! Search Google

Answer: (d).

thresholding

81.

Lines are referred as

a.

ramp edges

b.

step edges

c.

roof edges

d.

Both a and b

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult! Search Google

Answer: (c).

roof edges

82.

LOG stands for

a.

laplacian of Gaussian

b.
length of Gaussian

c.

laplacian of gray level

d.

length of gray level

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult! Search Google

Answer: (a).

laplacian of Gaussian

83.

Summation square and square root are called

a.

logical operations

b.

arithmetic operation

c.

vector operations

d.

array operations

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult! Search Google

Answer: (d).

array operations

84.

The magnitude of vector is its

a.
distance

b.

length

c.

strength

d.

edge

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult! Search Google

Answer: (b).

length

85.

Second derivative approximation says that values of constant intensities must be

a.

b.

c.

positive

d.

negative

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult! Search Google

Answer: (b).

86.
Gradient image is formed by the component

a.

Gx

b.

Gy

c.

Gt

d.

Both a and b

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult! Search Google

Answer: (d).

Both a and b

87.

Double line effect is produced by

a.

first derivative

b.

second derivative

c.

third derivative

d.

Both a and b

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult! Search Google

Answer: (b).

second derivative
88.

Local averaging

a.

smooths image

b.

sharps image

c.

darkens image

d.

blurs image

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult! Search Google

Answer: (a).

smooths image

89.

Digital images have edges that are

a.

blur

b.

noisy

c.

clear

d.

Both a and b

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult! Search Google

Answer: (d).

Both a and b

90.

Edges arise between thin objects and backgrounds are

a.

ramp edges

b.

step edge

c.

roof edges

d.

thinness of edges

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult! Search Google

Answer: (c).
roof edges

91.

For edge detection we observes

a.

intensity transition

b.

shape transition

c.

color transition

d.

sign transition

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult! Search Google

Answer: (d).

sign transition

92.

For diagonal edge detection we use

a.

1D mask

b.

2D mask

c.

3D mask

d.
4D mask

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult! Search Google

Answer: (b).

2D mask

93.

Thresholding is the example of

a.

discontinuity

b.

similarity

c.

continuity

d.

recognition

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult! Search Google

Answer: (b).

similarity

94.

Algorithm stating that boundaries of the image are different from background is

a.

discontinuity

b.

similarity

c.
extraction

d.

recognition

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult! Search Google

Answer: (a).

discontinuity

95.

Intersection between zero intensity and extreme of second derivative is called

a.

discontinuity

b.

similarity

c.

continuity

d.

zero crossing

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult! Search Google

Answer: (d).

zero crossing

96.

Edge detection has fundamental

a.

2 points

b.
3 points

c.

4 points

d.

5 points

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult! Search Google

Answer: (b).

3 points

97.

Regions of the image must be

a.

joint

b.

disjoint

c.

connected

d.

overlapped

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult! Search Google

Answer: (b).

disjoint

98.

More smoothness is created by the mask of size

a.
1x1

b.

2x2

c.

3x3

d.

5x5

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult! Search Google

Answer: (d).

5x5

99.

The direction of angle to the gradient is

a.

orthogonal

b.

isolated

c.

isomorphic

d.

isotropic

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult! Search Google

Answer: (a).

orthogonal
Powered by

Valueimpression

100.

Second derivative approximation says that value at end of ramp must be

a.

nonzero

b.

zero

c.

positive

d.

negative

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult! Search Google

Answer: (a).
nonzero

101.

In the sense of predicate two regions of the image must be

a.

same

b.

disjoint

c.

different

d.

overlapped

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult! Search Google

Answer: (c).

different

102.

If all lines in the direction of defined direction of mask are wished to be found then we use

a.

thick edges

b.

thin edges

c.

thresholding

d.
enhancement

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult! Search Google

Answer: (c).

thresholding

103.

If inside the boundary is white otherwise black predicate is

a.

TRUE

b.

FALSE

c.

d.

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult! Search Google

Answer: (a).

TRUE

104.

One angle at which the lines in an image are not oriented is

a.

b.

30

c.
45

d.

90

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult! Search Google

Answer: (c).

45

105.

Edge detection is based on

a.

abrupt changes

b.

smooths changes

c.

thickness of edges

d.

thinness of edges

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult! Search Google

Answer: (a).

abrupt changes

106.

Dividing image into its objects is called

a.

Division

b.
segmentation

c.

extraction

d.

recognition

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult! Search Google

Answer: (b).

segmentation

107.

The coefficients of masks sum to

a.

b.

c.

positive

d.

negative

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult! Search Google

Answer: (a).

108.

Sum of coefficients of derivative mask is

a.
0

b.

c.

positive

d.

negative

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult! Search Google

Answer: (a).

109.

Fine details can be reduced by

a.

sharpening

b.

constant intensities

c.

smoothing

d.

contrast

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult! Search Google

Answer: (c).

smoothing
Powered by

Valueimpression

110.

The sum of LOG filter coefficients should be

a.

b.

c.

positive

d.

negative

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult! Search Google

Answer: (b).
0

111.

Canny edge detection algorithm is based on

a.

ideal model

b.

step edge

c.

real model

d.

smoothing model

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult! Search Google

Answer: (b).

step edge

112.

First derivatives are zero at points on

a.

ramp

b.

step

c.

constant intensity
d.

edge

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult! Search Google

Answer: (c).

constant intensity

113.

The resolution of the image (12x12) is

a.

12

b.

128

c.

144

d.

256

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult! Search Google

Answer: (c).

144

114.

In laplacian images mid gray level is represented by

a.

b.

1
c.

positive

d.

negative

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult! Search Google

Answer: (a).

115.

Locating the center of thick edges we use

a.

discontinuity

b.

constant intensities

c.

continuity

d.

zero crossing

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult! Search Google

Answer: (d).

zero crossing

116.

Strong Heat signatures can be detected using

a.

infrared imaging
b.

x-ray imaging

c.

microwave imaging

d.

UV imaging

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult! Search Google

Answer: (a).

infrared imaging

117.

Second derivatives have stronger response to

a.

noise

b.

thin lines

c.

edges

d.

Both a and b

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult! Search Google

Answer: (d).

Both a and b

118.

Edge pixels lie on darker or bright side of image can be determined by the
a.

sign of first derivative

b.

sign of second derivative

c.

sign of third derivative

d.

Both a and b

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult! Search Google

Answer: (b).

sign of second derivative

119.

First derivatives in image segmentation produces

a.

thick edges

b.

thin edges

c.

fine edges

d.

rough edges

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult! Search Google

Answer: (a).

thick edges
120.

Edge localization id edge detection's

a.

1st point

b.

2nd point

c.

3rd point

d.

4th point

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult! Search Google

Answer: (c).

3rd point
121.

To avoid the negative values in lapacian image we use only

a.

absolute values

b.

positive values

c.

negative values

d.

Both a and b

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult! Search Google

Answer: (b).

positive values

122.

Masks for detection of specific lines are called

a.

isolated

b.

tuned

c.

isomorphic

d.

isotropic

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult! Search Google

Answer: (b).

tuned

123.

Line whose length and width is of one pixel is called

a.

area

b.

points

c.

isolated point

d.

edge

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult! Search Google

Answer: (c).

isolated point

124.

Detection of edge points is edge detection's

a.

1st point

b.

2nd point

c.

3rd point

d.
4th point

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult! Search Google

Answer: (b).

2nd point

125.

Intersection of two connected sets of an image should be

a.

connected set

b.

empty set

c.

union

d.

complement

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult! Search Google

Answer: (b).

empty set

126.

Isotropic detectors are independent of

a.

pixels

b.

directions

c.
intensities

d.

edges

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult! Search Google

Answer: (b).

directions

127.

For finding vertical lines we use mask of values

a.

[-1 -1 -1; 2 2 2; -1 -1 -1]

b.

[2 -1 -1; -1 2 -1; -1 -1 2]

c.

[-1 2 -1; -1 2 -1; -1 2 -1]

d.

[-1 -1 2; -1 2 -1;2 -1 -1]

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult! Search Google

Answer: (c).

[-1 2 -1; -1 2 -1; -1 2 -1]

128.

For diagonal edge detection we use 2D mask of

a.

sobel gradient

b.
Robert cross gradient

c.

cross gradient

d.

pre witt gradient

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult! Search Google

Answer: (b).

Robert cross gradient

129.

For finding lines at angle -45 we use mask of values

a.

[-1 -1 -1; 2 2 2; -1 -1 -1]

b.

[2 -1 -1; -1 2 -1; -1 -1 2]

c.

[-1 2 -1; -1 2 -1; -1 2 -1]

d.

[-1 -1 2; -1 2 -1;2 -1 -1]

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult! Search Google

Answer: (d).

[-1 -1 2; -1 2 -1;2 -1 -1]

Powered by

Valueimpression

130.

Gradient vector is also called

a.

edge based segmentation

b.

edge segment

c.

edge pixels

d.

edge normal

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult! Search Google

Answer: (d).

edge normal
131.

First and second derivatives can be computed using

a.

spatial filters

b.

frequency filters

c.

low pass

d.

high pass

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult! Search Google

Answer: (a).

spatial filters

132.

First derivatives are positive at points on

a.

ramp

b.

step

c.

roof

d.

edges
View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult! Search Google

Answer: (a).

ramp

133.

For finding edge strength approach that is used is

a.

discontinuity

b.

constant intensities

c.

continuity

d.

gradient

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult! Search Google

Answer: (d).

gradient

134.

Image segment methods are of

a.

2 types

b.

3 types

c.

4 types
d.

5 types

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult! Search Google

Answer: (b).

3 types

135.

Thresholding gradient image produces good

a.

discontinuity

b.

segmentation

c.

continuity

d.

edge detection

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult! Search Google

Answer: (d).

edge detection

136.

Laplacian detector is

a.

coupled

b.

isolated
c.

isomorphic

d.

isotropic

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult! Search Google

Answer: (d).

isotropic

137.

Slope of the ramp and degree of blurring are

a.

directly proportional

b.

inversely proportional

c.

indirectly proportional

d.

exponentially proportional

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult! Search Google

Answer: (b).

inversely proportional

138.

One that is more sensitive to noise is

a.

first derivative
b.

second derivative

c.

third derivative

d.

Both a and b

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult! Search Google

Answer: (b).

second derivative

139.

Success of image segmentation is determined by its

a.

quality

b.

size

c.

accuracy

d.

pixels

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult! Search Google

Answer: (c).

accuracy
140.

Second derivatives in image segmentation produces

a.

thick edges

b.

thin edges

c.

fine edges

d.

rough edges

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult! Search Google

Answer fine edges

141.

Thresholding formulation measures difference between

a.
2 neighbors

b.

4 neighbors

c.

8 neighbors

d.

16 neighbors

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult! Search Google

Answer: (c).

8 neighbors

142.

Lines not assumed as thin as referred to as

a.

edges

b.

thick lines

c.

region

d.

points

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult! Search Google

Answer: (c).

region

143.
If all the regions are labeled with same intensity then it produces

a.

segmented effect

b.

regional effect

c.

unblocky effect

d.

blocky effect

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult! Search Google

Answer: (d).

blocky effect

144.

Electronic components determines the image's

a.

pixels

b.

noise

c.

thickness

d.

thinness

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult! Search Google

Answer: (b).
noise

145.

Segmentation is difficult for images that are

a.

trivial

b.

non trivial

c.

illuminated

d.

low resolution

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult! Search Google

Answer: (b).

non trivial

146.

First derivative approximation says that value at ramp must be

a.

nonzero

b.

zero

c.

positive

d.

negative
View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult! Search Google

Answer: (a).

nonzero

147.

Edge models are classified based upon their

a.

pixels

b.

edges

c.

intensities

d.

Both a and b

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult! Search Google

Answer: (c).

intensities

148.

Gradient of an image is obtained through

a.

differentiation

b.

derivation

c.

partial derivation
d.

integration

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult! Search Google

Answer: (c).

partial derivation

149.

Examples of similarity approach in segmentation are

a.

region growing

b.

region splitting

c.

extraction

d.

Both a and b

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult! Search Google

Answer: (d).

Both a and b
Powered by

Valueimpression

150.

What is the Euler number of the image shown below?

a.

b.

c.

d.

-1

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult! Search Google

Answer: (d).

-1

151.
What is the Euler number of the region shown in the figure below?

a.

b.

-2

c.

-1

d.

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult! Search Google

Answer: (b).

-2

152.

The chain code for the following shape is given as:

a.

000030032232221211

b.

003010203310321032

c.

022332103210201330

d.

012302301023100321
View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult! Search Google

Answer: (a).

000030032232221211

153.

What does the total number of pixels in the region defines?

a.

Perimeter

b.

Area

c.

Intensity

d.

Brightness

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult! Search Google

Answer: (b).

Area

154.

What is the unit of compactness of a region?

a.

Meter

b.

Meter2

c.

No units
d.

Meter-1

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult! Search Google

Answer: (c).

No units

155.

For which of the following regions, compactness is minimal?

a.

Rectangle

b.

Square

c.

Irregular

d.

Disk

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult! Search Google

Answer: (d).

Disk

156.

Compactness is insensitive to orientation.

a.

True

b.

False
c.

May be

d.

Can't Say

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult! Search Google

Answer: (a).

True

157.

Which of the following measures are not used to describe a region?

a.

Mean and median of grey values

b.

Minimum and maximum of grey values

c.

Number of pixels alone

d.

Number of pixels above and below mean

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult! Search Google

Answer: (c).

Number of pixels alone

158.

We cannot use normalized area as one of the region descriptor.

a.

True
b.

False

c.

May be

d.

Can't Say

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult! Search Google

Answer: (b).

False

159.

What is the study of properties of a figure that are unaffected by any deformation?

a.

Topology

b.

Geography

c.

Statistics

d.

Deformation

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult! Search Google

Answer: (a).

Topology
Powered by

Valueimpression

160.

On which of the following operation of an image, the topology of the region changes?

a.

Stretching

b.

Rotation

c.

Folding

d.

Change in distance measure

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult! Search Google

Answer: (c).

Folding
161.

Topological properties don’t depend on the distance measures.

a.

True

b.

False

c.

May be

d.

Can't Say

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult! Search Google

Answer: (a).

True

162.

What is the Euler number of a region with polygonal network containing V,Q and F as the number of
vertices, edges and faces respectively?

a.

V+Q+F

b.

V-Q+F

c.

V+Q-F

d.

V-Q-F
View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult! Search Google

Answer: (b).

V-Q+F

163.

The texture of the region provides measure of which of the following properties?

a.

Smoothness alone

b.

Coarseness alone

c.

Regularity alone

d.

Smoothness, coarseness and regularity

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult! Search Google

Answer: (d).

Smoothness, coarseness and regularity

164.

Structural techniques deal with the arrangement of image primitives.

a.

True

b.

False

c.

May be
d.

Can't Say

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult! Search Google

Answer: (a).

True

165.

Which of the following techniques is based on the Fourier transform?

a.

Structural

b.

Spectral

c.

Statistical

d.

Topological

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult! Search Google

Answer: (b).

Spectral

166.

The length of a boundary is one of the boundary descriptors.

a.

True

b.

False
c.

May be

d.

Can't Say

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult! Search Google

Answer: (a).

True

167.

Which of the following of a boundary is defined as the line perpendicular to the major axis?

a.

Equilateral axis

b.

Equidistant axis

c.

Minor axis

d.

Median axis

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult! Search Google

Answer: (c).

Minor axis

168.

Which of the following is the useful descriptor of a boundary, whose value is given by the ratio of length
of the major axis to the minor axis?

a.

Radius
b.

Perimeter

c.

Area

d.

Eccentricity

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult! Search Google

Answer: (d).

Eccentricity

169.

The term, Curvature is defined as:

a.

Rate of change of area

b.

Rate of change of slope

c.

Slope

d.

Rate of change of diameter

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult! Search Google

Answer: (b).

Rate of change of slope

Powered by

Valueimpression

170.

If the boundary is traversed in the clockwise direction, a vertex point ‘p’ is said to be a part of the convex
segment if the rate of change of slope at ‘p’ is:

a.

Negative

b.

Zero

c.

Non negative

d.

Cannot be determined

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult! Search Google

Answer: (c).

Non negative
171.

A point ‘p’ is said to be corner point, if the change of slope is less than 10 degrees.

a.

True

b.

False

c.

May be

d.

Can't Say

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult! Search Google

Answer: (b).

False

172.

Based on the 4-directional code, the first difference of smallest magnitude is called as:

a.

Shape number

b.

Chain number

c.

Difference

d.

Difference number
View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult! Search Google

Answer: (a).

Shape number

173.

The order of shape number for a closed boundary is:

a.

Odd

b.

Even

c.

d.

Any positive value

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult! Search Google

Answer: (b).

Even

174.

What is the order of the shape number of a rectangular boundary with the dimensions of 3×3?

a.

b.

c.

9
d.

12

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult! Search Google

Answer: (d).

12

175.

Statistical moments are used to describe the shape of boundary segments quantitatively.

a.

True

b.

False

c.

May be

d.

Can't Say

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult! Search Google

Answer: (a).

True

176.

Which of the following techniques of boundary descriptions have the physical interpretation of
boundary shape?

a.

Fourier transform

b.

Statistical moments

c.
Laplace transform

d.

Curvature

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult! Search Google

Answer: (b).

Statistical moments

177.

Statistical moments is sensitive to rotation.

a.

True

b.

False

c.

May be

d.

Can't Say

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult! Search Google

Answer: (b).

False

1.

The principal factor to determine the spatial resolution of an image is _______

a.
Quantization

b.

Sampling

c.

Contrast

d.

Dynamic range

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (b).

Sampling

2.

What causes the effect, imperceptible set of very fine ridge like structures in areas of smooth gray levels?

a.

Caused by the use of an insufficient number of gray levels in smooth areas of a digital image

b.

Caused by the use of huge number of gray levels in smooth areas of a digital image

c.

All of the mentioned

d.

None of the mentioned

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (a).

Caused by the use of an insufficient number of gray levels in smooth areas of a digital image

3.

What is the name of the effect caused by the use of an insufficient number of gray levels in smooth
areas of a digital image?
a.

Dynamic range

b.

Ridging

c.

Graininess

d.

False contouring

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (d).

False contouring

4.

Using rough rule of thumb, and assuming powers of 2 for convenience, what image size are about the
smallest images that can be expected to be reasonably free of objectionable sampling checkerboards
and false contouring?

a.

512*512pixels and 16 gray levels

b.

256*256pixels and 64 gray levels

c.

64*64pixels and 16 gray levels

d.

32*32pixels and 32 gray levels

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (b).

256*256pixels and 64 gray levels

5.

What does a shift up and right in the curves of isopreference curve simply means? Verify in terms of N
(number of pixels) and k (L=2k, L is the gray level) values.

a.

Smaller values for N and k, implies a better picture quality

b.

Larger values for N and k, implies low picture quality

c.

Larger values for N and k, implies better picture quality

d.

Smaller values for N and k, implies low picture quality

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (c).

Larger values for N and k, implies better picture quality

6.

How does the curves behave to the detail in the image in isopreference curve?

a.

Curves tend to become more vertical as the detail in the image decreases

b.

Curves tend to become less vertical as the detail in the image increases

c.

Curves tend to become less vertical as the detail in the image decreases

d.

Curves tend to become more vertical as the detail in the image increases

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (d).
Curves tend to become more vertical as the detail in the image increases

7.

For an image with a large amount of detail, if the value of N (number of pixels) is fixed then what is the
gray level dependency in the perceived quality of this type of image?

a.

Totally independent of the number of gray levels used

b.

Nearly independent of the number of gray levels used

c.

Highly dependent of the number of gray levels used

d.

None of the mentioned

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (b).

Nearly independent of the number of gray levels used

8.

What is a band-limited function?

a.

A function of limited duration whose highest frequency is finite

b.

A function of limited duration whose highest frequency is infinite

c.

d.

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (a).

A function of limited duration whose highest frequency is finite

9.

For a band-limited function, which Theorem says that “if the function is sampled at a rate equal to or
greater than twice its highest frequency, the original function can be recovered from its samples”?

a.

Band-limitation theorem

b.

Aliasing frequency theorem

c.

Shannon sampling theorem

d.

None of the mentioned

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (c).

Shannon sampling theorem

10.

What is the name of the phenomenon that corrupts the sampled image, and how does it happen?

a.

Shannon sampling, if the band-limited functions are undersampled

b.

Shannon sampling, if the band-limited functions are oversampled

c.

Aliasing, if the band-limited functions are undersampled

d.

Aliasing, if the band-limited functions are oversampled

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (c).
Aliasing, if the band-limited functions are undersampled

11.

How aliasing does corrupts the sampled image?

a.

By introducing additional frequency components to the sampled function

b.

By removing some frequency components from the sampled function

c.

All of the mentioned

d.

None of the mentioned

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (a).

By introducing additional frequency components to the sampled function

12.

How can one reduce the aliasing effect on an image?

a.

By reducing the high-frequency components of image by blurring the image

b.

By increasing the high-frequency components of image by blurring the image

c.

By reducing the high-frequency components of image by clarifying the image

d.

By increasing the high-frequency components of image by clarifying the image

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (a).

By reducing the high-frequency components of image by blurring the image

13.

In terms of Sampling and Quantization, Zooming and Shrinking may be viewed as ___________

a.

Oversampling for both

b.

Oversampling and Undersampling respectively

c.

Undersampling and Oversampling respectively

d.

Undersampling for both

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (b).

Oversampling and Undersampling respectively

14.

The two steps: one is the creation of new pixel locations, and other is the assignment of gray levels to
those new locations are involved in ____________

a.

Shrinking

b.

Zooming

c.

All of the mentioned

d.
None of the mentioned

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (b).

Zooming

15.

While Zooming, In order to perform gray-level assignment for any point in the overlay, we assign its gray
level to the new pixel in the grid its closest pixel in the original image. What’s this method of gray-level
assignment called?

a.

Neighbor Duplication

b.

Duplication

c.

Nearest neighbor Interpolation

d.

None of the mentioned

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (c).

Nearest neighbor Interpolation

16.

A special case of nearest neighbor Interpolation that just duplicates the pixels the number of times to
achieve the desired size, is known as ___________

a.

Bilinear Interpolation

b.

Contouring

c.
Ridging

d.

Pixel Replication

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (d).

Pixel Replication

17.

Nearest neighbor Interpolation has an undesirable feature, that is _________

a.

Aliasing effect

b.

False contouring effect

c.

Ridging effect

d.

Checkerboard effect

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (d).

Checkerboard effect

18.

What does the bilinear Interpolation do for gray-level assignment?

a.

Assign gray level to the new pixel using its right neighbor

b.

Assign gray level to the new pixel using its left neighbor
c.

Assign gray level to the new pixel using its four nearest neighbors

d.

Assign gray level to the new pixel using its eight nearest neighbors

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (c).

Assign gray level to the new pixel using its four nearest neighbors

19.

Row-column deletion method of Image Shrinking is an equivalent process to which method of Zooming?

a.

Bilinear Interpolation

b.

Contouring

c.

Pixel Replication

d.

There is no such equivalent process

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (c).

Pixel Replication

20.

Image Shrinking has an undesirable feature, that is ____________

a.

Aliasing effect

b.
False contouring effect

c.

Ridging effect

d.

Checkerboard effect

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (a).

Aliasing effect

21.

State for the validation of the statement:

“In general-purpose for a digital image of zooming and shrinking, where Bilinear Interpolation generally
is the method of choice over nearest neighbor Interpolation”.

a.

True

b.

False

c.

May be

d.

Can't Say

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (a).

True
22.

A pixel p at coordinates (x, y) has neighbors whose coordinates are given by:

(x+1, y), (x-1, y), (x, y+1), (x, y-1)

This set of pixels is called ____________

a.

4-neighbors of p

b.

Diagonal neighbors

c.

8-neighbors

d.

None of the mentioned

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (a).

4-neighbors of p

23.

A pixel p at coordinates (x, y) has neighbors whose coordinates are given by:

(x+1, y+1), (x+1, y-1), (x-1, y+1), (x-1, y-1)

This set of pixels is called ____________

a.

4-neighbors of p

b.

Diagonal neighbors

c.

8-neighbors
d.

None of the mentioned

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (b).

Diagonal neighbors

24.

What is the set of pixels of 8-neighbors of pixel p at coordinates (x, y)?

a.

(x+1, y), (x-1, y), (x, y+1), (x, y-1), (x+2, y), (x-2, y), (x, y+2), (x, y-2)

b.

(x+1, y), (x-1, y), (x, y+1), (x, y-1), (x+1, y+1), (x+1, y-1), (x-1, y+1), (x-1, y-1)

c.

(x+1, y+1), (x+1, y-1), (x-1, y+1), (x-1, y-1), (x+2, y+2), (x+2, y-2), (x-2, y+2), (x-2, y-2)

d.

(x+2, y), (x-2, y), (x, y+2), (x, y-2), (x+2, y+2), (x+2, y-2), (x-2, y+2), (x-2, y-2)

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (b).

(x+1, y), (x-1, y), (x, y+1), (x, y-1), (x+1, y+1), (x+1, y-1), (x-1, y+1), (x-1, y-1)

25.

Two pixels p and q having gray values from V, the set of gray-level values used to define adjacency, are
m-adjacent if:

a.

q is in N4(p)

b.

q is in ND(p) and the set N4(p) ∩ N4(q) has no pixels whose values are from V

c.
Any of the mentioned

d.

None of the mentioned

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (c).

Any of the mentioned

26.

Let S, a subset of pixels in an image, is said to be a connected set if:

a.

If for any pixel p in S, the set of pixels that are connected to it in Sis only one

b.

If it only has one connected component

c.

If S is a region

d.

All of the mentioned

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (d).

All of the mentioned

27.

Let R be a subset of pixels in an image. How can we define the contour of R?

a.

If R is a region, and the set of pixels in R have one or more neighbors that are not in R

b.

If R is an entire image, then the set of pixels in the first and last rows and columns of R
c.

All of the mentioned

d.

None of the mentioned

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (c).

All of the mentioned

28.

The domain that refers to image plane itself and the domain that refers to Fourier transform of an image
is/are :

a.

Spatial domain in both

b.

Frequency domain in both

c.

Spatial domain and Frequency domain respectively

d.

Frequency domain and Spatial domain respectively

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (c).

Spatial domain and Frequency domain respectively

29.

What is the technique for a gray-level transformation function called, if the transformation would be to
produce an image of higher contrast than the original by darkening the levels below some gray-level m
and brightening the levels above m in the original image.

a.

Contouring
b.

Contrast stretching

c.

Mask processing

d.

Point processing

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (b).

Contrast stretching

30.

For Image Enhancement a general-approach is to use a function of values of f (input image) in a

predefined neighborhood of (x, y) to determine the value of g (output image) at (x, y). The techniques
that uses such approaches are called ________

a.

Contouring

b.

Contrast stretching

c.

Mask processing

d.

None of the mentioned

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (c).

Mask processing

31.
Using gray-level transformation, the basic function linearity deals with which of the following
transformation?

a.

log and inverse-log transformations

b.

negative and identity transformations

c.

nth and nth root transformations

d.

All of the mentioned

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (b).

negative and identity transformations

32.

Using gray-level transformation, the basic function Logarithmic deals with which of the following
transformation?

a.

Log and inverse-log transformations

b.

Negative and identity transformations

c.

nth and nth root transformations

d.

All of the mentioned

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (a).
Log and inverse-log transformations

33.

Using gray-level transformation, the basic function power-law deals with which of the following
transformation?

a.

log and inverse-log transformations

b.

negative and identity transformations

c.

nth and nth root transformations

d.

all of the mentioned

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (b).

negative and identity transformations

34.

If r be the gray-level of image before processing and s after processing then which expression defines
the negative transformation, for the gray-level in the range [0, L-1]?

a.

s=L–1–r

b.

s = crᵞ, c and ᵞ are positive constants

c.

s = c log (1 + r), c is a constant and r ≥ 0

d.

none of the mentioned

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (a).

s=L–1–r

35.

If r be the gray-level of image before processing and s after processing then which expression helps to
obtain the negative of an image for the gray-level in the range [0, L-1]?

a.

s=L–1–r

b.

s = crᵞ, c and ᵞ are positive constants

c.

s = c log (1 + r), c is a constant and r ≥ 0

d.

none of the mentioned

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (c).

s = c log (1 + r), c is a constant and r ≥ 0

36.

If r be the gray-level of image before processing and s after processing then which expression defines
the power-law transformation, for the gray-level in the range [0, L-1]?

a.

s=L–1–r

b.

s = crᵞ, c and ᵞ are positive constants

c.

s = c log (1 + r), c is a constant and r ≥ 0

d.

none of the mentioned

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (b).

s = crᵞ, c and ᵞ are positive constants

37.

Which of the following transformations is particularly well suited for enhancing an image with white and
gray detail embedded in dark regions of the image, especially when there is more black area in the
image.

a.

Log transformations

b.

Power-law transformations

c.

Negative transformations

d.

None of the mentioned

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (c).

Negative transformations

38.

Which of the following transformations expands the value of dark pixels while the higher-level values
are being compressed?

a.

Log transformations

b.

Inverse-log transformations
c.

Negative transformations

d.

None of the mentioned

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (a).

Log transformations

39.

Although power-law transformations are considered more versatile than log transformations for
compressing of gray-levels in an image, then, how is log transformations advantageous over power-law
transformations?

a.

The log transformation compresses the dynamic range of images

b.

The log transformations reverses the intensity levels in the images

c.

All of the mentioned

d.

None of the mentioned

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (a).

The log transformation compresses the dynamic range of images

40.

A typical Fourier Spectrum with spectrum value ranging from 0 to 106, which of the following
transformation is better to apply.

a.

Log transformations
b.

Power-law transformations

c.

Negative transformations

d.

None of the mentioned

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (a).

Log transformations

41.

The power-law transformation is given as: s = crᵞ, c and ᵞ are positive constants, and r is the gray-level of
image before processing and s after processing. Then, for what value of c and ᵞ does power-law
transformation becomes identity transformation?

a.

c = 1 and ᵞ < 1

b.

c = 1 and ᵞ > 1

c.

c = -1 and ᵞ = 0

d.

c=ᵞ=1

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (d).

c=ᵞ=1
42.

Which of the following transformation is used cathode ray tube (CRT) devices?

a.

Log transformations

b.

Power-law transformations

c.

Negative transformations

d.

None of the mentioned

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (b).

Power-law transformations

43.

Log transformation is generally used in which of the following device(s)?

a.

Cathode ray tube

b.

Scanners and printers

c.

All of the mentioned

d.

None of the mentioned

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (d).
None of the mentioned

44.

The power-law transformation is given as: s = crᵞ, c and ᵞ are positive constants, and r is the gray-level of
image before processing and s after processing. What happens if we increase the gamma value from 0.3
to 0.7?

a.

The contrast increases and the detail increases

b.

The contrast decreases and the detail decreases

c.

The contrast increases and the detail decreases

d.

The contrast decreases and the detail increases

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (c).

The contrast increases and the detail decreases

45.

If h(rk) = nk, rk the kth gray level and nk total pixels with gray level rk, is a histogram in gray level range
[0, L – 1]. Then how can we normalize a histogram?

a.

If each value of histogram is added by total number of pixels in image, say n, p(rk)=nk+n

b.

If each value of histogram is subtracted by total number of pixels in image, say n, p(rk)=nk-n

c.

If each value of histogram is multiplied by total number of pixels in image, say n, p(rk)=nk * n

d.

If each value of histogram is divided by total number of pixels in image, say n, p(rk)=nk / n
View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (d).

If each value of histogram is divided by total number of pixels in image, say n, p(rk)=nk / n

46.

What is the sum of all components of a normalized histogram?

a.

b.

-1

c.

d.

None of the mentioned

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (a).

47.

A low contrast image will have what kind of histogram when, the histogram, h(rk) = nk, rk the kth gray
level and nk total pixels with gray level rk, is plotted nk versus rk?

a.

The histogram that are concentrated on the dark side of gray scale

b.

The histogram whose component are biased toward high side of gray scale

c.

The histogram that is narrow and centered toward the middle of gray scale

d.
The histogram that covers wide range of gray scale and the distribution of pixel is approximately uniform

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (c).

The histogram that is narrow and centered toward the middle of gray scale

48.

A bright image will have what kind of histogram, when the histogram, h(rk) = nk, rk the kth gray level
and nk total pixels with gray level rk, is plotted nk versus rk?

a.

The histogram that are concentrated on the dark side of gray scale

b.

The histogram whose component are biased toward high side of gray scale

c.

The histogram that is narrow and centered toward the middle of gray scale

d.

The histogram that covers wide range of gray scale and the distribution of pixel is approximately uniform

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (b).

The histogram whose component are biased toward high side of gray scale

49.

The transformation s = T(r) producing a gray level s for each pixel value r of input image. Then, if the T(r)
is single valued in interval 0 ≤ r ≤ 1, what does it signifies?

a.

It guarantees the existence of inverse transformation

b.

It is needed to restrict producing of some inverted gray levels in output

c.
It guarantees that the output gray level and the input gray level will be in same range

d.

All of the mentioned

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (a).

It guarantees the existence of inverse transformation

50.

The transformation s = T(r) producing a gray level s for each pixel value r of input image. Then, if the T(r)
is monotonically increasing in interval 0 ≤ r ≤ 1, what does it signifies?

a.

It guarantees the existence of inverse transformation

b.

It is needed to restrict producing of some inverted gray levels in output

c.

It guarantees that the output gray level and the input gray level will be in same range

d.

All of the mentioned

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (b).

It is needed to restrict producing of some inverted gray levels in output

51.

The transformation s = T(r) producing a gray level s for each pixel value r of input image. Then, if the T(r)
is satisfying 0 ≤ T(r) ≤ 1 in interval 0 ≤ r ≤ 1, what does it signifies?

a.

It guarantees the existence of inverse transformation

b.

It is needed to restrict producing of some inverted gray levels in output

c.

It guarantees that the output gray level and the input gray level will be in same range

d.

All of the mentioned

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (c).

It guarantees that the output gray level and the input gray level will be in same range

52.

What is the full form for PDF, a fundamental descriptor of random variables i.e. gray values in an image?

a.

Pixel distribution function

b.

Portable document format

c.

Pel deriving function

d.

Probability density function

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (d).

Probability density function

53.

What is the full form of CDF?

a.
Cumulative density function

b.

Contour derived function

c.

Cumulative distribution function

d.

None of the mentioned

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (c).

Cumulative distribution function

54.

For the transformation T(r) = [∫0^r pr(w) dw], r is gray value of input image, pr(r) is PDF of random
variable r and w is a dummy variable. If, the PDF are always positive and that the function under integral
gives the area under the function, the transformation is said to be __________

a.

Single valued

b.

Monotonically increasing

c.

All of the mentioned

d.

None of the mentioned

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (c).

All of the mentioned

55.
The transformation T (rk) = ∑k(j=0) nj /n, k = 0, 1, 2, …, L-1, where L is max gray value possible and r-k is
the kth gray level, is called _______

a.

Histogram linearization

b.

Histogram equalization

c.

All of the mentioned

d.

None of the mentioned

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (c).

All of the mentioned

56.

If the histogram of same images, with different contrast, are different, then what is the relation
between the histogram equalized images?

a.

They look visually very different from one another

b.

They look visually very similar to one another

c.

They look visually different from one another just like the input images

d.

None of the mentioned

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (b).
They look visually very similar to one another

57.

The technique of Enhancement that has a specified Histogram processed image as result, is called?

a.

Histogram Linearization

b.

Histogram Equalization

c.

Histogram Matching

d.

None of the mentioned

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (c).

Histogram Matching

58.

In Histogram Matching r and z are gray level of input and output image and p stands for PDF, then, what
does pz(z) stands for?

a.

Specific probability density function

b.

Specified pixel distribution function

c.

Specific pixel density function

d.

Specified probability density function

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (d).

Specified probability density function

59.

Inverse transformation plays an important role in which of the following Histogram processing
Techniques?

a.

Histogram Linearization

b.

Histogram Equalization

c.

Histogram Matching

d.

None of the mentioned

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (c).

Histogram Matching

60.

In Histogram Matching or Specification, z = G^-1[T(r)], r and z are gray level of input and output image
and T & G are transformations, to confirm the single value and monotonous of G^-1 what of the
following is/are required?

a.

G must be strictly monotonic

b.

G must be strictly decreasing

c.

All of the mentioned

d.
None of the mentioned

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (a).

G must be strictly monotonic

61.

Which of the following histogram processing techniques is global?

a.

Histogram Linearization

b.

Histogram Specification

c.

Histogram Matching

d.

All of the mentioned

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (d).

All of the mentioned

62.

What happens to the output image when global Histogram equalization method is applied on smooth
and noisy area of an image?

a.

The contrast increases little bit with considerable enhancement of noise

b.

The result would have a fine noise texture

c.

All of the mentioned

d.

None of the mentioned

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (a).

The contrast increases little bit with considerable enhancement of noise

63.

In terms of enhancement, what does mean and variance refers to?

a.

Average contrast and average gray level respectively

b.

Average gray level and average contrast respectively

c.

Average gray level in both

d.

Average contrast in both

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (b).

Average gray level and average contrast respectively

64.

What is standard deviation value for constant area?

a.

b.
1

c.

-1

d.

None of the mentioned

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (a).

65.

For a local enhancement using mean and variance, what happens if the lowest value of contrast is not
restricted as per the willingness of acceptance of value?

a.

There wouldn’t be any enhancement

b.

Enhancement will occur for areas with standard deviation value > 1

c.

Enhancement of the constant areas will also be the part of procedure

d.

Enhancement will occur for areas with standard deviation value > 0 and < 1

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (c).

Enhancement of the constant areas will also be the part of procedure

66.

Logic operations between two or more images are performed on pixel-by-pixel basis, except for one that
is performed on a single image. Which one is that?

a.
AND

b.

OR

c.

NOT

d.

None of the mentioned

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (c).

NOT

67.

Which of the following logical operator(s) is/are functionally complete?

a.

AND

b.

OR

c.

NOT

d.

All of the mentioned

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (d).

All of the mentioned

68.

While implementing logic operation on gray-scale images, the processing of pixel values is done as
__________
a.

String of integer numbers

b.

String of floating numbers

c.

String of binary numbers

d.

None of the mentioned

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (c).

String of binary numbers

69.

What is the equivalent for a black, 8-bit pixel to be processed under logic operation on gray scale image?

a.

A string: 00000000

b.

A string: 11111111

c.

A string: 10000000

d.

A string: 01111111

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (a).

A string: 00000000

70.
Which of the following operation(s) is/are equivalent to negative transformation?

a.

AND

b.

OR

c.

NOT

d.

All of the mentioned

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (c).

NOT

71.

Which of the following operations are used for masking?

a.

AND, OR

b.

AND, NOT

c.

NOT, OR

d.

All of the mentioned

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (c).

NOT, OR

72.

Two images having one pixel gray value 01010100 and 00000101 at the same location, are operated
against AND operator. What would be the resultant pixel gray value at that location in the enhanced
image?

a.

10100100

b.

11111011

c.

00000100

d.

01010101

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (c).

00000100

73.

Which of the following arithmetic operator is primarily used as a masking operator in enhancement?

a.

Addition

b.

Subtraction

c.

Multiplication

d.
Division

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (c).

Multiplication

74.

Which of the following is/are more commercially successful image enhancement method in mask mode
radiography, an area under medical imaging?

a.

Addition

b.

Subtraction

c.

Multiplication

d.

Division

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (b).

Subtraction

75.

The subtraction operation results in areas that appear as dark shades of gray. Why?

a.

Because the difference in such areas is little, that yields low value

b.

Because the difference in such areas is high, that yields low value

c.

Because the difference in such areas is high, that yields high value
d.

None of the mentioned

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (a).

Because the difference in such areas is little, that yields low value

76.

If the images are displayed using 8-bits, then, what is the range of the value of an image if the image is a
result of subtraction operation?

a.

0 to 255

b.

0 to 511

c.

-255 to 0

d.

None of the mentioned

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (d).

None of the mentioned

77.

The subtracted image needs to be scaled, if 8-bit channel is used to display the subtracted images. So,
the method of adding 255 to each pixel and then dividing by 2, has certain limits. What is/are those
limits?

a.

Very complex method

b.

Very difficult to implement

c.

The truncation inherent in division by 2 causes loss in accuracy

d.

All of the mentioned

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (c).

The truncation inherent in division by 2 causes loss in accuracy

78.

Which of the following is/are the fundamental factors that need tight control for difference based
inspection work?

a.

Proper registration

b.

Controlled illum ination

c.

Noise levels should be low enough so that the variation due to noise won’t affect the difference value
much

d.

All of the mentioned

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (d).

All of the mentioned

79.

When can two random variables be uncorrelated?

a.

Their covariance is 0
b.

Their covariance is 1

c.

Their covariance is -1

d.

None of the mentioned

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (a).

Their covariance is 0

80.

In Image Averaging enhancement method assumptions are made for a noisy image g(x, y). What is/are
those?

a.

The noise is correlated at every pair of coordinate (x, y)

b.

The noise has average value 1 at every pair of coordinate (x, y)

c.

All of the mentioned

d.

None of the mentioned

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (d).

None of the mentioned

81.
The standard deviation ‘σ’ at any point in image averaging: σḡ(x, y) = 1/√K σɳ(x, y), where ḡ(x, y) is the
average image formed by averaging K different noisy images and ɳ(x, y) is the noise added to an original
image f(x, y). What is the relation between K and the variability of the pixel values at each location (x, y)?

a.

Increase in K, decreases the noise of pixel values

b.

Increase in K, increases the noise of pixel values

c.

Decrease in K, decreases the noise of pixel values

d.

Decrease in K, increases the noise of pixel values

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (a).

Increase in K, decreases the noise of pixel values

82.

A filter is applied to an image whose response is independent of the direction of discontinuities

in the image. The filter is/are ________

a.

Isotropic filters

b.

Box filters

c.

Median filter

d.

All of the mentioned

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (a).
Isotropic filters

83.

In isotropic filtering, which of the following is/are the simplest isotropic derivative operator?

a.

Laplacian

b.

Gradient

c.

All of the mentioned

d.

None of the mentioned

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (a).

Laplacian

84.

The Laplacian is which of the following operator?

a.

Nonlinear operator

b.

Order-Statistic operator

c.

Linear operator

d.

None of the mentioned

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (c).

Linear operator

85.

The Laplacian ∇^2 f=[f(x + 1, y) + f(x – 1, y) + f(x, y + 1) + f(x, y – 1) – 4f(x, y)], gives an isotropic result for
rotations in increment by what degree?

a.

90 degree

b.

0 degree

c.

45 degree

d.

None of the mentioned

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (a).

90 degree

86.

The Laplacian incorporated with diagonal directions, i.e. ∇^2 f=[f(x + 1, y) + f(x – 1, y) + f(x, y + 1) + f(x, y
– 1) – 8f(x, y)], gives an isotropic result for rotations in increment by what degree?

a.

90 degree

b.

0 degree

c.

45 degree

d.
None of the mentioned

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (a).

90 degree

87.

Applying Laplacian has which of the following result(s)?

a.

Produces image having greyish edge lines

b.

Produces image having featureless background

c.

All of the mentioned

d.

None of the mentioned

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (c).

All of the mentioned

88.

Applying Laplacian produces image having featureless background which is recovered maintaining the
sharpness of Laplacian operation by either adding or subtracting it from the original image depending
upon the Laplacian definition used. Which of the following is true based on above statement?

a.

If definition used has a negative center coefficient, then subtraction is done

b.

If definition used has a positive center coefficient, then subtraction is done

c.
If definition used has a negative center coefficient, then addition is done

d.

None of the mentioned

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (a).

If definition used has a negative center coefficient, then subtraction is done

89.

A mask of size 3*3 is formed using Laplacian including diagonal neighbors that has central coefficient as
9. Then, what would be the central coefficient of same mask if it is made without diagonal neighbors?

a.

b.

-5

c.

d.

-8

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (a).

90.

Which of the following mask(s) is/are used to sharpen images by subtracting a blurred version of original
image from the original image itself?

a.

Unsharp mask

b.
High-boost filter

c.

All of the mentioned

d.

None of the mentioned

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (c).

All of the mentioned

91.

Which of the following gives an expression for high boost filtered image fhb, if f represents an image, f
blurred version of f, fs unsharp mask filtered image and A ≥ 1?

a.

fhb = (A – 1) f(x, y) + f(x, y) – f x, y)

b.

fhb = A f(x, y) – f(x,y)

c.

fhb = (A – 1) f(x, y) + fs(x, y)

d.

All of the mentioned

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (d).

All of the mentioned

92.
If we use a Laplacian to obtain sharp image for unsharp mask filtered image fs(x, y) of f(x, y) as input
image, and if the center coefficient of the Laplacian mask is negative then, which of the following
expression gives the high boost filtered image fhb, if ∇^2 f represent Laplacian?

a.

fhb = A f(x, y) – ∇^2 f(x,y)

b.

fhb = A f(x, y) + ∇^2 f(x,y)

c.

fhb = ∇^2 f(x,y)

d.

None of the mentioned

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (a).

fhb = A f(x, y) – ∇^2 f(x,y)

93.

“For very large value of A, a high boost filtered image is approximately equal to the original image”.
State whether the statement is true or false?

a.

True

b.

False

c.

May be

d.

Can't Say

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (a).
True

94.

Subtracting Laplacian from an image is proportional to which of the following?

a.

Unsharp masking

b.

Box filter

c.

Median filter

d.

None of the mentioned

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (a).

Unsharp masking

95.

A First derivative in image processing is implemented using which of the following given operator(s)?

a.

Magnitude of Gradient vector

b.

The Laplacian

c.

All of the mentioned

d.

None of the mentioned

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (a).

Magnitude of Gradient vector

96.

What is the sum of the coefficient of the mask defined using gradient?

a.

b.

-1

c.

d.

None of the mentioned

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (c).

97.

Gradient is used in which of the following area(s)?

a.

To aid humans in detection of defects

b.

As a preprocessing step for automated inspections

c.

All of the mentioned

d.

None of the mentioned

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (c).

All of the mentioned

98.

Gradient have some important features. Which of the following is/are some of them?

a.

Enhancing small discontinuities in an otherwise flat gray field

b.

Enhancing prominent edges

c.

All of the mentioned

d.

None of the mentioned

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (c).

All of the mentioned

99.

An image has significant edge details. Which of the following fact(s) is/are true for the gradient image
and the Laplacian image of the same?

a.

The gradient image is brighter than the Laplacian image

b.

The gradient image is brighter than the Laplacian image

c.

Both the gradient image and the Laplacian image has equal values

d.
None of the mentioned

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (b).

The gradient image is brighter than the Laplacian image

100.

The Laplacian in frequency domain is simply implemented by using filter __________

a.

H(u, v)= -(u^2– v^2)

b.

H(u, v)= -(1)

c.

H(u, v)= -(u^2+ v^2)

d.

none of the mentioned

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (c).

H(u, v)= -(u^2+ v^2)

101.

Assuming that the origin of F(u, v), Fourier transformed function of f(x, y) an input image, has been
correlated by performing the operation f(x, y)(-1)x+y prior to taking the transform of the image. If F and
f are of same size, then what does the given operation is/are supposed to do?

a.

Resize the transform

b.

Rotate the transform

c.
Shifts the center transform

d.

All of the mentioned

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (c).

Shifts the center transform

102.

Assuming that the origin of F(u, v), Fourier transformed function of f(x, y) an input image, has been
correlated by performing the operation f(x, y)(-1)x+y prior to taking the transform of the image. If F and
f are of same size M*N, where does the point (u, v) =(0,0) shifts?

a.

(M -1, N -1)

b.

(M/2, N/2)

c.

(M+1, N+1)

d.

(0, 0)

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (b).

(M/2, N/2)

103.

Assuming that the origin of F(u, v), Fourier transformed function of f(x, y) an input image, has been
correlated by performing the operation f(x, y)(-1)x+y prior to taking the transform of the image. If F and
f are of same size M*N, then which of the following is an expression for H(u, v), the filter used for
implementing Laplacian in frequency domain?

a.
H(u, v)= -(u^2+ v^2)

b.

H(u, v)= -(u^2– v^2)

c.

H(u, v)= -[(u – M/2)^2+ (v – N/2)^2].

d.

H(u, v)= -[(u – M/2)^2– (v – N/2)^2].

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (c).

H(u, v)= -[(u – M/2)^2+ (v – N/2)^2].

104.

Computing the Fourier transform of the Laplacian result in spatial domain is equivalent to multiplying
the F(u, v), Fourier transformed function of f(x, y) an input image, and H(u, v), the filter used for
implementing Laplacian in frequency domain. This dual relationship is expressed as _________

a.

Fourier transform pair notation

b.

Laplacian

c.

Gradient

d.

None of the mentioned

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (a).

Fourier transform pair notation

105.
An enhanced image can be obtained as: g(x,y)=f(x,y)-∇^2 f(x,y), where Laplacian is being subtracted from
f(x, y) the input image. What does this conclude?

a.

That the center spike would be negative

b.

That the immediate neighbors of center spike would be positive.

c.

All of the mentioned

d.

None of the mentioned

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (c).

All of the mentioned

106.

Why is scaling of Laplacian filtered images necessary?

a.

Because it contain high positive values

b.

Because it contain high negative value

c.

Because it contain both positive and negative values

d.

None of the mentioned

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (c).

Because it contain both positive and negative values

107.

Which of the following fact is true for the masks that includes diagonal neighbors than the masks that
doesn’t?

a.

Mask that excludes diagonal neighbors has more sharpness than the masks that doesn’t

b.

Mask that includes diagonal neighbors has more sharpness than the masks that doesn’t

c.

Both masks have same sharpness result

d.

None of the mentioned

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (b).

Mask that includes diagonal neighbors has more sharpness than the masks that doesn’t

1.

Orthonormal filter is developed around filter called

a.

up sampling

b.

filtering

c.

Digital segment filtering

d.

prototype

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (d).

prototype

2.

The base of image pyramid contains

a.

low resolution

b.

high resolution

c.

intensity

d.

blurred portion

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (b).

high resolution

3.

Subband of input image, showing dH(m,n) is called

a.

approximation

b.

vertical detail

c.

horizontal detail

d.
diagonal detail

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (c).

horizontal detail

4.

FWT stands for

a.

Fast wavelet transformation

b.

Fast wavelet transform

c.

Fourier wavelet transform

d.

Fourier wavelet transformation

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (b).

Fast wavelet transform

5.

Wavelet series equation is the sum of

a.

scaling coefficient

b.

detail coefficient

c.

span coefficient
d.

Both a and b

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (d).

Both a and b

6.

DWT stands for

a.

Discrete wavelet transform

b.

Discrete wavelet transformation

c.

Digital wavelet transform

d.

Digital wavelet transformation

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (a).

Discrete wavelet transform

7.

DSP stands for

a.

Digital signal processing

b.

Design signal processing

c.
Digital signal processed

d.

Design signal processed

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (a).

Digital signal processing

8.

Scaling vectors are taken as

a.

heights

b.

sharpness

c.

intensity

d.

weights

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (d).

weights

9.

MRA equation is also called

a.

modulating equation

b.

FIR filter
c.

dilation equation

d.

span equation

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (c).

dilation equation

10.

Subspaces spanned are nested at

a.

lower scales

b.

higher scales

c.

mid scales

d.

intense scales

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (b).

higher scales

11.

Prediction residual pyramid is computed in

a.
2 steps

b.

3 steps

c.

4 steps

d.

5 steps

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (b).

3 steps

12.

Modulated version of filter is defined by the equation

a.

h5(n) = (-1)nh1(n)

b.

h5(n) = h1(n)

c.

h5(n) = (-1)n

d.

h = (-1)nh1(n)

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (a).

h5(n) = (-1)nh1(n)

13.

K multiplication constants in digital filters are called

a.

co efficient

b.

multipliers

c.

subtractors

d.

filter coefficients

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (d).

filter coefficients

14.

The size of the base image will be

a.

N-1 x N-1

b.

N+1 x N-1

c.

N-1 x N

d.

NxN

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (d).

NxN

15.
MRA stands for

a.

Multiresolution analysis

b.

Multiresolution assembly

c.

Multiresemble analysis

d.

Multiresemble assembly

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (a).

Multiresolution analysis

16.

Discarding every sample is called

a.

up sampling

b.

filtering

c.

down sampling

d.

blurring

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (c).

down sampling
17.

Images are

a.

1D arrays

b.

2D arrays

c.

3D arrays

d.

4D arrays

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (b).

2D arrays

18.

Filter banks consists of

a.

1 FIR filter

b.

2 FIR filters

c.

3 FIR filters

d.

4 FIR filters

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (b).
2 FIR filters

19.

Ak coefficients are computed by

a.

integrated outer products

b.

integrated inner products

c.

integral outer products

d.

integral inner products

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (d).

integral inner products

20.

Neighborhood averaging produces

a.

histogram

b.

pyramids

c.

mean pyramids

d.

equalized histogram

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (c).

mean pyramids

21.

DSF stands for

a.

Design signal filtering

b.

Digital signal filtering

c.

Digital segment filtering

d.

Design segment filtering

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (b).

Digital signal filtering

22.

Heisenberg uncertainty principle is viewed as

a.

tiles

b.

blocks

c.

squares
d.

circles

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (a).

tiles

23.

In upsampling after every sample placing value is

a.

b.

c.

d.

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (b).

24.

Decomposing image into band limit components is called

a.

low coding

b.

high coding

c.
intense coding

d.

subband coding

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (d).

subband coding

25.

Narrow wavelets represents

a.

sharp details

b.

finer details

c.

blur details

d.

edge details

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (b).

finer details

26.

High contrast images are considered as

a.

low resolution

b.

high resolution
c.

intense

d.

blurred

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (a).

low resolution

27.

Function having compact support is

a.

histogram

b.

pyramids

c.

mean pyramids

d.

haar function

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (d).

haar function

28.

In multiresolution processing * represents the

a.

complete conjugate operation

b.
complex conjugate operation

c.

complete complex operation

d.

complex complex operation

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (b).

complex conjugate operation

29.

The apex of image pyramid contains

a.

low resolution

b.

high resolution

c.

intensity

d.

blurred portion

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (a).

low resolution

30.

Representing image in more than one resolution is

a.

histogram
b.

image pyramid

c.

local histogram

d.

equalized histogram

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (b).

image pyramid

31.

Moving up in pyramid he size

a.

increases

b.

remain same

c.

decreases

d.

blurred

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (c).

decreases

32.

The scaling function is

a.

pentagonal

b.

square

c.

orthogonal

d.

oval

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (c).

orthogonal

33.

Subband of input image, showing dD(m,n) is called

a.

approximation

b.

vertical detail

c.

horizontal detail

d.

diagonal detail

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (d).

diagonal detail

34.
CWT stands for

a.

Complete wavelet transform

b.

Complex wavelet transform

c.

Continuous wavelet transform

d.

Continuous wavelet transformation

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (c).

Continuous wavelet transform

35.

Heisenberg uncertainty principle is used for

a.

data processing

b.

information processing

c.

data processinerosion

d.

dilation

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (b).

information processing
36.

Integer wavelet translates are

a.

pentagonal

b.

square

c.

orthogonal

d.

oval

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (c).

orthogonal

37.

Low contrast images are considered as

a.

low resolution

b.

high resolution

c.

intense

d.

blurred

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (b).
high resolution

38.

Processing the image in small parts is

a.

histogram

b.

pyramids

c.

local histogram

d.

equalized histogram

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (c).

local histogram

39.

Haar transformation is defined by

a.

T = HFHT

b.

T = HFH

c.

T = HFT

d.

T = HT

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (a).

T = HFHT

40.

Function can be represented with

a.

arbitrary precision

b.

filtering

c.

down sampling

d.

prototype

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (a).

arbitrary precision

41.

One that is not a part of digital filter

a.

unit delay

b.

multiplier

c.

subtractor

d.
adder

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (c).

subtractor

42.

The function changing the shape is called

a.

scaling function

b.

shaping function

c.

down sampling

d.

blurring

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (a).

scaling function

43.

Function space is referred to as

a.

open span

b.

fully span

c.

closed span
d.

span

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (c).

closed span

44.

No filtering produces

a.

Gaussian pyramids

b.

pyramids

c.

mean pyramids

d.

subsampling pyramids

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (d).

subsampling pyramids

45.

Diagonally opposed filters is said to be

a.

modulation

b.

multiplier

c.
cross modulation

d.

subband coding

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (c).

cross modulation

46.

The image pyramid contains

a.

j levels

b.

j-1 levels

c.

j+1 levels

d.

n levels

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (a).

j levels

47.

Subband of input image, showing dv(m,n) is called

a.

approximation

b.

vertical detail
c.

horizontal detail

d.

diagonal detail

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (b).

vertical detail

48.

Subband of input image, showing a(m,n) is called

a.

approximation

b.

vertical detail

c.

horizontal detail

d.

diagonal detail

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (a).

approximation

49.

Decomposition in subband coding is performed to

a.

segment image

b.
reconstruct image

c.

blur image

d.

sharpened image

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (b).

reconstruct image

50.

Lowpass Gaussian filtering produces

a.

Gaussian pyramids

b.

pyramids

c.

mean pyramids

d.

equalized histogram

View Answer Report Discuss Too Difficult!

Answer: (a).

Gaussian pyramids

1.) Type of Interpolation where the intensity of 4 neighboring pixels uses to obtain intensity a new
location is called ___________

a) cubic interpolation
b) nearest-neighbor interpolation

c) bilinear interpolation

d) bicubic interpolation

Answer is C)

Hide Answer

2) Imaging in geological exploration, industry and medicine uses

a) audio

b) sound

c) sunlight

d) ultraviolet

Answer is b)

Hide Answer

3.) Tomography is the algorithm that uses images

a) edges

b) slices

c) boundaries

d) illumination

Answer is b)

Hide Answer

4.) Major use of gamma rays imaging includes

a) radar

b) astronomical observations

c) industry

d) lithography

Answer is b)

Hide Answer

5.) How many different frames are required for analyzing a 3D image?

a) 5

b) 4

c) 6

d) 7

Answer is a)

Hide Answer

6.) If f(x,y) is a image function of 2 variables, then the first-order derivative of a one-dimensional
function, f(x) is:

a) f(x+1)-f(x)

b) f(x)-f(x+1)

c) f(x-1)-f(x+1)

d) f(x)+f(x-1)

Answer is a)

Hide Answer

7.) It is not a the source of images.

a) mecatronic

b) acoustic

c) ultrasonic

d) electronic

Answer is a)

Hide Answer

8.) Which frame uses for co-relating objects in a 3 dimensional world.

a) visible

b) gamma

c) x-rays

d) ultraviolet

Answer is c)

Hide Answer

9.) What is use of Camera coordinate frame?

Answer: The Camera coordinate frame is used to relate the objects wrt the camera.

10.) A pixel in the digital image processing can also be defined as

a) The tiniest division the CCD array is also known as a pixel.

b) The largest division of the CCD array is also known as the pixel.

c) both a) and b)
d) None of the above

Answer is a)

Hide Answer

11.) Which of the options fails to work on dark intensity distributions?

a) The Laplacian Transform

b) Gaussian Transform

c) The Histogram Equalization

d) Power-law Transformation

Answer is c)

Hide Answer

12.) The typical size comparable in quality to monochromatic TV image is of size.

a) 256 X 256

b) 512 X 512

c) 1920 X 1080

d) 1080 X 1080

Answer is b)

Hide Answer

13.) What is the Calculating the size of image formation?

a) Y=f/z
b) Y= z/f

c) None of the above

d) Y = -F/Z

Answer is d)

Hide Answer

14.) What is the formula for the calculation of total number of combinations of bit

a) (2)^bp

b)(2)^xyz

c)None of the above

d)(2)^bpp

Answer is d)

Hide Answer

15.) Which method is used to generate a processed image that has a specified histogram?

a) linearization of a histogram

b) equalization of a histogram

c) The Histogram matching

d) Histogram processing

Answer is c)

Hide Answer

16.)What does “eliminated” refer to in median filter?

a) Force to the average intensity of neighbors

b) Force to median intensity of neighbors

c) Eliminate median value of pixels

d) None of the Mentioned

Answer is b)

Hide Answer

17.) The white color in the image processing can be calculated as…

a) White color = (2)^bpp-1

b) White color = (2)^bpp

c) White color = (3)^bpp-1

d) None of the mentioned

Answer is a)

Hide Answer

18.)In 4-neighbors of a pixel p, how far are each of the neighbors located from p?

a) one pixel apart

b) four pixels apart

c) alternating pixels

d) none of the Mentioned

Answer is a)

Hide Answer

19.) The size of an image depends upon which three things?

a) Number of rows

b) Number of columns

c) Number of bits per pixel

d) all of these

Answer is d)

Hide Answer

20). While Zooming, In order to perform a gray-level assignment for any point in the overlay, we assign
its grey level to the new pixel in the grid its closest pixel in the original image. What’s this method of
grey-level assignment called?

a) Neighbor Duplication

b) Duplication

c) Nearest neighbor Interpolation

d) None of the mentioned

Answer is d)

Hide Answer

21.)The transformation s = T(r) produces a gray level s for each pixel value r of the input image. Then, if
the T(r) is monotonically increasing in interval 0 ≤ r ≤ 1, what does it signify?

a) It guarantees the existence of the inverse transformation

b) It is needed to restrict the production of some inverted gray levels in the output

c) It ensures that the gray output level and the input gray level will be in the same range

d) All of the mentioned

Answer is b)
Hide Answer

22.)The transformation formula T (rk) = ∑k(j=0) nj /n, k = 0, 1, 2, …, L-1, where L is maximum gray value
possible and r-k is the kth gray level, is called _______

a) Histogram linearization

b) Histogram equalization

c) All of the mentioned

d) None of the mentioned

Answer is c)

Hide Answer

23.) What is the expanded form of JPEG?

a) Joint Photographic Expansion Group

b) Joint Photographic Experts Group

c) joint Photographs Expansion Group

d) Joint Photographic Expanded Group

Answer is b)

Hide Answer

24.) Wavelength of visible green ranges from

a) 0.52-0.70

b) 0.52-0.62

c) 0.53-0.60

d) 0.52-0.60
Answer is d)

Hide Answer

25.) Remote sensing is an application of

a) gamma rays

b) x-rays

c) visible and infrared

d) ultraviolet

Answer is c)

Hide Answer

Answer: (c).visible and infrared

1.) What is a pixel?

Spatial coordinates

Two-dimensional function

Image elements

Plane coordinates

Answer is C)

Hide Answer
2.) Identify the secondary colors of light.

Cyan, magenta

Magenta, Yellow

Cyan, Magenta, Yellow

Red, Green, Blue

Answer is C)

Hide Answer

3.) For a continuous image f(x, y), how could be Sampling defined?

Digitizing the coordinate values

Digitizing the amplitude values

All of the mentioned

None of the mentioned

Answer is A)

Hide Answer

4.) What are the basic quantities that are used to describe the quality of a chromatic light source?

Radiance, brightness, and wavelength

Brightness and luminance

Radiance, brightness, and luminance

Luminance and radiance

Answer is C)

Hide Answer

5.) A binary image contains how many values?

2

Answer is A)

Hide Answer

6.) Digitizing the coordinate values is called

Quantization

Sampling

Zooming

Shrinking

Answer is B)

Hide Answer

7.) De , Euclidean distance between the pixels p and q with coordinates (x,y) and (s,t) is

│x-s│ +│y-t│

Max{│x-s│,│y-t│}

Min{│x-s│,│y-t│}

{│x-s│2 +│y-t│2}1/2

Answer is D)

Hide Answer

8.) How many types of Image processing?

Analog image processing

Digital image processing

both a) and b)

None of the above

Answer is C)

Hide Answer

9.) The digital image processing work with………….that performs operations on a digital image.

a analog system

a digital system

both a) and b)

None of the above

Answer is B)

Hide Answer

10.) It is one of the examples of Analog Signals.

Human Voice

Digital system

both a) and b)

None of the above

Answer is A)

Hide Answer

11.) A first portable camera was developed by

Johann Zahn
Muslim scientist

Ibn al-Haitham

None of the above

Answer is A)

Hide Answer

12.) When was the First photo taken?

1816

1814

1820

1864

Answer is B)

Hide Answer

13.) 24 bit color format also known as …..?

True color format.

red color format

bath a) and b)

Null

Answer is A)

Hide Answer

14.) Histogram equalization is used to

Enhance the contrast of an image

Remove the noises present in an image

Find the contours present in an image

Find the equality present in various regions.

Answer is A)

Hide Answer

15.) Images quantised with insufficient brightness levels is lead to the occurrence of ____________

Pixillation

Blurring

False Contours

None of the Mentioned

Answer is C)

Hide Answer

16.) The human visual system structures its low-level representations is known as

Perceptual organization.

Pragmatic modeling

Pragmatic matching

Visualization.

Answer is A)

Hide Answer

17.) Mathematical analysis of the human visual process is invented by

Euler

Prewitt

Marr
Gaussian

Answer is C)

Hide Answer

18.) HYPER (Hypothesis Predicted and Evaluated Recursively) tool uses

2-D models of industrial parts to match against 2-D image data.

3-D models of medical images to match 2-D image data.

2-D satellite images to 3-D models.

2 ½-D model to 3-D model

Answer is A)

Hide Answer

19.) In which dimension strip is used in the analog camera?

35mm

40mm

70mm

none of the above

Answer is A)

Hide Answer

20.) What is the decimal code of red?

a) (255,0,1)

b) (255,0,0)

c) (255,1,0)

d) none of these
Answer is B)

Hide Answer

21. What are Leica and Argus?

Answer: The Leica and argus are the two analog cameras that were developed in 1925 and in 1939,
respectively.

22. When the digital camera is launched?

a) 1981

b) 1982`

c) 1864

d) None of the mentioned

Answer is A)

Hide Answer

23. It is one of the applications of image processing.

a) Medical field

b) Digitizing the amplitude values

c) All of the mentioned

d) None of the mentioned

Answer is A)

Hide Answer

24.) What is video Processing?

Answer: A video processing is a fast movement of photos

25.) How many types of dimensions of signals?

Answer is D)

Hide Answer

Q1. Which of the following is the dominant application of microwave in image

processing?

A. radar

B. medicines

C. lens enhancement

D. medical diagnoses

Q2. Which of the following is not process of image processing?

A. high level

B. last level
C. low level

D. mid level

Q3. ......... is not the source of images.

A. acoustic

B. mecatronic

C. ultrasonic

D. electronic

Q4. Which of the following color is having largest frequency in visible spectrum?

A. violet

B. blue

C. green

D. red

Q5. For which purpose Image subtraction is used?

A. color enhancement

B. spatial enhancement

C. detection
D. frequency enhancement

Q6. Which of the following is image processing related field?

A. chemistry

B. chemicals

C. neurobiology

D. medicines

Q7. Which of the following is the first fundamental step in image processing?

A. filtration

B. image restoration

C. image enhancement

D. image acquisition

Q8. ........ is a colour attribute that describes a pure colour.

A. Intensity

B. Hue

C. Brightness

D. Intensity
Q9. What is the full form of JPEG?

A. Joint Photographs Expansion Group

B. Joint Photographic Expansion Group

C. Joint Photographic Experts Group

D. Joint Photographic Expanded Group

Q10. Which of the following rays have the maximum frequency?

A. UV Rays

B. Radio Waves

C. Gamma Rays

D. Microwaves

Q11. Which of the following filter passes low frequencies?

A. High pass filter

B. Low pass filter

C. Band pass filter

D. None of the above

Q12. The expansion of PDF is ......... in uniform PDF?

A. Post Derivation Function

B. Portable Document Format

C. Probability Density Function

D. Previously Derived Function

Q13. Which of the following filter is used to find the brightest point in the image?

A. Max filter

B. Mean filter

C. Median filter

D. None of the above

Q14. .......... is the independent variable of fuzzy output

A. Membership

B. Maturity

C. Generic Element

D. None of the above

Q15. The function of Iris is ............... .

A. Detect color

B. Varies focal length

C. Source of nutrition

D. Control amount of light

Q16. The color image processing is basically divided into ..... categories.

A. 3

B. 4

C. 2

D. 5

Q17. Which of the following equation is used for calculating B value in terms of HSI

components?

A. B=I(1+S)

B. B=I(1-S)

C. B=S(1-I)

D. B=S(1+I)

Q18. Which of the following color models are used for color printing?
A. CMY

B. CMYK

C. RGB

D. Both A & B

Q19. The spatial resolution of an image principally determine by -

A. Contrast

B. Quantization

C. Sampling

D. Dynamic range

Q20. Which of the following is the full form of CDF?

A. Contour derived function

B. Cumulative distribution function

C. Contour derived function

D. None of the above

MCQ: Digitizing the image intensity amplitude is called

sampling
quantization

framing

Both A and B

Answer

MCQ: Compressed image can be recovered back by

image enhancement

image decompression

image contrast

image equalization

Answer

MCQ: Digital video is sequence of

pixels

matrix

frames

coordinates

Answer

MCQ: Image compression comprised of

encoder

decoder
frames

Both A and B

Answer

MCQ: Information is the

data

meaningful data

raw data

Both A and B

Answer

MCQ: Coding redundancy works on

pixels

matrix

intensity

coordinates

Answer

MCQ: Sequence of code assigned is called

code word

word

byte
nibble

Answer

MCQ: Every run length pair introduce new

pixels

matrix

frames

intensity

Answer

MCQ: If the pixels are reconstructed without error mapping is said to be

reversible

irreversible

temporal

facsimile

Answer

MCQ: If the P(E) = 1, it means event

does not occur

always occur

no probability

normalization
MCQ: Digitizing the image intensity amplitude is called

sampling

quantization

framing

Both A and B

Answer

MCQ: Compressed image can be recovered back by

image enhancement

image decompression

image contrast

image equalization

Answer

MCQ: Digital video is sequence of

pixels

matrix

frames

coordinates

Answer
MCQ: Image compression comprised of

encoder

decoder

frames

Both A and B

Answer

MCQ: Information is the

data

meaningful data

raw data

Both A and B

Answer

: In the coding redundancy technique we use

fixed length code

variable length code

byte

Both A and B

Answer

MCQ: Morphology refers to

pixels

matrix

frames

shape

Answer

MCQ: FAX is an abbreviation of

fast

female

feminine

facsimile

Answer

MCQ: Source of information depending on finite no of outputs is called

markov

finite memory source

zero source

Both A and B

Answer

MCQ: Types of data redundancy are

1

MCQ: Information per source is called

sampling

quantization

entropy

normalization

Answer

MCQ: Image with very high quality is considered as

good

fair

bad

excellent

Answer

MCQ: Range [0, L-1], where L is the

no of levels

length
no of intensity levels

low quality

Answer

MCQ: Compression is done for saving

storage

bandwidth

money

Both A and B

Answer

MCQ: System of symbols to represent event is called

storage

word

code

nibble

MCQ: In the image MxN, M is

rows

column

level

intensity
Answer

MCQ: In the image MxN, N is

rows

column

level

intensity

Answer

MCQ: HD television are

low definition

high definition

enhanced

low quality

Answer

MCQ: Inferior image is the image having

low definition

high definition

intensity

coordinates

Answer
MCQ: Histogram equalization refers to image

sampling

quantization

framing

normalization

Answer

MCQ: Histogram equalization make image intensity changes

low

high

visible

invisible

Answer

MCQ: Image with very poor quality is considered as

good

fair

bad

excellent

Answer
MCQ: DVD stands for

digital video disks

digital video data

digital versatile disks

decompressed video disks

Answer

MCQ: Digitizing the coordinates of the image is called

sampling

quantization

framing

Both A and B

Answer

MCQ: Source of the event itself called

zero-memory source

nonzero-memory source

zero source

memory source

Answer

MCQ: If the pixels can not be reconstructed without error mapping is said to be
reversible

irreversible

temporal

facsimile

Answer

MCQ: Decoder is used for

image enhancement

image compression

image decompression

image equalization

Answer

MCQ: Replication of the pixels is called

coding redundancy

spatial redundancy

temporal redundancy

both b and c

Answer

MCQ: Information ignored the human eye is the

coding redundancy

spatial redundancy

temporal redundancy

irrelevant info

Answer

MCQ: Normally internet delivers data at the rate of

56kbps

64kbps

72kbps

24kbps

Answer

MCQ: Information lost when expressed mathematically is called

markov

finite memory source

fidelity criteria

noiseless theorem

Answer

MCQ: Error of the image is referred to as

pixels
matrix

frames

noise

Answer

MCQ: Formula pr = n/MN represents the

coding redundancy

spatial redundancy

temporal redundancy

irrelevant info

Answer

MCQ: In the formula 1-(1/c), C is the

complex ratio

compression ratio

constant

condition

Answer

MCQ: Irrelevant data is said to be

redundant data

meaningful data
raw data

Both A and B

Answer

MCQ: Standard rate of showing frames in a video per second are

10

20

25

30

Answer

MCQ: Reducing the data required referred to

image enhancement

image compression

image contrast

image equalization

Answer

MCQ: One that is not a type of data redundancy is

coding

spatial

temporal
facsimile

Answer

MCQ: Redundancy of the data can be found using formula

1-(1/c)

1+(1/c)

1-(-1/c)

(1/c)

Answer

MCQ: Transforming the difference between adjacent pixels is called

mapping

image compression

image watermarking

image equalization

Answer

MCQ: The simple way to compression is removing

data

superfluous data

information

meaningful data
Answer

MCQ: Inserting data on to the images is called

image enhancement

image compression

image watermarking

image equalization

Answer

MCQ: Shannons theorem is also called

noiseless coding theorem

noisy coding theorem

coding theorem

noiseless theorem

Answer

MCQ: A codec is capable of

encoding

decoding

framing

Both A and B

Answer
MCQ: Encoder is used for

image enhancement

image compression

image decompression

image equalization

Answer

MCQ: Power law transformation is useful in

purification

industry

radar

MRI

Answer

MCQ: In the expression s = Tr, Tr, in the range 0 = < r = < L-1 is the

strictly monotonically increasing function

monotonically increasing function

monotonically decreasing function

strictly monotonically decreasing function

Answer
MCQ: High pass filters promotes

low intensity components

mid intensity components

high intensity components

all components

Answer

MCQ: The correction of power law response is called

alpha correction

gamma correction

beta correction

pixel correction

Answer

MCQ: The inverse of the log function in image processing is

nth power

nth log

inverse log

identity

Answer

MCQ: To display the image we need image in a

spatial domain

frequency domain

algebraic domain

Both A and B

Answer

MCQ: Process that expands the range of intensity levels in image is called

linear stretching

contrast stretching

color stretching

elastic stretching

Answer

MCQ: Histogram is the technique processed in

intensity domain

frequency domain

spatial domain

undefined domain

Answer

MCQ: PDF in histogram equalization stands for

probability dual function

partial density function

parametric density function

probability density function

Answer

MCQ: In power transformation values are dependent on value of

x-rays

alpha

beta

gamma

Answer D

MCQ: One that is not the type of filter

low pass filter

high pass filter

bandpass filter

mid pass filter

Answer

MCQ: In the formula g(x,y) = T[ƒ(x,y)], T is the

transformed image

transformation vector

transformation theorem

transformation function

Answer

MCQ: Gamma correction is mostly used in

CRT devices

audio devices

radio

turbines

Answer

MCQ: In bit plane slicing the most of the information of an image is contained by

highest order plane

lowest order plane

mid order plane

all planes

Answer

MCQ: Thresholding function in contrast stretching creates

binary image
high quality image

enhanced image

low quality image

Answer

MCQ: Name that does not relates to spatial filters

spatial masks

PDF

kernels

templates

Answer

MCQ: Sum of all components in normalized histogram is equal to

100

Answer

MCQ: Strictly monotonical function guarantee the inverse mapping as

dual valued

single valued
multi valued

running sum

Answer

MCQ: Method generating a processed image having specified histogram is called

histogram enhancement

histogram normalization

histogram equalization

histogram matching

Answer

MCQ: Log transformation is given by the formula

s = clog(r)

s = clog(1+r)

s = clog(2+r)

s = log(1+r)

Answer

MCQ: Pixel to pixel movement of center and to define neighborhood is

local histogram processing

equalized histogram processing

normalized histogram processing

global histogram processing

Answer

MCQ: Low pass filters promotes

low intensity components

mid intensity components

high intensity components

all components

Answer

MCQ: Power law transformation is also called

alpha transformation

beta transformation

gamma transformation

intensity transformation

Answer

MCQ: In bit plane slicing 8 bit image will have

6 planes

7 planes

8 planes

9 planes
Answer

MCQ: Process involved in linear spatial filtering is

correlation

convolution

histogram equalization

Both A and B

Answer

MCQ: The inverse of the nth root function in image processing is

nth power

log

inverse log

identity

Answer

MCQ: Intensity level slicing is useful in

lithography

microwave

radar

detecting blockages

Answer
MCQ: In the formula s = clog(1+r), r ranges

r >= 0

r >= 1

0 >= r

1 >= r

Answer

MCQ: Bit plane slicing is used in

aortic angiogram

radar

contrast stretching

MRI

Answer

MCQ: Smallest possible neighbor hood in a image must be of size

1x1

2x2

3x3

4x4

MCQ: The values of pixels in image processing are related by the expression
s = Tr

s = (r)

r = T(s)

T = sr

Answer

MCQ: Negative of the image having intensity values [0,L-1] is expressed by

s = L-1

s = 1-r

s = L-1-r

s = L-r

Answer

MCQ: Probability density functions are always

decreasing

increasing

positive

negative

Answer

MCQ: Negative of the image is

enhancing the intensity levels

reducing the intensity levels

adding the intensity levels

reversing the intensity levels

Answer

MCQ: The origin of the digital image lies at

right bottom

top right corner

top left corner

left bottom

MCQ: Process of manipulating the digital image to make results more suitable is called

manipulation

improvement

enhancement

degradation

Answer

MCQ: Spatial filtering method uses

low pass filter

high pass filter

bandpass filter

spatial filter

Answer

MCQ: The simplest piecewise linear transformation function is

linear stretching

contrast stretching

color stretching

elastic stretching

Answer

MCQ: The inverse of the negative function in image processing is

nth power

nth log

inverse log

identity

Answer

MCQ: The process of highlighting the specific range of intensities is called

pixels slicing

color slicing

Intensity level slicing

contrast stretching

Answer

MCQ: The principle tools used in image processing for a broad spectrum of applications

low pass filtering

intensity filtering

spatial filtering

high pass filtering

Answer

MCQ: In the formula g(x,y) = T[ƒ(x,y)], ƒ(x,y) is the

transformed image

output image

input image

digitized image

Answer

MCQ: Smoothing filters are mostly used in

blurring

noise reduction

contrast

Both A and B

Answer
MCQ: In the expression s = Tr, T

copy the pixel values

replace the pixel values

enhance the pixel values

maps the pixel values

Answer

MCQ: Local histogram processing deals with

whole image

slices of image

center of image

edges of image

MCQ: Spatial domain is denoted by

g(x,y) = [ƒ(x,y)]

g(x,y) = T[ƒ(x,y)]

g(x,y) = T[ƒ(x)]

g(x,y) = T[ƒ(y)]

Answer

MCQ: Digital image with intensity levels in the range [0,L-1] is called
k-map

histogram

truth table

graph

Answer

MCQ: Smallest value of gamma will produce

contrast

darker image

brighter image

black and white image

Answer

MCQ: The simplest image processing technique is

spatial transformation

intensity transformation

coordinates transformation

domain transformation

Answer

MCQ: Pixels are digital numbers that are composed of

color

intensity levels

dots

bits

MCQ: The product of one even and one odd function is

even

odd

prime

aliasing

Answer

MCQ: Complex numbers are viewed in a plane called

imaginary plane

real plane

complex plane

polar plane

Answer

MCQ: Fourier transform of unit impulse at origin is

undefined

infinity
1

Answer

MCQ: Continuous functions are sampled to form a

Fourier series

Fourier transform

fast Fourier series

digital image

Answer

MCQ: The common example of 2D interpolation is image

enhancement

sharpening

blurring

resizing

Answer

MCQ: 2D Fourier transform and its inverse are infinitely

aperiodic

periodic

linear
non linear

Answer

MCQ: Aliasing as block like image components is called

quantization

convolution

jaggies

blurring

Answer

MCQ: Shrinking of image can be done using

pixel replication

bicubic interpolation

bilinear interpolation

row column deletion

Answer

MCQ: Sum of many infinitely many periodic impulses is called

aperiodic impulse

periodic impulse

impulse train

summation
Answer

MCQ: To reduce the effect of aliasing high frequencies are

attenuated

accentuated

reduced

removed

MCQ: If ƒ(x,y) is imaginary, then its Fourier transform is

conjugate symmetry

hermition

antihermition

symmetry

Answer

MCQ: The band limited function can be recovered from its samples if the acquired samples are at rate
twice the highest frequency, this theorem is called

sampling theorem

sampling theorem

sampling theorem

sampling theorem

Answer
MCQ: The product of two even or two odd functions is

even

odd

prime

aliasing

Answer

MCQ: Unit impulse at every point other than 0 is

undefined

infinity

Answer

MCQ: The sum of cosines and sines coefficient multiplied is

Fourier series

Fourier transform

fast Fourier series

fast Fourier transform

MCQ: Odd functions are said to be

symmetric

antisymmetric

periodic

aperiodic

Answer

MCQ: A continuous band limited function can be recovered with no error if sampled intervals are less
than 1/2umax is the statement of

2D sampling series

3D sampling theorem

1D sampling theorem

2D sampling theorem

Answer

MCQ: The impulse S(t,v) is function having

one variable

two variables

three variables

four variables

Answer

MCQ: Any function whose Fourier transform is zero for frequencies outside the finite interval is called

high pass function

low pass function

band limited function

band pass function

Answer

MCQ: Fourier transform's domain is

frequency domain

spatial domain

Fourier domain

time domain

MCQ: Giving one period of the periodic convolution is called

periodic convolution

aperiodic convolution

correlation

circular convolution

Answer

MCQ: The continuous variables in 2D transform pair are interpreted as

continuous frequency variables

spatial variables

continuous spatial variables

discrete spatial variables

Answer

MCQ: News papers are printed using

60dpi

65dpi

70dpi

75dpi

Answer

MCQ: J (iota) in complex numbers is of value

√-1

-1

Answer

MCQ: Fourier transform of two continuous functions, that are inverse of each other is called

Fourier series pair

Fourier transform pair

Fourier series

Fourier transform
MCQ: Forward and inverse Fourier transforms exist for the samples having values

integers

infinite

finite

discrete

Answer

MCQ: The greater, the values of continuous variables, the spectrum of Fourier transform will be

contracted

expanded

discrete

continuous

Answer

MCQ: The displacement of various sinusoids w.r.t their origin is

phase

dc component

ac component

vector

Answer
MCQ: ƒ(0,0) is sometimes called

ac component

dc component

jaggy

coordinate

Answer

MCQ: Impulse has the property called

rotating property

shifting property

additive property

additive inverse

MCQ: Zooming can be done using

pixel replication

bicubic interpolation

bilinear interpolation

under sampling

Answer

MCQ: Low pass filters are used for image

contrast

sharpening

blurring

resizing

Answer

MCQ: The sampled frequency less than the nyquist rate is called

under sampling

over sampling

critical sampling

nyquist sampling

Answer

MCQ: The phase angle is represented by the formula

sine(x/y)

arcsine(x/y)

tan(x/y)

arctan(x/y)

Answer

MCQ: Fourier stated that the periodic function is expressed as sum of

sine
cosine

tangent

Both A and B

MCQ: Convolution of two functions means rotating one function at angle of

360

270

90

180

Answer

MCQ: Image enhancement traditionally included

smoothing

sharpening

degradation

Both A and B

Answer

MCQ: Even functions are said to be

symmetric

antisymmetric

periodic
aperiodic

Answer

MCQ: Zooming of image is viewed as

under sampling

over sampling

critical sampling

nyquist sampling

Answer

MCQ: The effect caused by under sampling is called

smoothing

sharpening

summation

aliasing

Answer

MCQ: Product of two functions in spatial domain is what, in frequency domain

correlation

convolution

Fourier transform

fast Fourier transform

Answer

MCQ: For shifting the origin function is multiplied with

−1x+y

−1

√−1

Answer

MCQ: Digitizing the coordinate values is called

quantization

sampling

Fourier transform

discrete Fourier transform

Answer

MCQ: A complex number is defined as

c = jI

c = R+jI

c=R

c = R+I

Answer
MCQ: Shrinking of image is viewed as

under sampling

over sampling

critical sampling

nyquist sampling

Answer

MCQ: The sampled frequency greater than the nyquist rate is called

under sampling

over sampling

critical sampling

nyquist sampling

Answer

MCQ: Most common example of temporal aliasing is

ringing effect

image sharpening

wagon wheel effect

blurring

Answer
MCQ: High pass filters are used for image

contrast

sharpening

blurring

resizing

Answer

MCQ: Time intervals between images in sequence of images is called

aliasing

temporal aliasing

frequency aliasing

spatial aliasing

Answer

MCQ: The Fourier transform is named after French mathematician

joseph Fourier

john Fourier

sean Fourier

jay Fourier

Answer
MCQ: (A.B).B is equal to

A .B

A+B

AoB

AxB

Answer

MCQ: Closing is represented by

A .B

A+B

A-B

AxB

Answer

MCQ: Tuple is referred to as

1D vector

2D vector

3D vector

4D vector

Answer
MCQ: Reflection is applied on image's

x coordinate

y coordinate

z coordinate

Both A and B

Answer

MCQ: Opening with rolling SE

sharps

shrinks

smooths

deletes

Answer

MCQ: SE having size d/4 when dilated with image of size d, thickens the image by size

d/2

d/3

d/4

d/8

Answer

MCQ: The maximum length of the breaks can gets upto

4pixels

3pixels

2pixels

1pixel

Answer

MCQ: Structuring elements runs over image's

rows

columns

edges

every element

Answer

MCQ: SE having size d/4 when eroded with image of size d, shrinks the image by size

d/2

d/3

d/4

d/8

Answer

MCQ: Duality principle is used when SE is

square

symmetric

asymmetric

translated

Answer

MCQ: Dilation followed by erosion is called

opening

closing

blurring

translation

Answer

MCQ: Reflection and translation of the image objects are based on

pixels

frames

structuring elements

coordinates

Answer

MCQ: Opening smooths the image's

pixels
lines

contour

boundary

Answer

MCQ: Two main operations of morphology are

erosion

dilation

set theory

Both A and B

Answer

MCQ: Structuring elements have origins at

top left

top right

center

bottom left

Answer

MCQ: Structuring element is also called

pixels

lines
subimage

noise

Answer

MCQ: With dilation process images get

thinner

shrinked

thickened

sharpened

Answer

MCQ: Opening and closing are each others

neighbors

duals

centers

corners

Answer

MCQ: Fully containment of the SE in an image is required in

erosion

dilation

opening
closing

Answer

MCQ: Erosion followed by dilation is called

opening

closing

blurring

translation

Answer

MCQ: To make the SE rectangular array approach that is used is called

padding

logic diagram

set theory

map

Answer

MCQ: Hit-or-miss transformation is used for shape

removal

detection

compression

decompression
Answer

MCQ: Mathematical morphology is a

set theory

logic diagram

graph

map

Answer

MCQ: Duality principle is valid to involved

one equation

both equations

any equation

Both A and B

Answer

MCQ: Opening is represented by

AoB

A+B

A-B

AxB

Answer
MCQ: Subimages used to probe the image is called

pixels

frames

structuring elements

coordinates

Answer

MCQ: Closing produces

narrow breaks

lines

dots

noise

Answer

MCQ: Replacing the object from its origin referred to as

reflection

compression

decompression

translation

Answer
MCQ: A o B is the subset of

−A

−B

Answer

MCQ: Dilation is used for

bridging gaps

compression

decompression

translation

Answer

MCQ: (AoB)oB is equal to

A .B

A+B

AoB

AxB

Answer

MCQ: With erosion boundaries of the image are

expanded

shrinked

blurred

sharpened

Answer

MCQ: Best removal of lines from image will be produced by the SE of size

1x1

2x2

3x3

5x5

Answer

MCQ: In Z3 two are the coordinates and the third component is

pixels

frames

objects

intensity

Answer

MCQ: Sets in morphology are referred to as image's

pixels

frames

objects

coordinates

Answer

MCQ: Dilation is used for image

expansion

compression

decompression

translation

Answer

MCQ: In erosion details smaller than the SE are

reflected

translated

compressed

filtered

Answer

MCQ: Dont care is marked by the symbol

A
B

Answer

MCQ: Erosion is referred to as

reflection

compression

filtering

decompression

Answer

MCQ: Structuring elements usually are

square array

circular array

triangular array

rectangular array

Answer

MCQ: Erosion is used for object

removing lines

producing lines
blurring image

sharpening image

Answer

MCQ: The translation of set B is the

{c|c = b+z}

{c|c = b-z}

{c|c = bxz}

{c|c = b}

Answer

MCQ: In morphological operations SE is viewed as

correlation mask

convolution mask

low pass filter

high pass filter

Answer

MCQ: Erosion is used for object

separation

combination

togetherness
Both A and B

Answer

MCQ: SE in the morphology process is called

software engineering

structuring elements

structure eliminate

software engineer

Answer

MCQ: Erosion and dilation are each others

neighbors

duals

centers

corners

Answer

MCQ: Tuple has coordinates

y,z

z,x

x,y

x,y,z
Answer

MCQ: Closing is used for

separation

compression

decompression

filling holes

Answer

MCQ: Reflection of the rectangular SE is always

square

symmetric

asymmetric

translated

Answer

MCQ: The reflection of set B is the

{w|w = -b}

{w|w = b}

{w = -b}

{w|w = -(-b)}

Answer